AM2020

PN 15088:K ECN 01-149
Fire Alarm Control Panel

Panel
AM2020/AFP1010
K
Document 15088
3/21/01 Revision
While a fire alarm system may lower insurance
Fire Alarm System Limitations rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system–typically made up of smoke Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a prede-
ing devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification termined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise
capability–can provide early warning of a developing fire. heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time.
Such a system, however, does not assure protection against For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector
property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro-
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detec- tection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect
tors be located throughout a protected premise following the property, not life.
recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the
Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the sys-
manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and tem for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communi-
the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use cations, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so lo-
of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no cated, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crip-
charge to all installing dealers. A study by the Federal Emer- pling its ability to report a fire.
gency Management Agency (an agency of the United States Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in if these devices are located on the other side of closed or
as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are de- partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.
signed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guar- Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or
antee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medica-
may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not tion. Please note that:
function, for a variety of reasons:
• Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot in people with conditions such as epilepsy.
reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on
• Studies have shown that certain people, even when they
roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors
hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the
also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a build-
meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsibil-
ing. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a
ity to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make
first-floor or basement fire.
people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the
Particles of combustion or "smoke" from a developing fire proper reaction to alarm signals.
may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors be-
• In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can
cause:
cause temporary or permanent hearing loss.
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or
A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical
chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow.
power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby
• Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries
the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. have been properly maintained and replaced regularly.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air Equipment used in the system may not be technically com-
outlets. patible with the control. It is essential to use only equipment
• Smoke detectors may be drawn into air returns before listed for service with your control panel.
reaching the detector. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a
The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service
smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at or temporarily disabled. For added protection against tele-
various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not phone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are rec-
created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the ommended.
detectors will not go into alarm. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inade-
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing quate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in
limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per
chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA stan-
fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ion- dards. At a minimum, the requirements of Chapter 7 of NFPA
izing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires 72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of
better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in differ- dust, dirt or high air velocity require more frequent mainte-
ent ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither nance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged
type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detec- through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance
tor may not provide adequate warning of a fire. should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized pro-
warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with fessional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records
matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent of all inspections should be kept.
explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of
flammable materials, etc.).
Precau-Lg.p65 01/18/2000
Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free
installation with long-term reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may
nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to light-
of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equip- ning-induced transients. Although no system is completely
ment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper
modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside
Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased sus-
manual is read and understood. ceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Techni-
CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software cal Services Department if any problems are anticipated or
Changes. To ensure proper system operation, this product encountered.
must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 7 after Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or in-
any programming operation or change in site-specific soft- serting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
ware. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, ad- Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
dition or deletion of system components, or after any modifica- reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make
tion, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi-
All components, circuits, system operations, or software func- cations, verify that they will not interfere with battery, trans-
tions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. former, and printed circuit board location.
In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvert- Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs.
ently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced
directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 de- terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal
vices, must also be tested and proper system operation veri- removal.
fied.
Though designed to last many years, system components
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at can fail at any time. This system contains static-sensitive
0-49° C/32-120° F and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non- components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap
condensing) at 30° C/86° F. However, the useful life of the before handling any circuits so that static charges are re-
system's standby batteries and the electronic components moved from the body. Use static-suppressive packaging
may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.
and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system
Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and
and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nomi-
programming manuals. These instructions must be followed
nal room temperature of 15-27° C/60-80° F.
to avoid damage to the control panel and associated
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon
indicating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more proper installation by authorized personnel.
than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage.
FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can Canadian Requirements
radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may limits for radiation noise emissions from digital
cause interference to radio communications. It has apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations
been tested and found to comply with the limits for class of the Canadian Department of Communications.
A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of
Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits
FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable
radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux
protection against such interference when operated in a
appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le
a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which
ministere des Communications du Canada.
case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
Precau-Lg.p65 01/18/2000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter One Installation
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Capabilities and Capacities ................................................................................................................... 1-3
Fire Alarm and Related Service Standards ........................................................................................... 1-4
Section One Installation Overview ............................................................................ 1-5

Section 1.1 Basic Equipment .......................................................................................................... 1-5
Section 1.2 Related Documentation ................................................................................................ 1-5
Table 1.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 Related Documentation ..................................................................... 1-6
Section Two Cabinets ................................................................................................ 1-7

Section 2.1 Mounting the Backbox ................................................................................................. 1-8
Figure 2.1-1 Cabinet Backbox Mount ................................................................................................. 1-8
Section 2.2 CAB-3 Series Backboxes ............................................................................................ 1-11
Section 2.3 Mounting the ICA-4L ................................................................................................... 1-13
Figure 2.3-1 ICA-4L 16 Position Receptacle Connections ................................................................ 1-13
Figure 2.3-2 Expansion Power Cable Part Number 75378 ................................................................ 1-13
Figure 2.3-3 Connecting Two ICA-4Ls .............................................................................................. 1-14
Figure 2.3-4 Power Cable Part Number 75379 .................................................................................. 1-15
Figure 2.3-5 15 Position Receptacle Connections ............................................................................ 1-15
Figure 2.3-6 Cable Part Number 75142 ............................................................................................. 1-16
Figure 2.3-7 Cable Part Number 75142 Connected to the ICA-4L ..................................................... 1-16
Figure 2.3-8 Mount System Boards to the ICA-4L Chassis .............................................................. 1-17
Section 2.4 Component Placement ............................................................................................... 1-18
Table 2.4-1 Cabinet Size Information .............................................................................................. 1-18
Figure 2.4-1 Component Placement Guidelines ................................................................................ 1-18
Figure 2.4-2 AFP1010 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme ........................................................................ 1-19
Figure 2.4-3 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme ........................................................................................ 1-20
Figure 2.4-4 LIB-400 Placement in an AFP1010 ............................................................................... 1-21
Figure 2.4-5 LIB Placement Example in an AFP1010 ....................................................................... 1-22
Figure 2.4-6 LIB-400 Placement in an AM2020 ................................................................................ 1-23
Figure 2.4-7 LIB Placement Example in an AM2020 ........................................................................ 1-24
Section 2.5 Optional Chassis Mounting ....................................................................................... 1-25
Figure 2.5-1 Optional Chassis Mount ............................................................................................... 1-25
Section 2.6 Other Components ..................................................................................................... 1-26
Figure 2.6-1 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System ................................................................ 1-26
Section 2.7 Display Interface Connection ..................................................................................... 1-27
Figure 2.7-1 Display Interface Assembly .......................................................................................... 1-27
Figure 2.7-2 Wiring Placement Diagram ........................................................................................... 1-28
Figure 2.7-3 Power-Limited and Non Power-Limited Wiring .............................................................. `1-29
Figure 2.7-4 Dress Panel Placement Diagram .................................................................................. 1-30
Section 2.8 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis ...................................... 1-31
Figure 2.8-1 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis ........................................... 1-32
Section Three Power Supplies ................................................................................... 1-33

Section 3.1 The AC Primary Power Input ..................................................................................... 1-33
Table 3.1-1 120 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit .......................................................................................... 1-33
Table 3.1-2 220/240 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit .................................................................................... 1-33
Section 3.2 The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply ..................................................... 1-33
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (1 of 2) ..................................... 1-35
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (2 of 2) ..................................... 1-36
Table 3.2-2 Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw .................................................. 1-37
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

iv
CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)
Table 3.2-3 Secondary Power Standby and Fire Alarm Load ........................................................... 1-37
Table 3.2-4 Battery Size Requirements ........................................................................................... 1-38
Figure 3.2-1 Mount the Main Power Supply ...................................................................................... 1-39
Section 3.2.1 The MPS-TR Main Power Supply .............................................................................. 1-40
Figure 3.2.1-1 Threading the Screws ................................................................................................... 1-40
Figure 3.2.1-2 Mounting the MPS-TR .................................................................................................. 1-41
Figure 3.2.1-3 System Common Terminal Connection ........................................................................ 1-41
Section 3.3 Connecting the Main Power Supply .......................................................................... 1-42
Table 3.3-1 MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply Loads ..................................................... 1-43
Figure 3.3-1 Field Wiring the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Power Supply ............................................... 1-44
Section 3.4 The Optional Main Power Meter ................................................................................ 1-45
Figure 3.4-1 Installation of the Main Power Meter ............................................................................ 1-45
Section 3.5 The CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger ....................................................................... 1-46
Figure 3.5-1 CHG-120 Installation into CAB-3 Series (3.6-1a) and BB-55 (3.6-1b) Cabinets ............. 1-46
Figure 3.5-2 CHG-120 Connections .................................................................................................. 1-46
Section 3.6 The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply ........................................................................ 1-47
Figure 3.6-1 Mounting the APS-6R to a Chassis .............................................................................. 1-48
Figure 3.6-2 Cover Installations ........................................................................................................ 1-48
Figure 3.6-3 Typical APS-6R Wiring ................................................................................................. 1-48
Figure 3.6-4 Trouble Bus Connections for Multiple APS-6R Power Supply Configurations ............... 1-49
Section 3.7 The Central Processing Unit (CPU-2020, CPU-2) ...................................................... 1-50
Figure 3.7-1 CPU Alarm and Trouble Contacts ................................................................................. 1-50
Section Four Signaling ............................................................................................. 1-51

Section 4.1 The LIB Signaling Line Circuit .................................................................................. 1-51
Section 4.2 The Loop Interface Boards (LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400) .................................. 1-52
Figure 4.2-1 The LIB-200 .................................................................................................................. 1-52
Figure 4.2-2 Loop Interface Boards .................................................................................................. 1-54
Figure 4.2-3 Surge Suppressor/FACP Connections .......................................................................... 1-55
Section 4.3 LIB SLC Loop Wiring Requirements ......................................................................... 1-56
Figure 4.3-1 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 4) ...................................................................... 1-56
Figure 4.3-2 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 6) ...................................................................... 1-57
Figure 4.3-3 Typical NFPA Style 4 SLC Loops ................................................................................ 1-58
Figure 4.3-4 NFPA Style 6 LIB SLC Loop ........................................................................................ 1-59
Figure 4.3-5 NFPA Style 7 SLC ........................................................................................................ 1-60
Section 4.4 SLC Loop Shield Termination (Optional) ................................................................. 1-61
Figure 4.4-1 Shield Termination in No Conduit .................................................................................. 1-61
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Full conduit (LIB-200 only) .......................................................... 1-61
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Partial Conduit (LIB-200 only) ..................................................... 1-62
Section 4.5 The Isolator Module .................................................................................................... 1-63
Figure 4.5-1 The Loop Isolator Module (ISO-X) ................................................................................ 1-63
Figure 4.5-2 Isolating a Branch of a Style 4 SLC Loop ..................................................................... 1-63
Figure 4.5-3 Isolating the Remainder of a Style 4 SLC Loop ............................................................ 1-63
Section 4.6 Monitor Modules ......................................................................................................... 1-65
Figure 4.6-1 MMX-1 or MMX-2 Monitor Modules .............................................................................. 1-65
Figure 4.6-2 MMX-101 Monitor Module ............................................................................................. 1-65
Figure 4.6-3 NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit .......................................................................... 1-66
Figure 4.6-4 NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit .......................................................................... 1-67
Figure 4.6-5 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style B IDC) .................................................. 1-68
Figure 4.6-6 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style D IDC) .................................................. 1-69
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01 v

CHAPTER ONE INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)
Section 4.7 The Control Module .................................................................................................... 1-70

Figure 4.7-1 The CMX Control Module .............................................................................................. 1-70
Figure 4.7-2 Providing Power to Control Modules ............................................................................. 1-71
Figure 4.7-3 Power Distribution ......................................................................................................... 1-72
Figure 4.7-4 NFPA Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit ................................................................ 1-73
Figure 4.7-5 NFPA Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit ................................................................. 1-74
Figure 4.7-6 Using the CMX as a Form-C Relay ............................................................................... 1-75
Figure 4.7-7 Typical APS-6R Wiring to a CMX Module ..................................................................... 1-75
Section 4.8 The Addressable Manual Pull Station ....................................................................... 1-76

Figure 4.8-1 Addressable Manual Pull Station .................................................................................. 1-76
Figure 4.8-2 Wiring Addressable Pull Stations .................................................................................. 1-76
Section 4.9 Intelligent Detectors .................................................................................................... 1-77
Section 4.10 Smoke Detector Installation ....................................................................................... 1-78
Figure 4.10-1 Wiring the Smoke Detector Base .................................................................................. 1-78
Figure 4.10-2 Wiring the B524BI Isolator Base ................................................................................... 1-79
Figure 4.10-3 Wiring the B524RB Relay Base .................................................................................... 1-79
Figure 4.10-4 Typical SLC Loop (Style 4) ........................................................................................... 1-80
Section 4.11 The XP Series Transponder ....................................................................................... 1-81
Figure 4.11-1 XP Dress Panel and XPP-1 Module ............................................................................. 1-81
Section Five Serial Communications ...................................................................... 1-83

Section 5.1 Optional Serial Interface Boards ............................................................................... 1-83
Figure 5.1-1 Male DB-25 Connector .................................................................................................. 1-83
Figure 5.1-2 Guidelines for Terminating the Shield ........................................................................... 1-84
Figure 5.1-3 SIB-NET/SIB-2048A Terminal Designations ................................................................. 1-85
Section 5.2 The CRT-2 Terminal .................................................................................................... 1-86
Figure 5.2-1 CRT to SIB Connections .............................................................................................. 1-87
Section 5.3 Remote Printers .......................................................................................................... 1-88
Figure 5.3-1 Remote Printer to SIB Connections .............................................................................. 1-88
Figure 5.3-2 Keltron Printer Connections .......................................................................................... 1-89
Section 5.4 Annunciator Modules ................................................................................................. 1-90
Figure 5.4-1 EIA-485 to SIB Connections ......................................................................................... 1-91
Section Six Standard-Specific Requirements ...................................................... 1-92

Section 6.1 NFPA 72-1993 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems ............................................................ 1-94
Figure 6.1-1 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System (Fire Alarm Signal Transmission) .................................... 1-94
Section 6.2 Generating Event-Pending Signals at a Remote Location ....................................... 1-95
Section 6.3 Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply ........................................................ 1-96
Figure 6.3-1 Uninterruptable Power Supply ....................................................................................... 1-96
Section 6.4 NFPA 72-1993 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ........................................................ 1-97
Table 6.4-1 NIB-96 (Minimal Configuration) ..................................................................................... 1-97
Figure 6.4-1 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems ................................................................................... 1-98
Figure 6.4-2 NFPA 72-1993 Proprietary and Central Station Protected Premises Unit/
Proprietary and Central Station Receiving Unit Interface .............................................. 1-99
Section 6.5 Applying/Removing Power to the Fire Alarm System ........................................... 1-100
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

vi
Chapter Two Operation
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 2-2
Section One The Display Interface Assembly ......................................................... 2-8
Section 1.1 Normal Operation ........................................................................................................ 2-8
Section 1.2 Read Status ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Display System Configuration .................................................................................. 2-11
Point Read .................................................................................................................. 2-14
Special Status ............................................................................................................ 2-16
Section Two Prior/Next/Auto Step .......................................................................... 2-17
Section Three Special Function ................................................................................. 2-18

Reports ....................................................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 3-1 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function Report Printout .................................................. 2-19
The History Buffer ..................................................................................................... 2-20
Figure 3-2 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function History Buffer Printout ...................................... 2-21
Section Four Fire Alarms ......................................................................................... 2-22

Section 4.1 Acknowledging a Fire Alarm .................................................................................... 2-23
Section Five Troubles .............................................................................................. 2-24

Section 5.1 Trouble...with SLC Loop Devices ............................................................................. 2-24
Section 5.2 Trouble...with Disabled Zones .................................................................................. 2-25
Section 5.3 Trouble...with the AM2020/AFP1010 System .......................................................... 2-26
Section 5.4 Trouble...with the Annunciators .............................................................................. 2-26
Section 5.5 Block Acknowledge ................................................................................................... 2-27
Section 5.5A Acknowledging Troubles in Receiving Unit Mode ................................................. 2-28
Section 5.6 Displaying Current Alarms and Troubles ................................................................ 2-28
Section Six Remote Peripherals ............................................................................ 2-29
Section Seven Trouble Messages .............................................................................. 2-30
Section Eight Drift Compensation ............................................................................ 2-32
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01 vii

Chapter Three Programming
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
The Initial Programming Outline ................................................................................... 3-5
Section One Main Programming ............................................................................... 3-7

Figure 1-1 Main Programming Menu Flow Chart ............................................................................ 3-8
Section 1.1 Partial System Programming ..................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 1-2 Partial System Programming Submenu Flow Chart .................................................... 3-10
Section 1.1.1 LIB Installation ........................................................................................................... 3-11
Section 1.1.2 LIB SLC Loop Style .................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 1-3 Install Option Flow Chart ............................................................................................. 3-11
Figure 1-4 Style Option Flow Chart .............................................................................................. 3-11
Section 1.1.3 Time Delays ................................................................................................................ 3-12
Figure 1-5 Time Delay Option Flow Chart .................................................................................... 3-12
Section 1.1.4 Enabling the Trouble Bus .......................................................................................... 3-13
Section 1.1.5 Zone Boundary ........................................................................................................... 3-13
Section 1.1.6 External Equipment .................................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 1-6 External Equipment Option Flow Chart ......................................................................... 3-15
Section 1.1.7 Local Parameters ........................................................................................................ 3-18
Figure 1-7 Local Parameter Option Flow Chart .............................................................................. 3-18
Table 1-1 Extended Local Mode Categories and Software Type I.D.s .......................................... 3-20
Section 1.1.8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming ....................................................... 3-22
Figure 1-8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Option Flow Chart ..................................................... 3-22
Section 1.1.9 Additional System Parameters .................................................................................. 3-25
Figure 1-9 Additional System Parameters Option Flow Chart ........................................................ 3-25
Section 1.2 Full System Programming ......................................................................................... 3-28
Section 1.3 Partial Point Programming ........................................................................................ 3-30
Figure 1-10 Partial Point Programming Flow Chart .......................................................................... 3-31
Section 1.3.1 Type I.D. ...................................................................................................................... 3-31
Section 1.3.2 Control-By-Event ......................................................................................................... 3-32
Section 1.3.3 Label ............................................................................................................................ 3-32
Section 1.3.4 Optional Features ....................................................................................................... 3-33
Figure 1-11 Optional Features Flow Chart ....................................................................................... 3-33
Section 1.3.5 Annunciator Mapping ................................................................................................. 3-34
Figure 1-12 Annunciator Mapping Option Flow Chart ....................................................................... 3-34
Section 1.3.6 Cooperative Control-By-Event ................................................................................... 3-35
Section 1.4 Full Point Programming ............................................................................................ 3-36
Figure 1-13 Full Point Programming Flow Chart .............................................................................. 3-36
Section 1.5 Remove ........................................................................................................................ 3-39
Section 1.6 Password ..................................................................................................................... 3-39
Section 1.7 Message ....................................................................................................................... 3-39
Section 1.8 History Mode ............................................................................................................... 3-40
Figure 1-14 History Buffer Option Flow Chart .................................................................................. 3-40
Section Two The Alter Status Menu ........................................................................... 3-43

Figure 2-1 Alter Status Menu Flow Chart ..................................................................................... 3-44
Section 2.1 Disable Point .............................................................................................................. 3-44
Section 2.2 Control Module .......................................................................................................... 3-45
Section 2.3 Detector Sensitivity ................................................................................................... 3-45
Section 2.4 Time ............................................................................................................................. 3-45
Section 2.5 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 3-46
Section 2.6 Walk Test .................................................................................................................... 3-46
Figure 2-2 Walk Test Option Flow Chart ...................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 2-3 Printout of an AM2020/AFP1010 Walk Test Report .................................................... 3-50
Section 2.7 Group Zone Disable ................................................................................................... 3-51
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01
viii
Section Three Software Type I.D.s ............................................................................. 3-52
Section Four Control-by-Event Programming ........................................................ 3-59
Section 4.1 Control-By-Event Programming ................................................................................ 3-59
Section 4.2 Operators .................................................................................................................... 3-61
Section 4.3 Size Limitations .......................................................................................................... 3-65
Section 4.4 Cooperative Control-By-Event ................................................................................... 3-67
Section 4.5 The Null Control-By-Event ......................................................................................... 3-67
Section 4.6 Programming Examples ............................................................................................ 3-68
Section Five Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation .............................................................. 3-72
CHAPTER FOUR SECURITY

Section One Installing and Programming Combination Fire/Security FireAlarm Systems ...... 4-3
Section 1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4-3
Section 1.2 General Security Requirements ................................................................................... 4-3
Section 1.3 Security Configuration - Specific Requirements ........................................................ 4-4
Table 1.3-1 Building Perimeter Security Devices .............................................................................. 4-4
Table 1.3-2 Interior Space Security Devices ..................................................................................... 4-5
Table 1.3-3 Zone numbers - One Set of Zones ................................................................................. 4-6
Table 1.3-4 Zone Numbers - Two Sets of Zones ............................................................................... 6-4
Figure 1.3-1 Simplest Security System .............................................................................................. 4-7
Figure 1.3-2 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System ........................................................................ 4-8
Figure 1.3-3 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System ........................................................................ 4-9
Figure 1.3-4 Single Tenant Consolidated Security System ............................................................... 4-10
Figure 1.3-5 Multiple Tenant consolidated Security System ............................................................. 4-12
Figure 1.3-6 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay .................................................. 4-13
Figure 1.3-7 Connecting an MMX-101 Module to the RKS-S ............................................................ 4-16
Figure 1.3-8 Connecting an MMX-1 to the RKS-S ............................................................................ 4-16
Figure 1.3-9 Multiple Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay ................................................ 4-17
Figure 1.3-10 Single Tenant Security System with Ringback ............................................................. 4-19
Figure 1.3-11 CMX Control Module for Ringback ................................................................................ 4-26
Figure 1.3-12 Installing an STS-1 Security Tamper Switch ................................................................ 4-26
Figure 1.3-13 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-101 Monitor Module ..................................... 4-27
Figure 1.3-14 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-1 Monitor Module ......................................... 4-27
Figure 1.3-15 Multiple Tenant with Security System for Ringback ..................................................... 4-28
Figure 1.3-16 System Requirements .................................................................................................. 4-29
APPENDICES
Appendix A Circuit/Device Ratings ........................................................................ A-3
Section A.1 Design Considerations ................................................................................................ A-3
Table A-1 Wiring Selection Chart ................................................................................................... A-3
Table A-2 Circuit Ratings/Connections .......................................................................................... A-4
Appendix B Listed Equipment ................................................................................ B-1

Section B.1 Underwriter's Laboratories .......................................................................................... B-1
Section B.2 Factory Mutual ............................................................................................................. B-2
Section B.3 Lloyd's Register ........................................................................................................... B-3
Section B.4 United States Coast Guard .......................................................................................... B-4
Section B.5 Optional System Components .................................................................................... B-5
Section B.6 City of New York .......................................................................................................... B-6
PROGRAMMING SHEETS & GLOSSARY

Programming Sheets ..................................................................................................... G-2
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations .......................................................................... G-6
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01 ix
Notes
AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

x
AM2020
AFP1010
Chapter One
Installation
Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

1-1
1-2 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Introduction
Capabilities and Capacities
The AM2020/AFP1010 is an Intelligent Analog Addressable Combination Fire Alarm/Security Control Panel
capable of supporting the following:
Intelligent Analog Addressable Fire Detectors

Photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors.
Intelligent Addressable Fire and Security Initiating Devices

Pull Stations and modules that monitor any conventional normally open contact type devices (4-wire smoke
detectors, heat detectors, pull stations, supervisory switches, water flow switches), 2-wire conventional smoke
detectors or any normally closed contact type device, such as a door contact that may be used in security
applications.
Intelligent Addressable Notification Devices and Addressable Control Relays

Modules that can supervise and switch power to notification appliances or serve as Form-C control relays.
Notification Appliance Power

Notification appliance power is provided by the main power supply. Additional notification appliance power may
be provided by optional power supplies listed for fire protective signaling.
Voice Evacuation Functions

Prerecorded or live voice alarm messages can be dispatched through an audio message generator. A fire
fighter's master telephone unit allows communication between the control panel and fire fighter's telephones
installed throughout the system.
Audio Amplifier Power

Audio power is provided by several sizes of audio amplifiers for use in voice alarm applications.
Peripherals
An AM2020/AFP1010 system can support remotely-mounted video display units, printers, and serial
annunciators.
AM2020 Maximum Intelligent Addressable Device Capacity (10 LIB-200/LIB-200A or five LIB-400 modules)
990 Intelligent photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors.
+ 990 Addressable pull stations, monitor modules, control modules and XP Transponder circuits.
= 1980 Addressable devices system wide.
AFP1010 Maximum Intelligent Addressable Device Capacity (four LIB-200/LIB-200A or two LIB-400
modules)
396 Intelligent photoelectric, ionization, and thermal (heat) detectors.
+ 396 Addressable pull stations, monitor modules, control modules and XP Transponder circuits.
= 792 Addressable devices system wide.
TE R M PART NUMBER
To the right are general terms and PRN PRN-4, PRN-5
their associated specific part numbers CRT CRT-2
as referenced in this manual: MMX MMX-1, MMX-101, MMX-2
CMX CMX-1 or CMX-2
Note: The term "loop" is used in a general way throughout this document and does not necessarily mean that the
circuit is a Class A configuration, unless a reference is made to Style 6, Style 7, Style D or Style Z circuit
performance.

1-3
Fire Alarm and Related Service Standards
It is imperative the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and review
the following documents for applicability:
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems
NFPA 92B Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas
UL 916 Energy Management Systems
UL1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
UL 1459 Surge Suppressor Device Compatibility
UL1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units
CAN/ULC - S527 - M87 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems
EIA-232E Serial Interface Standard
EIA-485 Serial Interface Standard
NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods
NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances
CAN/ULC - S524 - M91 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
Applicable local and state building codes

Section One
Installation Overview
Section 1.1 Basic Equipment

The basic equipment package for the Notifier AM2020 is the BE-2020N and the basic equipment package
for the Notifier AFP1010 is the BE-1010N. The following list may be used to identify the components pro-
vided in a BE-2020N and/or BE-1010N shipment. Refer to Appendix B of this manual for an optional equip-
ment listing.
Cables:
MPS/ICA Power Cable (75378)
CPU/MPS Supervisory Cable (71031)
BP-3 Battery Dress Panel
CPU-2020 (BE-2020N) or CPU-2 (BE-1010N) Central Processor Unit
DIA-1010 or DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly

CPU to DIB Cable (75226)
ICA-4L Interconnect Chassis Assemblies
Refer to Section Six, Standard Specific Requirements, for minimum system equipment
requirements.
Section 1.2 Related Documentation

To obtain a complete understanding of specific features within the AM2020/AFP1010 or to become familiar with
functions in general, make use of the documentation noted in Table 1.2-1.
VeriFire™ is a Windows® 95/98 based software program which provides an off-line programming and test utility
designed to reduce installation programming time.
The Notifier Document chart (DOC-NOT) provides the current document revision. A copy of this document is
included with each shipment of Notifier products.

1-5
TITLE NUMBER TITLE NUMBER
AM2020/AFP1010 FIRE ALARM CONTROL
15088 ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL SYSTEM 15842
PANEL
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD-80) 15037 L AMP DRIVER MODULES (LDM) 15885
NETWORK CONTROL STATION 51095 VOICE ALARM MULTIPLEX 15889
INTELLIGENT N ETWORK ANNUNCIATOR (INA) 15092 THE XP SERIES TRANSPONDER SYSTEM 15888
UNIVERSAL ZONE CODER INSTALLATION
15216 NETWORK ADAPTOR MODULE (NAM-232) 50038
(UZC-256)
THE UDACT UNIVERSAL DIGITAL ALARM
PRODUCT INSTALLATION DOCUMENT (CCM-1) 15328 50050
COMMUNICATOR /TRANSMITTER
FCPS-24/FCPS-24E FIELD
PRODUCT INSTALLATION DOCUMENT (MPS-TR) 15331 CHARGER/POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION , 50059
OPERATION AND APPLICATION MANUAL
AM2020/AFP1010 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS 15337 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) MANUAL 511253
NOTIFIER DEVICE COMPATIBILITY DOCUMENT 15378 MEDIA INTERFACE B OARD (MIB) 50255
ANALOG FIRE PANEL (AFP-200) 15511 REPEATER (RPT) 50256
CANADIAN REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
15631 NOTI-FIRE-NETTM 50257
AM2020/AFP1010
N ETWORK INTERFACE B OARD (NIB-96) 15666 TELEPHONE/PANEL INTERFACE (TPI-232) 50372
AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM
SMOKE CONTROL MANUAL 15712 WARDEN STATION SERIES 50705
PRODUCT INSTALLATION DRAWING
50253/50259/
ANALOG FIRE PANEL (AFP-300/AFP-400) MMX-2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS M500-03-00
50260
ACT-2 AUDIO COUPLING TRANSFORMER 51118 CHG-120 BATTERY CHARGER 50641
APS-6R AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY 50702 XP5 SERIES TRANSPONDERS 50786
VEC 25/50 VOICE EVACUATION
RM-1 SERIES REMOTE MICROPHONES 51138 50686
CONTROLPANEL
NBG-12LX PULL STATION 51093 PAGEN ET MANUAL 51311
Table 1.2-1 Related Documentation

Section Two
Cabinet Selection and Component
General
Installation
The cabinet assembly consists of two basic components; the backbox (SBB) and door (DR). All cabinets for the
AM2020/AFP1010 are fabricated from 16-gauge steel.
Cabinet parts are painted Notifier gray or red with navy blue windows.
Provided with the key-locked door are a pin-type hinge, window, two keys, and the necessary hardware to mount
the door to the backbox.
The backbox has been engineered to provide ease-of-entry, with knockouts positioned at numerous points to
simplify conduit installation.
The hinges are field-selectable for either left or right mounting. The door opens 180 degrees.
Product Line Information

Cabinets are available in sizes A through D. The cabinets are identified by product codes CAB-A3 for the
smallest enclosure through CAB-D3 for the largest.
A trim ring (TR) option is available for semi-flush mounting (TR-A3, TR-B3, TR-C3, TR-D3).
A wire channel (WC) option provides a pair of wire trays to neatly route wire between rows in the cabinet. Order
one pair per cabinet row.
Prior To Installation
The doors may be mounted in either a left or right opening configuration; aiding in installation and service when
two control panels are mounted in a confined area or side-by-side (as shown). In this manner the doors may be
opened "barn door" style, creating an open work space. Note that in this type of installation it is necessary to
leave enough space between cabinets to insert a key into the locks on the door frames.
Left Mount
On a left mounted door, the Display Interface
Assembly (DIA) dress panel cannot be opened Left Right
Mounted Mounted
when the door is at less than a 120 degree
Door Door
angle to the cabinet. If you are using the left
mounting option, be sure that the door can
open at least 120 degrees. This is especially
important if the cabinet is to be mounted in a
closed area, such as a closet or utility room.
NOTE
The two hinges and the two alignment tabs
should be attached to the backbox before any
equipment is mounted in the backbox. See the
Door Assembly Instructions section.

1-7
Section 2.1 Mounting the Backbox
The cabinet may be either surface mounted or semi-flush mounted (refer to Figure 2.1-1). Mount the cabinet in
a clean, dry, vibration-free area, using the four holes provided in the back surface of the backbox. Locate the
cabinet so that the top edge is 66 inches (168 cm) above the surface of the finished floor. This procedure places
the center of the control panel keypad 60 inches (152 cm) above the finished floor.
Mounting
Holes
Figure 2.1-1 Cabinet Backbox Mount
CAUTION!
Unless you are familiar with the placement of components within this backbox, use only the knockout
locations provided for conduit entry. Do not allow any conduit entry at the bottom of the panel where the
batteries are to be mounted (see Figure 2.4-2).

Door Assembly Instructions
Hinges can be either left or right mounted. The Top
illustrations and text depict a left-mount example. For Left Corner
right mounting, simply substitute right for left in the
instructions.
1) Insert door hinges (A) into the top and bottom

slots of the side to be hinged (in this case the left
side). Secure the hinges to the studs in the B
backbox with the nuts provided. Note that the
small hole on the outer tab faces outward. A
2) Thread stud (B) into the BOTTOM hinge first.

Thread from the bottom up. Place the grounding
star washer on the stud. Place the door's lower
corner onto this stud. Placing the door on the Small Hole
lower stud first provides a place for the door to Faces Outward
rest while completing the assembly.
3) Align the door on the backbox, so that the door

sits directly under the top hinge. Thread
remaining stud (B) into the TOP hinge and
through the hole in the top of the door. The door
should now swing freely.
Bottom
Left Corner
Star
Washer

1-9
4. Install the door alignment tabs (C) in the unused
Top Right
slots on the backbox (top and bottom). (In this ex- Corner
ample the door was mounted on the left, leaving the
unused slots on the right). Secure alignment tab (C)
to top PEM stud with nut provided. These tabs align
the door correctly with the backbox and prevent the
door from being "skewed" open.
5. Punch out the knockout for the door lock and install
the snap-in lock mechanism by pressing it into the hole. C
Be sure to do this LAST, so you will be sure to knock out
the correct side.
CAUTION: The lock must be installed in locked position

with the key removed. The installation picture below
shows the proper lock position for a left-hand mounted
cabinet door.
Left hinged door
Install
Lock Here
Bottom Right
Corner
Open
Locked Locked
Open
The lock mechanism as viewed The lock mechanism as viewed

in a left-hinged mounting appli- in a right-hinged mounting appli-
cation. The lock would be placed cation. The lock would be placed
in the right edge of the door. in the left edge of the door.
1-10 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.2 CAB-3 Series Backboxes
CAB-A3
The CAB A-3 is the cabinet and door assembly for one mounting row. An optional TR-A3 trim ring is available for
use with the A-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 20.125 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 511.175
mm high). The following replacement parts are available:
• DR-A3 door
• SBB-A3 backbox
CAB-C3
The CAB-C3 is the cabinet and door assembly for three mounting rows. An optional TR-C3 trim ring is available
for use with the C-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 37.250 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 946.15
• DR-C3 door
• SBB-C3 backbox

1-11
CAB-B3
The CAB-B3 is the cabinet and door assembly for two mounting rows. An optional TR-B3 trim ring is available for
use with the B-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 28.625 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 727.075
• DR-B3 door
• SBB-B3 backbox
CAB-D3
The CAB-D3 cabinet and door assembly for four mounting rows. An optional TR-D3 trim ring is available for use
with the D-size cabinet, which is 24.125 inches wide by 48.875 inches high (612.775 mm wide by 1165.225 mm
high). The following replacement parts are available:
• DR-D3 door
• SBB-D3 backbox
1-12 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.3 Mounting the ICA-4L
The AM2020/AFP1010 system may use one to three Interconnect Chassis Assemblies (ICA), depending on the
specific installation requirements. The AFP1010 requires only one ICA when using LIB-400s.
The ICA-4L is a low profile mounting chassis that currently replaces the ICA-4 in all BE-1010N and BE-2020N
basic equipment kits. The ICA-4L is compatible with both CAB-2 and CAB-3 cabinets and the ICA-4 chassis.
The ICA-4L is required when employing the LIB-400 local mode general alarm bus (refer to The Loop Interface
Boards, Section 4.2 of this chapter).
When using more than one ICA-4L, interconnect each ICA-4L before mounting it to the backbox by mating the
male connector on one chassis to the female connector on the other (no cable is required). Align all ICA-4L
Assemblies over the studs in the backbox. Connect chassis grounding cable, part number 71073 for each board
to be installed on the ICA-4L to an ICA-4L stud. Secure the assemblies and cables with the nuts and washers
provided. Each ICA-4L is marked with "TOP" for proper orientation.
The ICA-4L is recommended when installing the SIB-2048A, SIB-NET, LIB-200A, or LIB-400 because a 16-
position receptacle is mated with a 16-pin plug. The LIB-400 is used to illustrate this in Figure 2.3-1.
LIB-400
Figure 2.3-1 ICA-4L 16 Position Receptacle Connections
The power cable part number 75378, (refer to Figure 2.3-2) is able to mate properly with the ICA-4L since it has
a 16 position receptacle. The power cable also has an 8-position receptacle to connect to the main power supply
(refer to Figure 2.3-3).
59 in. (149.86 cm) - expands

to fit a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-2 Power Cable Part Number 75378

1-13
OPTIONAL
Figure 2.3-3 Using the Optional Expansion Power Cable
1-14 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Expansion power cable part number 75379 (Figure 2.3-4), is able to mate properly with the ICA-4L since it
consists of a 16-pin plug and a 16-position receptacle (Figure 2.3-3).
Note: Only one power expansion cable is needed per system.
OPTIONAL
36 in. (91.44 cm) - expands to fit

up to a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-4 Expansion Power Cable Part Number 75379
Any board with a 15-position receptacle suitable for use on the ICA-4 may also be mounted on the 16-pin plug
ICA-4L. The following nine boards have 15-position receptacles and may be installed on the ICA-4L:
• CPU-2 • CPU-2020 • SIB-64
• SIB-232 • SIB-2048 • UZC-256
• CCM-1 • LIB-200 • NIB-96
When installing any board consisting of 15-position receptacles on the 16-pin plug ICA-4L, only pins
one through 15 will engage. The 16th pin will remain on the outside of the board receptacle (refer to
Figure 2.3-5). A 16-position ICA-4L is required for local mode general alarm bus operation (refer to
The Loop Interface Boards, Section 4.2 of this manual).
Figure 2.3-5 ICA-4L 15 Position Receptacle Connections

1-15
Although cable part number 75142 consists of a 15-pin plug and a 15-position receptacle (Figure 2.3-6) it can
still be mated on the 16-pin plug ICA-4L, only pins one through 15 will engage. The 16th pin will remain on the
outside of the board receptacle (Figure 2.3-7).
36 in. (91.44 cm) - expands to fit

up to a CAB-D3 size cabinet
Figure 2.3-6 Cable Part Number 75142
Figure 2.3-7 Cable Part Number 75142 Connected to the ICA-4L

Figure 2.3-8 illustrates the installation of a LIB-200, LIB-200A, and/or LIB-400 module in the back right position
of an Interconnect Chassis Assembly (behind the CPU, which is installed later). Installation of boards in the
remaining ICA-4L positions involve a similar procedure.
1-16 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

○
○
○
○
○
○
Step 1
○
○
○
○
Place the board in front of the Interconnect Chassis

Assemblies (ICA-4L) in the position where it will be
installed. Tilt the board into the ICA-4L and align the
square slots on the board with the first set of four tabs
on the ICA-4L as illustrated.
○
○
Step 2
○
Carefully push the board back to the first level and then
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
slide it away from the ICA-4L, until it is directly over the

second set of four tabs, now located immediately behind
the printed circuit board.
Step 3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Push the board back again to the second level and

○
then slide it away from the ICA-4L until it is directly

over the third set of four tabs, now located immediately
behind the printed circuit board.
Step 4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Now push the board back so that it is resting on the

four tabs behind the board. Slide the board inward
○
toward the center of the ICA-4L and carefully engage

the female connector on the board with the male
connector on the ICA-4L. When the board is correctly
seated, it will be stopped by a mechanical tab. Some
force is required. Before applying force, carefully
check alignment of all pins. When finished, the board
should be seated in a channel consisting of four
retaining tabs in front of the printed circuit board and
four retaining tabs behind the printed circuit board.
CAUTION
Remove Serial Interface Boards (SIBs) carefully, as the
metal tabs on the ICA-4L may shear off some of the SIB
components.
NOTE
For installation of system boards in the first level of the
ICA-4L, omit Steps 2 and 3.
Figure 2.3-8 Mount System Boards to the ICA-4L Chassis

1-17
Section 2.4 Component Placement
Each component in the system has a specific mounting position in the cabinet. Mount any optional APS-6R
power supplies and amplifiers in CHS-4/4L chassis positions A through D as required. It is recommended that the
CHS-4/4L chassis always be installed in the lowest cabinet row available (refer to Table 2.4-1).
CABINET CABINET
MODELS ROWS
CAB-A3 1
CAB-B3 2
CAB-C3 3
CAB-D3 4
Table 2.4-1 Cabinet Size Information
Optional component placement guidelines are provided in Figure 2.4-1.
NIB-96 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position UZC-256 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position or
or any two CHS-4/4L positions. any two CHS-4/4L positions.
CCM-1 (Power-limited) Mounts in any one LIB position

or any two CHS-4/4L positions. NAM-232 (Power-limited) Mounts in either the left or right
position of a CHS-4 by using four PEM studs on the
CHS-4 chassis.
Figure 2.4-1 Component Placement Guidelines

1-18 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Figure 2.4-2 depicts the LIB SLC numbering scheme for an AFP1010 in a CAB-B3 cabinet. If a CAB-A3 cabinet
is used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, it may house a maximum four loop AFP1010 system (refer to Figure
2.4-4). One or two ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis are required to mount the LIB modules depending upon the number
and type of LIB modules employed. Refer to Figure 2.4-3 as an example of AM2020 applications.
NOTE
The installation of LIB modules resulting in duplicate LIB SLC numbers is never permitted.
Figure 2.4-2 AFP1010 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme

1-19
Figure 2.4-3 depicts the LIB SLC numbering scheme for an AM2020 in a CAB-D3 cabinet. Three ICA-4L chassis
are required to mount the various types of LIB modules employed. Refer to Figure 2.4-2 as an example of
AFP1010 applications.
NOTE
The installation of LIB modules resulting in duplicate LIB SLC numbers is never permitted.
Figure 2.4-3
.4-3 AM2020 LIB SLC Numbering Scheme
1-20 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 2.4-4 depicts a CAB-A3 cabinet used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, which means it may house a
maximum four loop AFP1010 system. An ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis (neither of which is shown in the figure) is
required for mounting the LIB-400.
Figure 2.4-4 LIB-400 Placement in an AFP1010

Figure 2.4-5 depicts the AFP1010 with a combination of LIB-400, LIB-200A, and LIB-200 modules installed in
the first and second rows of a CAB-C3 cabinet. Two ICA chassis are required, but are not shown in the figure.
The LIB-400 always occupies both addresses (refer to Figures 2.4-4 and 2.4-6). Various combinations of LIB
boards may be installed (refer to Figure 2.4-3) as long as the following measures are taken:
• Do not install duplicate loop numbers.
• When installed in the ICA the LIB-200 or LIB-200A always occupies the lower number address for a
given ICA position.
• Do not install LIB boards in the back right or back left positions of the second row.
• Do not install LIB boards in row three.

1-21
Loop 4 (LIB-400)
SIB CPU
Loop 1 (LIB-200)
Loop 2 (LIB-400)
Loop 3 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A

installed in left front position of
ICA.)
CHS-4/4L
A B C D
MPS-24A
or Batteries
MPS-24AE
Figure 2.4-5
.4-5 LIB Placement Example in an AFP1010
1-22 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 2.4-6 depicts a CAB-C3 cabinet used with LIB-400 modules exclusively, which means it may house a
maximum ten loop AM2020 system. An ICA-4L or ICA-4 chassis (neither of which is shown in the figure) is re-
quired for mounting the LIB-400.
Figure 2.4-6
.4-6 LIB-400 Placement in an AM2020

1-23
Figure 2.4-7 depicts the AM2020 with a combination of LIB-400, LIB-200A, and LIB-200 modules installed in the
first and second rows of a CAB-C3 cabinet. Two ICA chassis are required, but are not shown in the figure. The
LIB-400 always occupies both addresses (refer to Figures 2.4-4 and 2.4-6). Various combinations of LIB boards
may be installed (refer to Figure 2.4-3) as long as the following measures are taken:
• Do not install duplicate loop numbers.
• When installed in the ICA the LIB-200 or LIB-200A always occupies the lower number address for a
given ICA position.
Loop 7 (LIB-400)
Loop 1(LIB-200 or LIB-200A)
SIB CPU
Loop 2 (LIB-400)
Loop 3
Loop 5 Loop 4 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A)
(LIB-400) Loop 6 (LIB-200 or LIB-200A)
Loop 8
Loop 10
CHS-4/4L
A B C D
MPS-24A
or Batteries
MPS-24AE
Figure 2.4-7
.4-7 LIB Placement Example in an AM2020
1-24 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.5 Optional Chassis Mounting
When using an optional CHS-4/4L Chassis (refer to Figure 2.5-1), mount the chassis in the lowest available row
in the cabinet, below previously mounted Interconnect Chassis Assemblies (ICA-4L). The CHS-4/4L is marked
to identify the top of the chassis. Connect grounding wires of equipment to be placed in the CHS-4/4L to the PEM
stud indicated. Secure the unit to the cabinet with the nuts and lock washers provided.
NOTE
The CAB-A3 Cabinet will not accept an additional chassis.
CHS-4 Chassis
To equipment mounted
in CHS-4/4L
Figure 2.5-1 Optional Chassis Mount

1-25
Section 2.6 Other Components
Display Interface Assemblies
The Display Interface Assembly (DIA) includes a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), operator keypad, the
Display Interface Board (DIB), hinged dress panel, and the CPU to DIB cable. Only one DIA is required per
system. The DIA-2020 is included with the BE-2020N Basic Equipment Package for the AM2020. The DIA-1010
is included with the BE-1010N Basic Equipment Package for the AFP1010. Figure 2.6-1 shows elements visible
from the cabinet front. Note that the DP-1 dress panel is not included in the BE-1010N or BE2020N.
BP-3
The Battery Dress Panel (BP-3)
covers the Main Power Supply and
the batteries in the cabinet. Only
one BP-3 is required per system.
DP-1
The Dress Panel (DP-1) covers additional ICA-4L
or CHS-4/4L assemblies in the cabinet.
Figure 2.6-1 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System
1-26 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.7 Display Interface Connection
DIA-1010 and/or DIA-2020 provide access to the system CPU and the optional SIB, and an EIA-232
unsupervised printer interface (refer to Figure 2.7-1). When terminal supervision is not required and the terminal
(if present) has no keyboard, the DIA-1010 and/or DIA-2020 provide an EIA-485 interface which may be used to
connect an LCD-80 (in Terminal Mode).
Display Interface Assembly (DIA-1010/DIA-2020) viewed from the rear.
NOTE TB1
The plug-in terminal block TB1 may
be removed to facilitate field wiring 1 Display Interface
the LCD-80 and remote printer Board (DIB)
connections (see below).
J3
J4
DIB J3
TB1
All terminals are
power-limited Connect ribbon
cable 75226 from
DIB J3 to CPU P3
Return (+) Out (-)
Out (+) Return (-)
EIA-485 to LCD-80 Connect ribbon
NOTE cable 71046 from
DIB J4 to SIB P4
If a supervised CRT or CRT with keyboard has been installed,
this interface cannot be used. The CCM-1 Communications
Converter Module must be employed to connect the LCD-80 in
terminal mode. For details, refer to the LCD-80 Liquid Crystal
Display Manual listed in the Related Document Chart in the DIB J4
front of this manual.
EIA-232 to Notifier PRN

All terminals or
are power- Keltron Printer #VS4095/5
limited Outputs are power limited, but not supervised nor opto-isolated.
Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield
TB1 twisted paired cable suitable for EIA-232 and EIA-485
Transmit to EIA-232 applications. The printer must be installed in the same room as
Printer Reference the control panel. Terminate shield at cabinet entrance only.
Plug this DB-25 connector into the

EIA-232 Port of either the PRN printer or
the Keltron Printer Number VS4095/5.
Figure 2.7-1 Display Interface Assembly

1-27
Figure 2.7-2 depicts typical system cable placement.
71030 (to ICA)
71031
75226
71046
71033
71033
71072
71070
NOTE
The battery charger output is not power-
limited. All wiring connected to these ter-
minals must remain at least ¼ inch (6.35
mm) from all power-limited wiring. Refer
to Figure 2.7-3 for wiring information.
CAUTION!
Be sure to allow for BP-3 Battery
Dress Panel screw clearance
between batteries here.
Figure 2.7-2 Wiring Placement Diagram
1-28 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 2.7-3 depicts a typical AM2020/AFP1010 installation and is provided as a guide for proper wiring
placement. The AC and battery wiring are not power-limited. A separation of at least ¼ inch (6.35 mm) must be
maintained between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring. Install the tie wraps and adhesive squares as
indicated in Figure 2.7-3.
Wire Channel (Model WC-2)
Adhesive square and tie-wrap on

top of power supply chassis
affixing nonpower-limited wiring.
Adhesive square and tie-wrap on back of
cabinet affixing power-limited wiring.
Figure 2.7-3 Power-Limited and Non Power-Limited Wiring
Figure 2.7-4 is provided as a guide for dress panel placement.

1-29
DIA-1010 or DIA-2020
DP-1 Dress Panel
DP-1 Dress Panel

Figure 2.7-4 Dress Panel Placement Diagram
1-30 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.8 Mounting the MOD-1 Module Plate
The MOD-1 allows a single MMX-1, MMX-2 or CMX module to mount in a CAB-3. It occupies one of the four
positions available in a row on the CHS-4 or CHS-4L Chassis. The following five steps describe how to mount
the MOD-1 in a chassis, and Figure 2.8-1 illustrates the five steps of this installation.
1. Firmly press the module to be installed into the square opening on the MOD-1 until it snaps
into place.
2. Secure the module to the MOD-1 with the two screws provided. Make connections to the
module at this time.
3. Angle the bottom edge of the MOD-1 into the slot on the bottom of a chassis position. Swing
the MOD-1 assembly into the chassis.
4. Secure the assembly to the chassis by tightening the captive screws on the MOD-1.
5. To install the CHS-4L chassis, follow Steps 1 and 2 above. After completing Step 2, screw the
two standoffs provided to the upper studs of a CHS-4L chassis position as shown in Step 5 of
Figure 2.8-1. Then continue on with Steps 3 and 4.

1-31
MOD1Inst.
Figure 2.8-1 Mounting the MOD-1 into the CHS-4 and CHS-4L Chassis
1-32 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Section Three
Power Supplies
Section 3.1 The AC Primary Power Input
The AM2020/AFP1010 requires primary AC power. Connection to the light and power service must be on a
dedicated branch circuit and the wiring for this circuit must be installed in conduit. The switch for this circuit must
be labeled "Fire Alarm Circuit Control". Access to the switch must be limited to authorized personnel and the
location of the switch must be identified inside of the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet door. No other equipment may
be powered from the fire alarm circuit. The AC circuit wire run must run continuously, without disconnect devices,
from the power source to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply
with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as well as local codes. Use 12 AWG (3.25 mm²) wire with
600 volt insulation for this circuit. Use Tables 3.1-1 and 3.1-2 to calculate the total amount of current, in amps,
that the AC service must be capable of supplying to the system.
Total
Device Type # of Devices Multiply by Current in Amps
Current
APS-6R [ ] X 2.5
AA-30 [ ] X 1.0
AA-100/AA-120 [ ] X 1.85
Main Power Supply
[ 1 ] X 1.8 1.8
(MPS-24A)
Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required = Amps
Table 3.1-1 120 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit
# of Current in Total
Device Type Multiply by
Devices Amps Current
APS-6R [ ] X 1.2
AA-30E [ ] X 0.5
AA-100E/AA-120E [ ] X 0.9
Main Power Supply
[ 1 ] X 0.9 0.9
(MPS-24AE)
Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required = Amps
Table 3.1-2 220/240 VAC Fire Alarm Circuit
Section 3.2 The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply

The Main Power Supply (MPS-24A or MPS-24AE) provides up to 3.0 amps of filtered current for operating
the system in standby (non-fire alarm) and up to 6.0 amps during fire alarms. The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
contains battery charging circuitry and a 1-amp filtered output for powering 4-wire smoke detectors. Each
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE also provides filtered, non-resettable 24V DC required for powering ACS
Annunciator modules. If a voltmeter and ammeter are required on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE, order the
MPM-2 Main Power Meter.
Note: The battery charging circuitry on the MPS-24A can only operate under the control of the CPU-1010/2020,
an XPP-1, or an MPS-TR. Without one of these controlling devices, the batteries will not be charged.

1-33
The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply must be capable of powering all internal system devices (and
several external types of devices) continuously during non-fire alarm conditions. Use Table 3.2-1 to determine
the non-fire alarm load on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE output when primary power is applied. A finite amount of
additional current must be provided by the power supply during a fire alarm condition. For the MPS-24A or MPS-
24AE, use Table 3.2-2 to determine the additional current needed during fire alarms. The requirements for non-
fire alarm and fire alarm current loads cannot exceed the capabilities of the power supply in either case.
The following paragraphs provide additional information to the AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw
Calculation Table (Table 3.2-1).
• In the AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculation Table (Table 3.2-1) the primary power non-fire
alarm current and the primary fire alarm current columns are not battery calculations. They are simply
current calculations to confirm that the MPS-24A can output enough DC current to support the AM2020/
AFP1010 system during non-fire alarm and fire alarm conditions when operating from primary power.
• The word "primary" refers to the FACP's primary source of power, i.e. 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC power. The
word "secondary" refers to the FACP's backup batteries (or any other 24 VDC uninterruptable, filtered power
supply listed for Fire Protective Signaling and connected in place of the batteries).
Specific columns within Table 3.2-1 are further defined as follows:

Primary, Non-Fire This column allows the user to calculate the current that will be drawn from the MPS-24A or
Alarm Current MPS-24AE during a non-fire alarm condition, with AC power applied. This current draw
(amps) cannot exceed 3.0 Amps.
Primary, Fire This column allows the system designer to determine the output current load that must
Alarm Current be supported by the Main Power Supply MPS-24A or MPS-24AE during a fire alarm
(amps) condition with primary power applied. The total current drawn from the MPS-24A or
MPS-24AE during a fire alarm condition cannot exceed 6.0 amps.
Secondary, The last column of Table 3.2-1 allows the system designer to calculate the secondary
Non-Fire Alarm non-fire alarm current. This is the current that will be drawn from the MPS-24A or MPS-
Current (amps) 24AE power supply in a non-fire alarm condition during AC power loss. This figure is
required to complete the standby battery calculations. After adding up all the individual
current draws, the total current draw figure is then transferred to Table 3.2-3.
NOTES
• Typically, a system should be designed around the capacity to activate all output circuits and
relays, and support fire alarms on no less than 10 percent of initiating device circuits (subject to
the requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LAHJ).
• Concerning 4-wire detectors: In Table 3.2-1, the current to be entered for 4-wire smoke
detectors is the manufacturer's rated fire alarm current minus the manufacturer's rated non-fire
alarm current.
• Concerning notification appliances: The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE provides a filtered supply

for notification appliance circuits, and is UL Listed as a Special Application power supply.
Therefore, only notification appliances listed in the Notifier Device Compatibility Document
(15378) should be used with this power supply. (Note: This restriction also applies to the APS-
6R and FCPS-24 power supplies). Enter into Table 3.2-1 the respective current draws of
notification appliances and other external devices to be powered by the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
during a fire alarm. Do not add devices to be powered by an auxiliary power supply.
• No more than 3.0 amps of current can be drawn from Terminals 3 and 4 of TB3.
• Security Alarms are treated as trouble (non-fire alarm) conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010.
1-34 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
COLUMN A COLUMN B COLUMN C
PRIMARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT
(AMPS) (MPS-24A OR MPS-24E
CATEGORY OUTPUT CURRENT REQUIRED WHEN PRIMARY, FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) SECONDARY, NON-FIRE A LARM CURRENT
OPERATING FROM PRIMARY POWER (AMPS)
QTY X [CURRENT TOTAL QTY X [CURRENT TOTAL QTY X [CURRENT TOTAL
DRAW]= DRAW]= DRAW]=
BE-2020N or BE-1010N
1 x [0.162] = 0.162 1 x [0.162]= 0.162 1 x [0.118] = 0.118
(CPU, DIA, & 1 ICA-4L)
MPS-24A 1 x [0.064]= 0.064 1 x [0.064]= 0.064 1 x [0.104]= 0.104
MPM-2 [ ] x [0.006]= [ ] x [0.006]= [ ] x [0.006]=
ICA-4L [ ] x [0.002]= [ ] x [0.002]= [ ] x [0.002]=
LIB-200 (10 max.) [ ] x [0.078]= [ ] x [0.100]= [ ] x [0.049]=
LIB-200A (10 max.) [ ] x [0.085]= [ ] x [0.085]= [ ] x [0.085]=
LIB-400 (5 max.) [ ] x [0.170]= [ ] x [0.170]= [ ] x [0.170]=
SIB-232 [ ] x [0.050]= [ ] x [0.050]= [ ] x [0.045]=
SIB-2048A [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.055]=
SIB-NET [ ] x [0.070]= [ ] x [0.070]= [ ] x [0.070]=
MIB-W [ ] x [0.035]= [ ] x [0.035]= [ ] x [0.035]=
MIB-F [ ] x [0.028]= [ ] x [0.028]= [ ] x [0.028]=
MIB-WF [ ] x [0.033]= [ ] x [0.033]= [ ] x [0.033]=
INA [ ] x [0.250]= [ ] x [0.250]= [ ] x [0.250]=
RPT-W [ ] x [0.031]= [ ] x [0.031]= [ ] x [0.031]=
RPT-WF [ ] x [0.033]= [ ] x [0.033]= [ ] x [0.033]=
RPT-F [ ] x [0.028]= [ ] x [0.028]= [ ] x [0.028]=
RPT-485W/RPT-485WF [ ] x [0.017]= [ ] x [0.017]= [ ] x [0.017]=
SDX, CPX & FDX-551, SDX-551TH,
FMM-1 [ ] x [0.00020]= [ ] x [0.00020]= [ ] x [0.00020]=
IPX-751 [ ] x [0.00035]= [ ] x [0.00045]= [ ] x [0.00035]=
FMM-101,FCM-1,BGX-101L [ ] x [0.00030]= [ ] x [0.00043]= [ ] x [0.00030]=
CMX-2, NBG-12LX, FAPT-751 [ ] x [0.00030]= [ ] x [0.00030]= [ ] x [0.00030]=
FZM-1 - See FZM-1Instructions [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
B601BH [ ] x [0.00100]= [ ] x [0.00100]= [ ] x [0.00100]=
B501BH (Horn in Base) [ ] x [0.00100]= [ ] x [0.01500]= [ ] x [0.00100]=
DHX-501,DHX-502 See instructions [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
ISO-X [ ] x [0.00045]= [ ] x [0.00045]= [ ] x [0.00045]=
4-Wire Smoke Detectors [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
See Device Compatibility Document [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
RM-1/RM-1SA [ ] x [0.020]= [ ] x (0.066]= [ ] x [0.020]=
AMG-1, AMG-E, ATG-2 [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.060]=
FFT-7, FFT-7S [ ] x [0.060]= [ ] x [0.120]= [ ] x [0.060]=
AA-30/AA-30E [ ] x[0.045]=
AA-30 w/ ACT-2 See Document 51118
NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE
AA-100/AA-100E, AA-120/AA-120E [ ] x[0.050]=
APS-6R [ ] x[0.025]=
ACM-16AT, ACM-32A [ ] x[0.040]= [ ] x[0.056]= [ ] x[0.040]=
AEM-16AT, AEM-32A [ ] x[0.002]= [ ] x[0.018]= [ ] x[0.002]=
LCD-80 [ ] x[0.100]= [ ] x[0.100]= [ ] x[0.050]=
ACM-8R (see Doc.15342) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
LDM Series (see Doc.15885) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
SCS Series (see Doc.15712) [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
Current draw per annunciator board
when LED's on board are illuminated
during non-fire alarm conditions: INCLUDED ABOVE
ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT, [ ] x[0.016]= [ ] x[0.016]=
ACM-32A, AEM-32A [ ] x[0.016]= [ ] x[0.016]=
XPP-1 [ ] x[0.023]= [ ] x[0.032]= [ ] x[0.025]=
XPM-8 (8 zones) [ ] x[0.147]= [ ] x[0.169]= [ ] x[0.147]=
XPM-8 (4 zones) [ ] x[0.086]= [ ] x[0.108]= [ ] x[0.086]=
XPM-8L (8 zones) [ ] x[0.085]= [ ] x[0.115]= [ ] x[0.085]=
XPC-8 (8 circuits) [ ] x[0.033]= [ ] x[0.042]= [ ] x[0.033]=
XPC-8 (4 circuits) [ ] x[0.017]= [ ] x[0.026]= [ ] x[0.017]=
XPR-8 [ ] x[0.004]= [ ] x[0.013]= [ ] x[0.004]=
SUM EACH COLUMN FOR SUBT OT ALS, PRIMARY, NON- PRIMARY, ALARM SECONDARY, NON-
T HEN ENTER IN "SUBT OT ALS FROM ALARM SUBTOTAL: SUBTOT AL: FIRE ALA RM
PREVIOUS PAGE" ROW ON NEXT P AGE SUBTOT AL:
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (1 of 2)

1-35
COLUMN A COLUMN B COLUMN C
PRIMARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT
(AMPS) (MPS-24A OR MPS-24E OUTPUT
CATEGORY CURRENT REQUIRED WHEN OPERATING FROM PRIMARY, FIRE ALARM CURRENT (AMPS) SECONDARY, NON-FIRE ALARM CURRENT
PRIMARY POWER (AMPS)
QTY X [CURRENT DRAW]= TOTAL QTY X [CURRENT DRAW]= TOTAL QTY X [CURRENT DRAW]= TOTAL
XP5 Series Transponders

XP5-M [ ] x[0.001651]= [ ] x[0.003000]= [ ] x[0.001651]=
XP5-C Relay [ ] x[0.000840]= [ ] x[0.000840]= [ ] x[0.000840]=
XP5-C NAC/telephone [ ] x[0.001481]= [ ] x[0.001481]= [ ] x[0.001481]=
Miscellaneous
CCM-1 [ ] x[0.107]= [ ] x[0.107]= [ ] x[0.107]=
A77-716B [ ] x[0.020]= [ ] x[0.020]= [ ] x[0.020]=
RA-400Z(when on) [ ] x[0.006]= [ ] x[0.006]= [ ] x[0.006]=
NIB-96 [ ] x[0.022]= [ ] x[0.022]= [ ] x[0.022]=
MBT-1 n/a n/a [ ] x[0.017]= n/a n/a
UZC-256 [ ] x[0.035]= [ ] x[0.090]= [ ] x[0.035]=
UDACT [ ] x[0.100]= [ ] x[0.100]= [ ] x[0.100]=
[ ] x[ ]=
Notification Appliances 1 NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE
[ ] x[ ]=
Other devices drawing power from [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=

MPS-24A terminals TB3-3 and TB3-4 [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]= [ ] x[ ]=
PRIMARY, NON-ALARM PRIMARY, ALARM SECONDARY, NON-FIRE
SUBTOTALS FROM THIS PAGE
SUBTOTAL: SUBTOTAL: ALARM SUBTOTOTAL:
PRIMARY, NON-ALARM PRIMARY, ALARM SECONDARY, NON-FIRE

SUBTOTALS FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
SUBTOTAL: SUBTOTAL: ALARM SUBTOTOTAL:
SECONDARY, NON-FIRE
PRIMARY, NON-ALARM PRIMARY, ALARM ALARM TOTAL:
SUM SUBTOTALS FROM EACH PAGE FOR TOTAL:
TOTAL:
PLACE THIS TOTAL
TOTALS
CANNOT EXCEED IN TABLE 3.2-3 TO
CANNOT EXCEED 3.0 A
6.0 A DETERMINE A.H.
REQUIREMENT
1
INCLUDE ONLY THOSE DEVICES TO BE POWERED BY THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY, NOT AN AUXILIARY SUPPLY SUCH AS THE AVPS-24 OR APS-6R.
SEE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR APPLICABLE POWER DRAWS.
Table 3.2-1 AM2020/AFP1010 System Current Draw Calculations (2 of 2)
1-36 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw
Use Table 3.2-2 to determine the maximum current requirements of the secondary power source during fire
alarm conditions. The total obtained in Table 3.2-2 is the amount of current that the batteries must be capable of
supplying. This figure will be used in Table 3.2-3 to determine the size of the batteries needed to support five
minutes of fire alarm operation.
It is presumed, in a fire alarm condition, that the batteries must feed the main power supply and any additional
supplies (APS-6R, AA-30, AA-30E, AA-100, AA-100E, AA-120, and AA-120E) with the maximum rated power
each supply can provide (Table 3.2-2).
NOTE
Due to the maximum rating of 9 amps imposed when using PS-12250 batteries, it may
be necessary to calculate the exact requirements of the secondary supply. In that
case, add the secondary non-fire alarm load obtained in Table 3.2-1 to the total fire
alarm current draw of all notification appliances in the system and substitute that
figure in Table 3.2-2 for the MPS and any APS-6Rs.
# in Alarm Current in
Device Type Multiply by Total Current
(simultaneously) Amps
Main Power Supply

1 X 6.0 6.0
(MPS-24A or MPS-24AE)
APS-6R [ ] X 6.0
AA-30 or AA-30E [ ] X 3.0
AA-100 or AA-100E
[ ] X 7.3
AA-120 or AA-120E
Sum Column for Secondary Fire Alarm Load * = Amps
* The secondary fire alarm load cannot exceed 9.0 amps with PS-12250
batteries, and 20 amps with PS-12600 batteries.
Table 3.2-2 Maximum Secondary Power Fire Alarm Current Draw
MULTIPLIED SECONDARY AMP HOUR

LOAD TOTALS TIME EQUALS
BY TOTALS
Enter Secondary Non- Non-fire Alarm
Enter Required Secondary
fire Alarm Load from Secondary
Column C of Table [ ] X Non-fire Alarm Standby Time [ ] = [ ] Standby Amp
(24 or 60 hours)
3.2-1 Hours
Secondary
Enter Secondary Fire Enter Required Fire Alarm Time
Fire Alarm
Alarm Load from Table [ ] X (for 5 minutes, enter 0.084) [ ] = [ ] Amp Hour
3.2-2 for 15 minutes, enter 0.25)
Requirement
Sum column for Total Secondary Ampere Hours (AH) Calculated =
Multiply by the derating factor x 1.2 =
Total Secondary Ampere Hours Required =
Table 3.2-3 Secondary Power Standby and Fire Alarm Load

1-37
Table 3.2-3 sums the non-fire alarm and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in Ampere Hours (AH), required
to support the AM2020/AFP1010. The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE can charge batteries up to 60 AH in size. Select
batteries from Table 3.2-4 that meet or exceed the total AH calculated :
Number
Battery Voltage Model
Requir- Cabinet Siz e
Siz e Rating Number
ed
CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3
9.5 AH 6 volts Four PS-695
(AFP1010 Only)
CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3
12 A H 12 volts Two PS-12120
(AFP1010 Only)
25 A H 12 volts Two PS-12250 CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3
BB-55 Cabinet
60 A H 12 volts Two PS-12600
(Batteries Only)
Table 3.2-4 Battery Size Requirements

NOTE
NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of secondary non-fire alarm power followed
by five minutes in alarm. NFPA 72 Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 60 hours of
secondary non-fire alarm power followed by five minutes in alarm. NFPA 72 Voice Evacuation Systems require
15 minutes of alarm time.
Battery Testing
You may need to test the standby batteries occasionally. Here are two testing procedures you can use to
determine the charge condition and capacity of the batteries in the system.
Quick Test - The quick test is a measure of charge condition; it is not a battery capacity test. Use it to identify
the need to charge or replace the battery before it fails. If the battery has been part of an existing system, test
results may indicate a faulty battery or a problem in the charging system.
Follow this procedure:

1. Remove the fully charged battery from the sytem or charging network.
2. Place a load resistor across the terminals that limits the current flow to approximately one
amp. For example, use a 12 ohm resistor with a minimum of 12 watts for a single 12 volt
battery. If you have two 12 volt batteries connected in series, use a 24 ohm resistor with a
minimum of 24 watts.
3. After 15 minutes, measure the voltage across the battery terminals with the resistor still in
place. Be sure to use a digital meter. For a 12 volt battery, the meter reading should range
between 13.8 to 12.0 VDC. For a 24 volt battery system, the range is 27.6 to 24 VDC.
NOTE
If the readings fall below these ranges, perform the 20-Hour Discharge Test, or replace the battery.
20-Hour Discharge Test - The 20-hour discharge test indicates the battery capacity at its amp hour rating.
The advertised amp hour battery rating is based on a 20-hour discharge rate, which is the amount of current it
delivers to a load for 20 hours while maintaining its terminal voltage above the levels described in Step 3 of
this test.
Follow this procedure:

1. Calculate the load resistor.
a. Divide the amp hour rating by 20 hours. For the PS-12250 battery, the calculation would
be 25/50=1.25 amps.
b. We need 1.25 amps for 20 hours. Using Ohm's Law, R=E/I, therefore, R=12/1.25, or 9.6
ohms. P= I x E, so P=1.25 x 12, or 15 watts. Therefore we need a load resistor of 9.6
ohms at 15 watts.
1-38 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

2. Measure time of load.
a. Take a fully charged battery and install the load resistor across the terminals.
b. Measure the voltage across the battery for a period of 20 hours. If during the test the
terminal voltage drops below the minimum acceptable levels (10.2 VDC for a 12 volt
battery and 20.4 VDC for a 24 volt battery), note the number of hours that have elapsed
when the battery voltage drops below its minimum operational level.
3. Calculate the battery capacity.
CAPACITY = TIME x LOAD where:
TIME (in hours) is equal to the measured duration the terminal voltage remained at the
acceptable level and LOAD is equal to the load current value.
If the battery maintained its voltage level above its minimum operational level for 15 hours,
its capacity would be: 15 x 1.25, or 18.75 amp hours.
Conclusion: The battery has only 18.75 amp hour capacity instead of its rated 25 amp hours.
Figure 3.2-1 depicts the two-step procedure of mounting the main power supply.
Step 1 Step 2
Position the Main Power Supply over the Secure the Main Power Supply to the
support bracket in the lower left corner of cabinet with the two self-tapping
the cabinet and carefully push the supply screws provided.
down until it engages the bracket securely.
Figure 3.2-1 Mount the Main Power Supply
1-39
Test of Ground Fault Detection Circuit
If you have a persistent ground fault and suspect the MPS-24A ground fault detection circuit may be generating
a false indication, use this test:
1. Remove the upper right circuit board mounting screw, just to the right of P2.
2. Insert an insulator (a piece of paper will do) between the power supply circuit board and the
mounting standoff.
If the ground fault indication remains, the problem is with the MPS-24A.
Monitoring Remote Power Supplies
The MPS-24A depends on the CPU-1010/2020 or the XPP-1 to control its battery charging circuit and to monitor
the battery state approximately every four minutes. If you use the MPS-24A in a remote application from the
main control panel or a transponder, add the MPS-TR to the power supply to prevent problems keeping the
batteries charged. The MPS-TR has a trouble relay that should be monitored by a system monitoring device.
Note that the CPU or the XPP-1 can control only one power supply.
Section 3.2.1 The MPS-TR Main Power Supply Monitor

The MPS-TR power supply monitor mounts on any of the MPS series power supplies. This add-on board mounts
on the right side of the MPS series supply and it is fastened through the use of two extended length standoffs,
making use of threads on the existing standoffs (Figure 3.2-1).
The MPS-TR monitor provides supervision for remote power supplies and control of the power supply battery
charger when there is no CPU-1010/2020 or XPP-1 to provide these two functions. The board is mounted and
secured as described above. P1 on the MPS-TR is connected to P3 on the power supply via a power ribbon
cable(part number 71085) supplied with the MPS-TR. The relay common and normally closed contacts of the
MPS-TR are connected to a normally closed TROUBLE INPUT on the control panel trouble monitoring circuit.
MPS-TR Installation
1. Remove the upper and lower screws on the right side of the power supply main board.
2. The MPS-TR mounts on these two holes. Thread the new longer screws and the standoff
sleeves into the holes formerly occupied by the two screws removed in Step 1.
Figure 3.2.1-1 Threading the New Screws
1-40 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 3.2.1-2 Mounting the MPS-TR
System Common
Terminal Connection
MPS-24A TB3-4
MPS-24B TB2-4
Figure 3.2.1-3 System Common Terminal Connection

NOTE: Relay contacts are specified in the NORMAL (no trouble condition) state.
The MPS-TR connects to any device with a trouble IN and a trouble OUT connector/terminal.

1-41
Section 3.3 Connecting the Main Power Supply
Table 3.3-1 provides the maximum output capacity of the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE main power supply. Figure
3.3-1 illustrates connections for primary and secondary power to the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE, as well as terminal
and harness connections for the control panel.
Connecting Primary AC Power

With the circuit breaker at the main AC power distribution panel turned off, remove the plastic insulating cover
from Terminal Block TB1 on the MPS-24A and connect the system primary power source. Connect the electrical
system earth ground to TB1 Terminal 2 and ground the power supply assembly to the cabinet with a Chassis
Ground cable (part number 71073) to TB1 Terminal 3. Connect the primary Neutral line to TB1 Terminal 4 and
the primary Hot line (120 VAC for the MPS-24A or 220/240 VAC for the MPS-24AE) to TB1 Terminal 6. Do not
route AC wiring in the same conduit with circuits in this control panel. After completion of these connections,
reinstall the plastic insulating cover over the terminal strip. Leave the main circuit breaker off until installation of
the entire system is complete.
Connecting the Secondary 24V Power Source

Secondary power (usually battery) is required to support the system during loss of primary power. The batteries
may reside in the control panel cabinet, or in a separate BB-55 cabinet. When using a 24 VDC filtered power
source other than batteries, this source must be of sufficient capacity and be listed for this purpose.
Connect the Battery Positive Cable (part number 71071) to TB2 Terminal 1(+) and the Battery Negative Cable
(part number 71072) to TB2 Terminal 2(-). Do not connect the Battery Interconnect Cable (part number 71070)
at this time. This connection will be made just prior to initial system power-up.
NOTE
A separate cabinet may be required to house NiCad batteries due to battery size.
Earth Ground Fault Detection

The MPS-24A or MPS-24AE automatically detects ground faults in the system. To disable ground fault detection,
cut Resistor R27 (refer to Figure 3.3-1).
24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power
Up to one amp of power for four-wire smoke detectors can be drawn from TB3 Terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Power is
removed from these terminals during system reset. This 24V DC filtered source is power-limited but must be
supervised via an end-of-line Power Supervision Relay (refer to Figures 4.6-5 and 4.6-6).
24V DC Notification Appliance Power
Up to 3 amps of filtered current for powering notification appliances can be drawn from TB3 Terminals 3(+) and 4(-).
Power is not removed from these terminals during system reset. If additional 4-wire smoke detector power is required,
this circuit can be converted to a two-amp resettable circuit by cutting JP5 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE (refer to
Figure 3.3-1). This 24V DC power is power-limited but must be supervised via an end-of-line Power Supervision
Relay.
Note: This power supply is UL listed as a Special Application Power Supply. Therefore, only notification
appliances listed in the Device Compatibility Document (15378) should be used with this power supply. (This
restriction also applies to the APS-6R and FCPS-24 power supply.)
System Harness Connections
The Power Harness (part number 71030) provides internal power for circuit boards installed in the ICA-4L.
Connect this harness from P2 or P4 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE to Plug A on the uppermost ICA-4L.
The AM2020/AFP1010 monitor the power supply through connection of a Power Supply Supervision Cable (part
number 71031) between MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Connector P3 and Connector P2 on the CPU (refer to Figure
3.6-1). If the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE is being used as a remote power supply, this ribbon cable should be
plugged into the MPS-TR module. The MPS-TR provides a Form-C trouble contact that can be monitored by a
monitor module with an "MTRB" Type ID.
For connection of an MPS-TR, refer to the MPS-TR Product Installation Document listed in the Related
Documentation Chart in the beginning of this manual.
1-42 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

NVRAMS
User programming information and critical operating parameters of the AM2020/AFP1010 system are stored in Nonvolatile
Random Access Memory (NVRAM). Improper cycling of power to the AM2020/AFP1010 can cause the NVRAMS to
become inaccessible. The AM2020/AFP1010 software now verifies the state of the NVRAMs. If a NVRAM problem has
been detected, the AM2020/AFP1010 will display one of the following two error messages depending on where the problem
is located:
TROUBL CATASTROPHIC CPU NONVOLATILE RAM FAILURE
or
TROUBL CATASTROPHIC DIA NONVOLATILE RAM FAILURE
Other indicators of NVRAM problems by board are:
Board Trouble Message Displayed Local Board Indicator
SIB-NET TROUBL CATASTROPHIC ISIB COMMUNICATIONS FAULT ATXD LED blinking at
2 second rate.
The correct power down procedure is to remove battery power, then disconnect primary power (AC) at the circuit
breaker in the electrical distribution panel, then wait at least one minute before disconnecting or connecting any cables
or circuit boards, or reapplying primary power. The correct power up procedure is to connect primary power, then
connect the battery, and wait one minute before taking any further actions, especially pressing the acknowledge button,
which can cause NVRAM problems if pressed during the first minute after power application.
If this condition occurs, call the factory for immediate assistance.
Maximum
Total of power in
Circuit Circuit Type
Condition columns to the left Description
Load (Per (See Note 1)
cannot exceed:
Circuit)
W h i l e t h e p o w e r s u p p l y c a n d e l i ve r 6
3.0 amps Internal amps, 3 amps of the power supply
c a p a c i t y a r e r e s e r ve d fo r t h e b a t t e r y
Non-Fire Alarm 1.0 amp External 1 charger when enabled. The remaining 3
with Battery 3.0 amps 3.0 amps amp capacity can be shared between the
Charger Enabled nonresettable internal and external circuits during a non-
External 2 fire alarm condition.
2.0 amps
resettable
Wh e n t h e I n t e r n a l MP S - 2 4 A / E b a t t e r y
3.0 amps Internal charger is not used, the full 6 amp capacity
of the power suppl y can be shared
Non-Fire Alarm
between the internal and external circuits
with Battery 1.0 amp External 1 for up to one hour (4 amps continuously).
Charger 6.0 amps
Disabled 3.0 amps
(See Note 2) nonresettable
External 2
2.0 amps
resettable
During a fire alarm condition, the battery
charger is automatically disabled which
makes the full 6 amp capacity of the power
supply available to be shared between the
1.0 amps Internal internal and external output circuits for up
to one hour (4 amps continuously).
Fire Alarm 6.0 amps
3.0 amps External 1

3.0 amps
nonresettable
External 2
2.0 amps
resettable
Notes:
1 This power is used for all internal requirements modules, boards, etc. Connection:
Internal
Power Harness from MPS-24A/E P2 or P4, to the CPU.
Provides resettable power to 4-wire smoke detectors (and power supervision relays).
External 1
Connection: TB3 Terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-).
Power for devices (typically notification appliances) listed in the Notifier Device
External 2
Compatibility Document (15378). Connection: TB3 Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-).
2 Remote
JP1 must be cut to install a CHG-120 remote battery charger and disable the MPS-
Battery
24A/E internal charger.
Charger
Table 3.3-1 MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply Loads

Filtered Supply

1-43
Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power
24V DC ( 200 mV ripple), 1 amp maximum. Filtered and resettable.
Power-limited but must be supervised via a Power Supervision
Secondary Power Relay.
27.6 V DC, supervised and power-limited.
Fast charge = 2 amps, trickle charge = 20 mA. + -
Battery -
Battery + + Notification Appliance/
Annunciator Power
- Power-limited, filtered, non-resettable, 3 amps
PRIMARY POWER (in alarm) maximum. JP5 may be cut to convert
this notification appliance power (TB3 Terminals
Power AC HZ amps 3 and 4) to a resettable, 2-amp maximum circuit.
Supply
This output can also be used to power ACS
MPS-24A series annunciators (do not cut JP5).
(maximum) 120V 50/60 1.8
MPS-24AE
(maximum) 220/240V 50/60 0.9
Neutral Out Hot In Power Ribbon Connector

Connect to P2 on the CPU-2020 or CPU-2
Neutral In Hot Out
Earth Ground Power Harnesses (P2, P4)
Connect to chassis via a Connect to Plug A on the top of the ICA-4/
Grounding Cable Assembly. ICA-4L (3 amps maximum, P2 and P4
combined) or any other module or board
requiring internal power.
Not used with the

AM2020/AFP1010.
Make no connection
here.
Battery Fuse (10A, 3AG) Cut R27 to disable
Earth Ground Fault
Detection.
LED Indicators
Earth Ground Fault
Battery Fail
AC Power Fail
NiCad High Charge Rate
JP5: Cut to make

notification appliance
power on TB3
Terminals 3 and 4 a
resettable 2-amp
maximum circuit.
JP1: When
employing a
CHG-120,
Remote Battery
JP2: must be cut
Charger JP1
otherwise a short on the
must be cut.
notification appliance
power circuit (Terminals
3 and 4) would register
incorrectly as a loss of
MPM-2 Voltmeter/Ammeter Connector primary (AC) power.
Figure 3.3-1 Field Wiring the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Power Supply

3 amps maximum non-fire alarm load.
6 amps maximum fire alarm load.
For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
1-44 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Section 3.4 The Optional Main Power Meter
The optional Main Power Meter (MPM-2) may only be installed on the Main Power Supply, MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
(refer to Figure 3.4-1).
Step 1
Remove the two screws in the bottom
left corner of the MPS-24A or MPS-
24AE.
Step 2
Thread the two replacement screws through the MPM-2
bracket and through the two standoffs provided. Place
the MPM-2 assembly over the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
and secure with the two screws.
Step 3
Complete the installation of the MPM-2 by
plugging the female connector on the meter
into Plug P7 on the MPS-24A or MPS-24AE.
Figure 3.4-1 Installation of the Main Power Meter

1-45
Section 3.5 The CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger
The Notifier Remote Battery Charger, CHG-120 is capable of charging 25 to 120 ampere hour batteries. This
unit is required if the MPS-24A must deliver more than 3 amps of current when no fire alarm signal is present.
Batteries up to 120 AH can be housed with the charger in the BB-55 cabinet: Batteries up to 25 AH can be
housed with the charger in cabinets CAB-A3, -B3, -C3, or -D3. Refer to Figure 3.5-1 for installation positions.
The charger can be mounted up to 20 feet (6.096 meters) away from the control panel. To determine the battery
size needed in a particular system, refer to the Non-Fire Alarm Power Requirements.
3.5-1a 3.5-1b
Figure 3.5-1 CHG-120 Installation into CAB-3 Series(3.5-1a)
and BB-55 (3.5-1b) Cabinets
Connecting the Primary Power Source

With the circuit breaker at the main AC power distribution panel turned off, connect the primary power source to
the corresponding terminal on TB1 of the CHG-120. All connections between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the
CHG-120 must be made in conduit, using 12 AWG (3.25 mm²) wire. Do not route AC wiring in the same conduit as
other control panel circuits. Leave the main circuit breaker off until installation of the entire system is complete. Refer
to Figure 3.5-2.
Connecting the Secondary Power Source
Do not apply AC power or batteries until the system is completely wired and ready for testing. Refer to Wiring
Diagram and Instructions for the CHG-120 Charger in the CHG-120 Charger Manual (Document 50641) for
additional information.
1-46 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 3.5-2 CHG-120 Connections
Section 3.6 The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply

The APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply is designed to power devices that require filtered, non-resettable power
such as XP Transponder modules, Notification Appliance Circuit modules, and Control modules. It provides two
24 VDC (filtered) output circuits (3 A each, 6 A total, 4 A continuous). For more information on the APS-6R, refer
to the APS-6R Manual (Document 50702)
Mounting an APS-6R in a CAB-3 Series Cabinet

An APS-6R can mount to a CHS-4 (Figure 3.6-1a) or a CHS-4L (Figure 3.6-1b) for use in a CAB-3 Series cabi-
net (CAB-A3, CAB-B3, CAB-C3, or CAB-D3). To mount the APS-6R, follow these instructions:
• Place the APS-6R onto the mounting studs of the CHS-4 or CHS-4L chassis.
• Insert a standoff through each of the APS-6R mounting slots; then thread each standoff to the
mounting stud on the chassis.
• Tighten the standoffs until the APS-6R is securely fastened to the chassis.
• Mount the CHS-4 or CHS-4L to the cabinet backbox.
• Install the APS-6R plastic cover and press-fit terminal block cover over TB1 AC connections.
(Refer to Figure 3.6-2)

1-47
3.6-1a 3.6-1b
Figure 3.6-1 Mounting the APS-6R to a Chassis
Field Wiring an APS-6R

Figure 3.6-3 shows typical field wiring for an APS-6R
WARNING:
Use extreme caution when working with the APS-6R - high voltage
and AC line-connected circuits are present in the APS-6R. Turn off
and remove all power sources. To reduce the risk of electric shock
make sure to properly ground the APS-6R.
J1 and J2 may be used in place of TB2 when

the APS-6R is powering internal modules
(such as the UZC-256, XPC-8) with
compatible connectors
Figure 3.6-2
Cover Installations
Before field wiring, install
the APS-6R plastic cover,
and install the press-fit
terminal block cover over
TB1 when field wiring is
complete (Figure 3.6-2).
Figure 3.6-3 Typical APS-6R Wiring
1-48 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Connecting Multiple APS-6R Power Supplies
Figure 3.6-4 shows typical trouble bus connections for multiple APS-6R power supplies using trouble connec-
tors J3 and J4.
Notes:
1. Use Cable 71033 or 75098 (same cables, different lengths) for all wiring.
2. APS-6R J3 and J4 can be interchanged.
Figure 3.6-4 Trouble Bus Connections for Multiple

APS-6R Power Supply Configuration

1-49
Section 3.7 The Central Processing Unit (CPU-2020, CPU-2)
The Central Processing Unit is the heart of the system (refer to Figure 3.7-1). This unit directs all communications
between modules and monitors all modules in the system for removal or failure. The CPU maintains all programmable
system parameters (except alphanumeric information) in nonvolatile memory to protect the data if primary and
secondary power is removed (provided the board and all associated cabling is handled with proper precaution). The
CPU executes all control-by-event programs for specific action in response to an alarm condition. A real-time clock
provides time annotation on the display(s), history file, and printer. The CPU provides one set of Form-C general
alarm contacts and one set of Form-C system trouble contacts. The Form-C general alarm contacts will transfer during
the presence of one or more fire alarm signals. The Form-C system trouble contacts will transfer during any security
alarm supervisory signal or trouble condition. The Form-C trouble contacts will not transfer when both primary and
secondary power is lost. When such transfer is required, use a separate, listed power supervisory relay. Only one
CPU is required per AM2020/AFP1010 system.
Note: Due to the proximity of the alarm and trouble contacts to CPU-based system control functions, only circuits that
are unlikely to produce any electrical noise should be connected to the contacts. If a noise-generating device is
connected to these contacts, system operation problems might be encountered.
11 No connection System
10 No connection
9 No connection Trouble/
Supervisory/
8
7
6
Normally open contact
Normally closed contact
Common
} Security
Contacts
5
4 No connection
2
1
Normally open contact
Normally closed contact
Common
} General
Alarm
Contacts
P4
See Appendix A for
contact ratings
Connect Terminal 5 of
P4 to chassis ground
via cable (Part
Number 71073)
Figure 3.7-1 CPU Alarm and Trouble Contacts
NOTE
Contacts may be connected to power-limited or nonpower-limited sources of power. Refer to the power-limited
information label located inside the door of the FACP. All circuits that are connected to nonpower-limited sources
of power must be identified on this label.
1-50 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section Four Signaling
Section 4.1 The LIB Signaling Line Circuit
The AM2020/AFP1010 communicates with intelligent and addressable initiating, monitor, and control devices
through a LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). The Loop Interface Boards, LIB-200 and LIB-200A each control one
SLC. The LIB-400 controls two SLC loops. For XP and XP5 Transponders connected to SLCs refer to the
respective transponder manual (Refer to the Related Documentation Table in the beginning of this chapter for
part numbers).
Isolator Modules and Bases

Isolator Modules (ISO-X) and bases (B524BI(A) and B224BI(A))permit a string of intelligent addressable devices
and modules to be electrically "isolated" from the remainder of the SLC, allowing critical loop components to
function in the event of a short circuit fault (refer to Figures 4.5-2, 4.5-3 and 4.10-2).
Monitor Modules
Addressable Monitor Modules MMX-1 and MMX-101 allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to monitor entire circuits of N.O.
contacts, alarm initiating devices, manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, waterflow, and
supervisory devices. In addition, the MMX-2 may be used to provide power to and monitor conventional 2-wire smoke
detectors that are listed in the Device Compatibility Document (refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6). The addressable
BGX-101L pull station provides point annunciation of manual pull stations (refer to Figure 4.8-2).
Control Modules
Through addressable Control Modules (CMX/XPC), the AM2020/AFP1010 can selectively activate notification
appliance circuits and Form-C output relays (refer to Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6).
XP5-C Control Modules

Each XP5-C Module allows the AM2020/AFP1010 to control a maximum of five individual circuits. The module
can be configured as a NAC/telephone or relay circuit. Its function is similar to the function of the control modules
described above.
XP5-M Monitor Modules

Each XP5-M Module allows the AM2020/AFP1010 to monitor a maximum of five individual circuits. Its function is
similar to the function of the monitor modules described above.
Intelligent Detectors
Through the SLC loop, the AM2020/AFP1010 communicates with intelligent ionization (CPX), photoelectric
(SDX), thermal (FDX), and combination (IPX) detectors (refer to Figure 4.10-1).
Loop Interface Boards Signaling Line Circuit

The LIB-200 and LIB-200A are single SLC boards. The LIB-400 is a dual SLC board. The capacity of each SLC
on a LIB includes up to 99 intelligent detectors, and an additional combination of up to 99 addressable pull
stations, and control and monitor modules. The AFP1010 will support a maximum of two LIB-400s (a total of four
SLCs). The AM2020 supports up to ten SLCs. One to five LIB-400s, or one to ten LIB-200s or LIB-200As can
be employed on the AM2020, depending on system requirements.
NOTE: In Canada, ULC Standard S524, for the installation of fire alarm systems, refers to signaling line circuits
as Data Communications Links (DCL). An NFPA Style 4 is equivalent to a DCLB, Style 6 to a DCLA, and Style
7 to a DCLR.
NOTE: If you are experiencing excessive noise on speaker or phone circuits in the IFC-1010/2020, the LIB-200
SLC polling signal may be the source. To reduce noise, connect the SLC shields to main panel power supply
system common of the MPS-24A, TB3, terminal 6, or use a LIB-200A/LIB-400.

1-51
Section 4.2 The Loop Interface Boards (LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400)
The Loop Interface Boards (LIBs) allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to communicate with the system's alarm initiating
devices and to control the system's output devices.
Through a communications loop (functions in accordance with the requirements for NFPA SLCs or SLC loops),
the LIBs allow the control panel to communicate with addressable pull stations, and intelligent ionization,
photoelectric, and thermal detectors. Through addressable control modules (CMX/XPC) connected along the
communications loop, the control panel may selectively activate notification circuits or Form-C output relays.
Through addressable Monitor Modules MMX-1 and MMX-101, the control panel may monitor entire circuits of
N.O. contacts, alarm initiating devices such as manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors,
waterflow and supervisory devices. MMX-2 may be used to monitor conventional 2-wire smoke detectors.
Through Isolator Modules (ISO-X) or isolator/detector mounting base, a string of intelligent addressable devices
and modules may be electrically "isolated" from the remainder of the communications loop, permitting critical
loop components to function in the event of a short circuit on the loop. The LIB boards are power-limited.
LIB-200
The LIB-200 (refer to Figure 4.2-1) is a single signaling line circuit board which supports up to 10,000 feet (3,048
meters) maximum of field wiring for Style 4 and up to 10,000 (3,048) maximum for Styles 6 and 7 on ports A and
B. The maximum loop resistance for Style 4 is 40 ohms on ports A and B and 40 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7.
If wiring for the LIB-200 leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge
Supression portion of this section for information on surge suppressors that are approved for use with this FACP.
P2
8
P2
8 Connect to Earth Ground Using Supplied Cable

7 SLC Loop Port B-
5 SLC Loop Port B+
3 SLC Loop Port A-
1 SLC Loop Port A+
1
Figure 4.2-1 The LIB-200
1-52 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

LIB-200A
The LIB-200A field wiring is electrically isolated from the rest of the system so that any two ground faults on
separate SLCs will not cause invalid replays from devices. A short to any other system circuit will not cause
communication loss. The LIB-200A has an earth ground fault detection circuit with selectable high/low
sensitivity and disable. Use only the high sensitivity setting as shipped from the factory. Port A and Port B of
the LIB 200A can each support up to 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) of SLC wiring for Style 4. For Styles 6 and 7,
Port A and Port B together will support 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) SLC wiring in total. The maximum loop
resistance for style 4 is 50 ohms on ports A and B and 50 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7. The LIB-200A
supports the Local Mode General Alarm Bus, a feature which permits limited alarm function in the unlikely
event of a CPU failure. The LIB-200A has two LEDs; yellow displays earth ground fault trouble and red
indicates initiated alarm condition during local mode only (refer to Figure 4.2-2).
If wiring for the LIB-200A leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge
LIB-400
The LIB-400 field wiring is electrically isolated from the rest of the system so that any two ground faults on
separate SLCs will not cause invalid replays from devices. A short on to any other system circuit will not
cause communication loss. The LIB-400 has an earth ground fault detection circuit with selectable high/low
sensitivity and disable. Use only the high sensitivity setting as shipped from the factory. Port A and Port B of
the LIB 400 can each support up to 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) of SLC wiring for Style 4. For Styles 6 and 7,
Port A and Port B together will support 12,500 feet (3,810 meters) SLC wiring in total. The maximum loop
resistance for Style 4 is 50 ohms on ports A and B and 50 ohms total for Styles 6 and 7. The LIB-400 sup-
ports the Local Mode General Alarm Bus, a feature which permits limited alarm function in the unlikely event
of a CPU failure. The LIB-400 has two LEDs per loop; yellow indicates an earth ground fault and red indicates
an alarm condition during local mode only (refer to Figure 4.2-2).
If wiring for the LIB-400 leaves the building, one or more surge suppressors are required. Refer to the Surge
NEW LIB FEATURES

The following features are only present on the LIB-200A and the LIB-400:
• A Noise Control Module (NCM-1) is built in to reduce common mode noise on the SLC.
• Local Mode General Alarm Bus support (during a CPU board failure).
During a CPU failure, if one of the initiating devices programmed to participate in local mode is acti-
vated, the following will occur:
- The LIB will execute local mode,
- which turns on the red alarm LED on the LIB-400 or LIB-200A,
- and signals an alarm state through the general alarm bus (pin 16 of the ICA-4L) to other LIB-400/200As.
- The LIB is capable of sensing the general alarm bus, and therefore will execute its own local mode
action.
- Reduced RF Emissions
The use of conduit and shielded cable is no longer required for compliance with FCC Part 15
Class A Radiated Emissions Limits. The use of twisted pair cable is recommended to achieve the
maximum wire lengths indicated. The use of shielded cable and/or untwisted cable will reduce the
maximum wiring distance.

1-53
LIB-200A
SLC Port A+
SLC Port A-
SLC Port B+
SLC Port B-
Connect to Earth
Ground using
supplied cable
LIB-400
NOTES:
• Only one earth ground connection is required on
the LIB-400 at either TB1 or TB2.
• Silkscreen markings on TB2 of the LIB400 vary from
the above illustration: twos instead of ones are used,
so the markings are +L2A, -L2A, +L2B, and -L2B.
Figure 4.2-2 Loop Interface Boards
Surge Suppression
There are three (3) primary surge protectors that are approved for use with this FACP.
• DTK-2LVLP-F Diversified Technology Group, Inc. 1720 Starkey Rd. Largo, FL 33771 (727) 812-5000
• SLCP-030 EDCO 1805 N.E. 19th Ave. Ocala, FL 34470 (352) 732-3029
• PLP-42N Northern Technologies, Inc. 23123 E. Madison Ave. Liberty Lake, WA 99019 (800) 727-9119
Note: For detailed information refer to the installation documentation that was supplied with the unit.
One primary surge protector must be used with each SLC wiring pair whenever SLC wiring runs outside the building.
• Install primary protection only as shown in this document.
• Refer to NEC Article 800 and local building code requirements.
Additional primary surge suppressors maybe added as required by the NEC. Add these additional
suppressors in series with the SLC wiring at the building entry/exit.
Wiring connected to the surge suppressor output must remain within the building while wiring connected to
the surge suppressor input may be routed outside the building as shown in “Building Entry/Exit Connections”
in Figure 4.2-3.
Suppressor Installation
Mounting is inside the FACP enclosure or in a separate enclosure listed for fire protective signalling use.
Locate on an available stud and secure with nut.
Unit is connected in series with the SLC Loop to protect the control panel.
Provide a common ground to eliminate the possibility of a differential in ground potentials.
1-54 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

DTK-2LVLP-F Connections
2LV LP -F
SLC Terminal Block
SLC
+
IN OUT
2LVLPconn3.cdr
Note: Do not connect shield to surge protector or fire panel.
PLP-42N Connections
P LP -4 2N
SLC Terminal Block
GRND
SLC
L4
L4
O U TP U T
L3
IN PU T
L3
L2
L2
L1
PLP-Nconn3.cdr
L1
Note: Use 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) to 18AWG (0.75 mm2) wire with crimp-on connectors to connect the unit's ground terminal to
equipment ground. Wire length must be minimized to provide best protection. Do not connect shield (if present) to surge
protector or fire panel.
PLP-42N Connections
S L C P -30
SLC Terminal Block

SLC
+
SLCP-30conn3.cdr
IN OUT
Building Entry/Exit Connections

B u ildin g # 2 B u ildin g # 1
O U T IN IN O U T
S u rge S up pres so r
O U T IN IN O U T FA C P
SS-building.cdr
Figure 4.2-3 Surge Supressor/FACP Connections

1-55
Section 4.3 LIB SLC Loop Wiring Requirements
Branch Resistance
With the SLC disconnected from the LIB terminals, short the termination point of one branch at a time and mea-
sure the DC resistance from the beginning of the channel to the end of that particular branch. The total DC
resistance from the LIB-200 panel to branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total DC resistance from the LIB-
200A panel or the LIB-400 panel to branch end cannot exceed 50 ohms. Repeat this procedure for all remaining
branches. Refer to Figure 4.3-1 for Style 4 and Figure 4.3-2 for Style 6.
For each channel

Add the lengths of all the branches on one SLC Loop Channel. On the LIB-200, this sum cannot exceed 10,000
feet (3048 meters)per channel. On the LIB-200A or the LIB-400, this sum cannot exceed 12,500 feet (3810
meters) per channel.
LIB-200:
(Branch A) + (Branch B) + (Branch C) + (Branch D) + (Branch E) = 10,000 feet (3048 meters) or less
LIB-200A or LIB-400:
(Branch A) + (Branch B) + (Branch C) + (Branch D) + (Branch E) = 12,500 feet (3810 meters) or less
Branch B
LIB-400 SLC Loop

Channel A Branch D
Branch A
LIB
Branch C
Channel A or B
NOTE: SLC Resistance Measurement Branch E
When power is removed from the SLC, the positive
side of the circuit is opened at each ISO-X isolation module or
isolator detector base. To measure the SLC circuit resistance,
temporarily place a jumper between Terminals 2 and 4 on each
ISO-X while taking measurements. Remember to remove all the
jumpers and test all isolator modules when you have
finished taking the readings.
Branch
THE TOTAL OF ALL BRANCHES ON CHANNEL B:

LIB-200 must be less than or equal to 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
LIB-200A /LIB-400 must be less than or equal to 12,500 feet
(3810 meters)
THE TOTAL OF ALL BRANCHES ON CHANNEL A:
LIB-200 must be less than or equal to 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
LIB-200A /LIB-400 must be less than or equal to 12,500 feet (3810
meters)
Figure 4.3-1 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 4)

1-56 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Channel B
LIB-400
Style 6 SLC Loop
Channel A
LIB
When T-Taps are present they each represent a

Style 4 branch. These Style 4 branches will not
degrade the Style 6 loop and are permissible from Total Length of the Style 6 SLC Loop Pair
an operation standpoint, but they will not comply (including any Style 4 branches):
with the NFPA standard for Style 6 SLC • LIB-200 - cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
performance. • LIB-200A/LIB-400 - cannot exceed 12,500 feet (3810
meters)
The total DC resistance from the LIB-200 panel to branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms.
The total DC resistance from the LIB-200A panel or the LIB-400 panel to branch end cannot exceed 50 ohms.
In a simple Style 6 arrangement, this measurement may be made by

disconnecting Channels A and B at the control panel, shorting the two leads
at the input of Channel A, and metering the two leads of Channel B.
Channel B
Channel A
When Style 4 branches are present, complete the measurement by

opening the short which was placed at the input of Channel A and
perform the Style 4 measurement shown in Figure 4.3-1.
NOTE:
SLC Resistance Measurement
When power is removed from the SLC, the positive side of the circuit is opened at each ISO-X isolation module or isolator detector
base. To measure the SLC circuit resistance, temporarily place a jumper between Terminals 2 and 4 on each ISO-X while taking
measurements. Remember to remove all the jumpers and test all isolator modules when you have finished taking the readings.
Figure 4.3-2 SLC Loop Wiring Requirements (Style 6)

1-57
LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loops can be wired to meet the requirements of an NFPA Style 4 (refer to Figure
4.3-3), Style 6 (refer to Figure 4.3-4) or Style 7 (refer to Figure 4.3-5) SLC.
Pull Stations
2(+)
1(-)
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A and Detectors
installation drawings supplied
with each loop device for rating
and specification information.
LIB
Modules Modules
Connect to
chassis via Separate T-Tap to
Cable 71073. other Loop
devices
LIB
SLC Loop
Earth Ground ISO-X ISO-X

Channel B (-) Note: Isolator devices are
no connection not required for the Style 4
configuration. See "Device
Channel B (+)
Loading and Isolator Power
no connection All terminals are power-limited up". With Style 4 wiring
multiple branches can be
Channel A (-)
made at the LIB, each
no connection protected by an isolator
Channel A (+) device. This illustration
depicts two independent
Style 4 SLC loops.
Removal of either of the two
isolator modules results in a
single Style 4 SLC loop.
Figure 4.3-3 Typical NFPA Style 4 SLC Loops
1-58 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Pull Stations
LIB-400
Connect to
chassis via 2(+)
Cable 71073 1(-)
LIB
SLC Loop
Detectors
Earth Ground
Channel B (-)
no connection
Channel B (+)
no connection All terminals are power-limited
Channel A (-)
no connection Modules
Channel A (+)
Figure 4.3-4 NFPA Style 6 LIB SLC Loop

Functions in accordance with NFPA Style 6 SLC
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A and installation drawings supplied with each loop device for rating and specification information.

1-59
Style 7 Operation
By flanking each SLC device with ISO-X isolator modules and/or isolator detector bases, each device is
protected from an open or short on the SLC. In Figure 4.3-5 below, the MMX monitor module or XP transponder,
the non isolator-based device, and the isolator-based device will continue to function if there is an open or short
on the SLC.
The isolator-based device pictured below requires only one ISO-X module, as the isolator bases B524B1(A) and
B224B1(A) act as isolators. However, if the short circuit occurs on the wiring connected to terminals 2 and 3 of
the isolator base, the smoke detector in that base will not be isolated. Therefore, the conduit and ISO-X is
installed on this wiring. Refer to the isolator base wiring diagram in the figure.
ISO-X ISO-X
Isolator Isolator
Module Module
Non-isolator
base
ISO-X ISO-X
Isolator Isolator
Module Module
Conductors must be in
conduit.
Isolators must be within
20 feet ( 6.1m) of the
SSD Isolator Base addressable device.
B524B1(A) or MMX Monitor
B224B1(A) Module or XP
Transponder
NO T-TAPPING PERMITTED ISO-X

Isolator
Module
Channel Channel
123 20 foot (6.1m) A B
123
123 conduit maximum
123
123
123 LIB SLC Loop
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
Note
When more than 100 Isolator Modules/Isolator
Bases are connected to an SLC Loop, decrease
the 198 address capacity by two addresses for
every isolator in excess of 100.
Style 7 wiring for SSD Isolator Bases
B524B1(A) and B224B1(A)
Figure 4.3-5 NFPA Style 7 SLC

1-60 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Section 4.4 SLC Shield Termination
Shielded twisted pair cable can be used to minimize radiated emissions of radio frequency energy. The use of
shielded twisted pair cable is required when using the LIB-200. Terminating shielded twisted pair cable at the
cabinet is required for the LIB-200; shielded cable is not recommended for the LIB-200A and LIB-400. Use
unshielded twisted pair cable only. Figures 4.4-1 through 4.4-3 illustrate the LIB-200 shield terminations required.
Note: The use of shielded or untwisted cable in the LIB-200A and LIB-400 will result in shorter wire distances.
If shielded cable is employed with the LIB-200A and LIB-400, the shield should remain unterminated and non-
contiguous at each device for best system performance.
For a LIB-200 SLC Loop that is not contained in any conduit:
Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the cabinet. Connect the drain wire to the outside of the cabinet via a BX type
connector. Maintain the continuity of the shield wire throughout the loop but do not connect to any devices.
Cabinet
LIB Terminal Block
1 (+) SLC Channel A
2 no connection
3 ( - ) SLC Channel A
Figure 4.4-1 Shield Termination in No Conduit (LIB-200 only)
For a LIB-200 SLC that is contained entirely in conduit:
The shield drain wire must be connected to the negative (-) side of the SLC. Do not allow the shield drain
wire or the shield foil to touch the cabinet. Make no connections to Terminal 2. Note: For NFPA Style 6 field
wiring of the SLC, connect each end of the shield to the negative side of the respective Channel. Chain the
shield wire throughout the loop but do not connect to any devices.
Cabinet
LIB Terminal Block
1 (+) SLC Channel A
2 no connection
3 ( - ) SLC Channel A
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Full Conduit (LIB-200 only)

1-61
For a LIB-200 SLC that is partially contained in conduit
(less than 20 feet {6.1 m}):
Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the cabinet or the
conduit. Connect the drain wire to the termination point of the
conduit run (such as a single-gang box as illustrated at left).
The conduit cannot be longer than 20 feet (6.1 m) total.
LIB Terminal Block
1 (+) SLC Loop Channel A

2 no connection
3 (-) SLC Loop Channel A
Figure 4.4-2 Shield Termination in Partial Conduit (LIB-200 only)
1-62 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 4.5 The Isolator Module
The Loop Isolator Module, ISO-X (refer to Figures 4.5-1 through 4.5-3), is used to protect critical elements of
the SLC from short circuit faults on other branches or sections of the loop.
SLC Loop In ( - )
SLC Loop In ( +)
SLC Loop Out (- )
SLC Loop Out (+)
ISO-X
Figure 4.5-1 The Loop Isolator Module (ISO-X)
The ISO-X continuously monitors the circuit by pulsing the coil of an integral relay which is latched on at power
up.
Continuation of the SLC
Shorts on this T-tapped branch of an NFPA Style 4 SLC

will be isolated from all devices installed on the SLC
SLC
connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the ISO-X. A short or
Loop ISO-X
open on the T-tapped branch will result in loss of
communication to the devices on that branch. The T-
tapped branch will be isolated from the remainder of the
SLC.
T-Tapped Branch off the SLC
Figure 4.5-2 Isolating a Branch of a Style 4 SLC

The ISO-X sees this short and disconnects the faulted branch, effectively isolating the faulted branch from the
remainder of the loop (refer to Figure 4.5-3). Once the fault is removed, the ISO-X reapplies power to the loop
branch. Figures 4.5-1 through 4.5-3 illustrate the use of ISO-Xs on Style 4 SLCs. For an example of employing
ISO-Xs on Class A SLCs (refer to Figure 4.3-5).
SLC
Loop ISO-X Shorts on the remainder of this NFPA Style 4 SLC will
be isolated from all devices installed upstream of the
ISO-X.
Remainder of the SLC
Figure 4.5-3 Isolating the Remainder of a Style 4 SLC

1-63
Device Loading and Isolator Power Up
Isolator modules are powered from the SLC. The internal relay is a latching-type relay to limit the isolator's power
requirements. The contact will open when power is removed. During power up, the relay contact will close when
the SLC voltage rises above 7 volts. If too many addressable devices are connected to one isolator branch (t-
tap) or segment (loop), the isolator will never reach 7 volts and thus remain open (activated) on power up.
When no relay or sounder bases are used, a maximum load of 25 addressable devices can be connected to an
isolator, or between a pair of isolators and/or isolator bases to insure that the isolators power up correctly. Note
that IPX-751 detectors represent an exception, and only two of these detectors constitute a maximum load, not
25. When relay or sounder bases are used between isolator modules or isolator bases, the maximum number of
addressable devices in between isolators is seven. Note that the same addressable device restrictions apply to
isolator bases.
NOTE
During a short circuit fault condition, the control panel will register a trouble (INVALID REPLY) condition for each device on
the isolated SLC branch or loop segment.
1-64 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 4.6 Monitor Modules
The MMX-1, MMX-2 and MMX-101 Monitor Modules are addressable modules that monitor normally open contact,
shorting type and alarm initiating devices. The MMX-2 can also monitor conventional two-wire smoke detectors. The
MMX-1 and MMX-2 Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) can be wired as an NFPA Style B or Style D Initiating Device
Circuits; the MMX-101 Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) can be wired Style B only. There is no limit to the number of
contact-type devices installed on a monitor module circuit (See NFPA 72 for possible code imposed limits. See the
Device Compatibility document for the maximum number of 2-wire smoke detectors that can be connected to the
MMX-2.) Refer to Figures 4.6-3 and 4.6-4 for MMX-1/MMX-2 wiring diagrams.
The MMX-1 and MMX-2 Monitor Modules (Figure 4.6-1)
SLC Loop Connections
Connect the SLC Loop to MMX-1 or MMX-2 terminals 1(-) and 2 (+). The MMX occupies one module address on
the SLC Loop. Set the rotary switches on the MMX to the particular SLC address required (each MMX requires
a unique module address, 01-99).
NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit
Connect the alarm initiating devices to a single two-wire circuit. This circuit cannot be T-Tapped or branched in
any fashion, and must be terminated across the last device by a listed ELR. Connect the circuit to MMX-1/MMX-
2 terminals 6 (-) and 7 (+).
NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit
Connect the normally open contacts of the alarm initiating devices as shown in Figure 4.6-4. This circuit cannot
be T-Tapped or branched in any fashion. No external ELR is required for Style D wiring.
MMX-2 Operating Power
The MMX-2 requires connection of a Notifier 24V DC filtered and resettable power supply on Terminals 3(-) and
4(+). This power connection is supervised by the MMX-2. A maximum of 40 MMX-2 modules may be installed on
a LIB due to increased power consumption over the MMX-1. Only use 2-wire smoke detectors which are UL
compatibility listed. See the Notifier Device Compatibility Document 15378 for a listing of devices.
Style D (-)
SLC Loop (-) Style D (+)
SLC Loop (+) Style B (+)
24V DC (-) MMX-2 only Style B (-)
24V DC (+) MMX-2 only
Figure 4.6-1 MMX-1 or MMX-2 Monitor Modules

The MMX-101 Monitor Module (Figure 4.6-2)
The MMX-101 Monitor Module is an addressable module that is functionally and electrically identical to an MMX-1
Monitor Module (configured for NFPA Style B), but offered in a smaller package for mounting directly in the
electrical box of the contact-type device being monitored. Unlike the MMX-1, the MMX-101 does not have an
LED indicating polling or alarm condition.
Set the module address with these switches
NOTE
For additional ratings,
refer to Appendix A.
SLC Loop (+) (-) SLC Loop

(Red) (Black)
IDC (-) IDC (+)
(Yellow) (Violet)
NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit
Terminate with an End-of-Line Resistor 47K, 1/2-watt (A2143-00)

Figure 4.6-2 MMX-101 Monitor Module
1-65
Figure 4.6-3 illustrates an MMX-1 monitoring normally open contact fire alarm initiating devices that do not
require power and an MMX-2 monitoring powered two-wire smoke detectors and a normally open contact alarm
initiating device. Refer to Figure 4.6-5 for circuits using four-wire detectors.
NOTES
• For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
• For connection of the initiating devices, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device.
• For more information, refer to the MMX-2 Installation Instructions.
SLC Loop Channel A

Supervised and power-limited
Heat Detector Pull Station
LIB SLC Port A ( - ) MMX-1
47K
LIB SLC Port A (+) End-of-Line
Resistor
(A2143-00)
24 VDC Two-wire Smoke Detectors
MMX-2
A-2143-10
3.9K
Listed
End-of-
Line
Resistor
Power-limited
UL-listed 24 VDC Filtered Regulated Power
Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective
Signaling
or
MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-)
APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-)
Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-)
Figure 4.6-3 NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit
1-66 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Figure 4.6-4 illustrates an MMX-1 monitoring normally open contact fire alarm initiating devices that do not
require power and an MMX-2 monitoring powered two-wire smoke detectors. Refer to Figure 4.6-6 for circuits
using four-wire detectors.
NOTES
• For connection of the initiating devices, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with each device.
• For MMX-2 mount the appropriate ELR across terminals 8 and 9.
• For more information, refer to the MMX-2 Installation Instructions.
SLC Loop Channel A

Supervised and power-limited Heat Detector Pull Station
LIB SLC Port A ( - )

MMX-1
LIB SLC Port A (+)
See third bulleted

note above. 24 VDC Two-wire Smoke Detectors
MMX-2
Power-limited
UL-listed 24 VDC Filtered Regulated
Power Limited Power Supply for Fire
Protective Signaling
or
Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-)
Figure 4.6-4 NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit

24V DC Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power
Up to one amp for four-wire smoke detectors can be drawn from TB3 terminals 1(+) and 2(-). Power is removed
from these terminals during system reset. This 24V DC regulated source is power-limited but must be supervised
via an end-of-line Power Supervision Relay (refer to Figures 4.6-5 and 4.6-6).

1-67
*
Listed
Power
*47K ELR, 1/2-watt Part Number A2143-00 Supervision
Red Relay
Black
Note: contacts shown
in the energized
condition.
IDC(+)
IDC(-)
24V DC (+)
SLC Channel A
Common (-)
- MMX-1 Software Type ID “SCON”

+ UL listed 24V DC
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
IDC(+)
IDC(-)
24V DC (+)
Software Type ID “PWRC” Common (-)

CMX
Break tabs NOTES

The CMX resets power to the
detectors. It is not needed for • Place End-of-Line Resistor in series with supervision
power supplies using relay contacts as shown on last detector in loop.
resettable smoke detector • The power supervision relay coil leads must be
power. connected to the last detector base 24V screw
The RA400Z annunciates terminal.
the reset of smoke • For additional ratings, refer to Appendix A.
detector power. It is • The CMX shown (when properly programmed)
optional.
performs the reset function for all smoke detectors
WARNING!
connected to the IDC.
Observe proper polarity • Maximum of 30 PWRC modules per SLC.
RA400Z • Calculation of the maximum allowable resistance in
on the RA400Z or device
will be damaged. the 24V DC smoke detector power wiring:
(20.6 - Vom)
Rmax =
(N)(Is) + (NA)(Ia) + (Ir)
- + Power-limited
where:
Rmax- is the maximum Resistance of the 24V
wires.
UL listed 24 VDC Regulated Power
Vom - is the minimum operating voltage of the
Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective
detector or end-of-line relay, whichever is
Signaling
greater, in volts.
or
N- is the total number of detectors on the
supply 24V circuit.
Is - is the detector current in non-fire alarm.
Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (-
) NA - is the number of detectors on the 24V
power circuit which must function at the
same time in alarm.
Ia - is the detector current in alarm.
Ir- is the end-of-line relay current.
Figure 4.6-5 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style B IDC)

All connections are supervised and power limited
1-68 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Listed
Power
Supervision
Red
Relay
Black
Note: contacts shown
in the energized
condition.
IDC(+)
IDC(-)
24V DC (+)
SLC Channel A Software Type ID “SCON”
Common (-)
- MMX-1
+ UL listed 24V DC
Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
IDC(+)
IDC(-)
Software Type ID“PWRC”
24V DC (+)
CMX Common (-)
Break tabs
NOTES
The CMX resets power to the • The power supervision relay coil leads must be
detectors. It is not needed for connected to the last detector base 24V screw
power supplies using terminal.
resettable smoke detector • See Appendix A for additional ratings.
power. • The CMX shown (when properly programmed)
The RA400Z annunciates performs the reset function for all smoke
the reset of smoke
detectors connected to the IDC. See Section 4.4.
detector power. It is
optional. • Maximum of 30 PWRC modules per SLC.
• Calculation of the maximum allowable resistance
WARNING! in the 24V DC smoke detector Power wiring:
Observe proper polarity
RA400Z on the RA400Z or device
Rmax = (20.6 - Vom)
will be damaged. (N)(Is) + (NA)(Ia) + (Ir)
where:
Rmax - is the maximum resistance of the 24V
- + Power-limited wires.
Vom - is the minimum operating voltage of the
detector or end-of-line relay, whichever is
UL listed 24 VDC Regulated Power greater, in volts.
Limited Power Supply for Fire Protective N - is the total number of detectors on the
Signaling supply 24V circuit.
or Is - is the detector current in non-fire alarm.
MPS-24A/E, TB3 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) NA - is the number of detectors on the 24V
APS-6R, TB2 Terminal 1 (+) and 2 (-) power circuit which must function at the
Terminal 3 (+) and 4 (- same time in alarm.
) Ia - is the detector current in alarm.
Ir - is the end-of-line relay current.
Figure 4.6-6 Employing Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Style D IDC)

All connections are supervised and power limited

1-69
Section 4.7 The Control Module
The CMX Control Module is an addressable module that supervises and switches power to a Notification
Appliance Circuit (NAC). The CMX circuit can be wired as an NFPA Style Y or Style Z NAC. Alternately, the
CMX can be employed as a Form-C relay (refer to Figure 4.7-1). Refer to Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6 for CMX
wiring diagrams.
NOTE
The CMX refers either to the CMX-1 or CMX-2 through the remainder of this document, unless otherwise noted.
+ NAC (+) Option Class A
SLC Loop (-) - NAC (-) (Style Z) return SLC Loop (-)
SLC Loop (+) - NAC (-) SLC Loop (+)
-
Output
Power (-) + NAC (+) Common
Power (+) + N.O. Contact N.C. Contact
Alarm polarity
shown Break tabs
CMX Control Module (NAC) CMX Control Module (Form-C Relay)
Figure 4.7-1 The CMX Control Module
SLC Loop Connections

Connect the SLC Loop to CMX Terminals 1(-) and 2 (+). The CMX occupies one module address on the SLC
Loop. Set the rotary switches on the CMX to the particular SLC Loop address required (each CMX must have a
unique module address, 01-99).
Breaking Tabs
To configure a CMX as a Form-C relay, the two tabs must be broken off of the module. Use a pair of needle-nose
pliers to break off each tab.
WARNING!
The tabs must be broken before the connection of any power source to the Form-C terminals.
Contact Connections
Make connections to the common and the normally-open or normally-closed contacts on the CMX as needed.
(Refer to Figure 4.7-6 for a wiring diagram.)
1-70 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Notification appliance power can be supplied to CMX Control Modules by any one of the supplies illustrated in
Figure 4.7-2. This power is unsupervised and must be connected to a Power Supervision Relay wired to a CMX
Control Module (refer to Figures 4.7-3 through 4.7-5) or dedicated MMX module using the "MTRB" type ID.
When a remote power supply is employed, it must also be supervised.
Shield Drain Wire does
not connect to CMX but
should continue to the
next device
-
+
Common To next CMX or to a Power

UL Listed 24V DC Filtered - Supervision Relay at the end of the line
Power-limited Power Supply for use with (refer to Figures 4.7-3 through 4.7-5).
Fire Protective Signaling Systems
+ +24 VDC
An auxiliary power supply is needed to power a CMX

notification appliance circuit when wiring losses due to long
wire runs prevent the use of the MPS-24A/E or APS-6R in
the AM2020/AFP1010 Refer to Appendix A and to the
Device Compatibility Document.
The power supply must have secondary power

source (i.e. batteries) with a backup capability equal
to the panel's backup (24 or 60 hours).
Remote Supply
24 VDC
3.0 amps (filtered and power-limited)
+ -
MPS-24A/E
Figure 4.7-2 Providing Power to Control Modules

1-71
CMX CMX
+ - + - + - + -
Alarm polarity
shown
No End-of-Line -
relay is Notification
*
required here Appliance
○
+
○
○
○
**
Listed
Power
Supervision
Relay
CMX CMX
+ - + - + - + -
Alarm polarity
shown
No End-of-Line
relay is -
Power-limited required here Notification

Appliance
*
○
+
○
- +
○
TB3-4 TB3-3 **
Listed
Power
Supervision
Relay
MPS-24A/E *End-of-Line Resistor, 47K,

1/2-watt (A2143-00)
**Contacts shown in
energized condition.
NOTE: To provide accurate supervision, the power circuit wires should be broken at terminals 3 and 4 of the CMX
and not looped under the terminal hold-down clamp. Any time a power circuit is T-tapped, as seen immediately above
the MPS-24A power supply, each 24 VDC power circuit branch must end with a listed power supervision relay.
Figure 4.7-3 Power Distribution
1-72 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Listed Power Supervision Relay
(Contacts shown in energized position)
47K ELR, 1/2-watt (A2143-00) Alarm polarity shown!
- +
- +
+
Shield Drain Wire

-
- +
To next device on
SLC Loop
SLC LOOP Channel A

LIB Channel
Terminal 3 ( - )
_
Terminal 1 (+)
_
+
Common +24 VDC Red

This power source must be power-limited. Black
(Refer to Figure 4-17)
Refer to the Device Compatibility *Contacts shown in energized position
Document NOTES
• To provide accurate supervision, the power circuit wires should be broken at terminals 3 and 4 of the CMX and
not looped under the terminal hold-down clamp. Any time a power circuit is T-tapped, each branch must end with
a listed power supervision relay.
• For connection of the notification appliances, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with
each device.
Figure 4.7-4 NFPA Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit
Supervised and Power-Limited

1-73
Alarm polarity shown!
- +
- +
Shield Drain Wire +
+ To next device
- on SLC Loop
SLC LOOP Channel A -
Supervised and - +
power-limited
LIB Channel +
Terminal 3 ( - ) - -
Terminal 1 (+) + -
- +
+
Listed Power Supervision Relay

Common +24 VDC Black (Contacts shown in energized position)
This power source must be Red
power-limited.
(Refer to Figure 4-17)
Refer to the Device Compatibility
Document
NOTES
• Each audio/visual power loop must be supervised by a separate Power Supervision Relay.
• For connection of the notification appliances, refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions packaged with
each device.
Figure 4.7-5 NFPA Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit
Supervised and Power-Limited
1-74 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

SLC Loop Channel A
Power Limited and supervised.
Shield Drain Wire
+ To next device
- on SLC Loop
9
LIB
Terminal 3 ( - ) 1 (-) 8
Terminal 1 ( + ) CMX
2 (+) 7
3 6 Common
Normally Open Contact 4 5 Normally Closed Contact
Tabs
Break off both tabs to enable Form-C operation
WARNING!
The tabs must be broken before the connection of any power
source to the Form-C terminals (this is a permanent modification).
Figure 4.7-6 Using the CMX as a Form-C Relay
See Appendix A for device ratings.
Note: The circuit is supervised and Note: contacts shown

power-limited. For UL listed and in the energized
compatible devices, refer to the condition.
Device Compatibility Document. Alarm Polarity
Shown
Figure 4.7-7 Typical APS-6R Wiring to a CMX Module

1-75
Section 4.8 The Addressable Manual Pull Station
The NBG-12LX and BGX-101L are addressable manual pull stations with a key-lock reset feature (refer to Figure
4.8-1).
Figure 4.8-1 Addressable Manual Pull Station

Installation
1) Connect the SLC Loop to the pull station. If additional devices are to be connected to the SLC Loop after the
pull station, use the second pair of screw terminals to continue the loop.
2) The NBG-12LX and BGX-101L are factory preset with address "00". Set the address for the pull station by turning
or using a screwdriver to turn the rotary address switches on the back of the unit to the appropriate settings. Each
pull station must have a unique module address. Refer to Figure 4.8-2. Also refer to the NBG-12LX document
listed in the related documentation chart at the beginning of this manual.
NOTE
During programming of the AM2020/AFP1010, this module requires software type "MPUL".
SLC Out
1 2 3 4 +
ST R IP GA U G E -
SLC In -+
-
✵ ✳ ✰✡ ✴ ✔✔✔✐✙✙✑
+
Note: SLC wires should be
installed under tabs, but are
shown above them in this
illustration to show the terminal
connections.
NBG-12LX (back view) BGX-101L (back view)
Figure 4.8-2 Wiring Addressable Pull Stations

Supervised and power-limited. For SLC Loop ratings, refer to Appendix A.
1-76 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 4.9 Intelligent Detectors
These intelligent, addressable detectors provide analog information to the control panel, which processes this
analog information and continually makes decisions on the alarm, maintenance, or normal status of each device.
Each detector head mounts to a B501,B710LP or BX-501 Base, B501BH sounder Base, B524BI or B224BI
Isolator Base, or B524RB or B224RB Relay Base with sounder for ease of installation or replacement. Each
detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the head via built-in rotary switches. An integral LED may be
programmed to blink when in communication with the control panel and can be latched on when the unit enters
an alarm condition. A different address is required for each detector (01-99) on an SLC. The panel distinguishes
between detectors and modules so a detector and a module may be set to the same address without conflict.
SDX-551/SDX-551TH
An Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector that provides analog
measurements of the optical smoke level in the chamber to the control
panel. The SDX-551TH is an Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector with
fixed thermal.
SDX-751
The SDX-751 is a low-profile intelligent photoelectric smoke detector.
CPX-551
An Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector that measures the level of
combustion products in the chamber using the ionization principle and
provides this measurement to the control panel.
CPX-751
The CPX-751 is a low-profile intelligent ionization smoke detector.
IPX-751
The IPX-751 is an intelligent addressable, multi-sensing, low-profile
smoke detector. The AM2020/AFP1010 does not perform drift
compensation on this detector.
FDX-551/FDX-551R
The FDX-551 (135 degree Fahrenheit fixed temperature) and the FDX-
551R (Rate-of-Rise) Intelligent Thermal Sensors takes the temperature
and provides it to the control panel.
RA400Z
A Remote Single LED Annunciator that can be wired directly to an
addressable detector for annunciation of that detector's alarm status.
DHX-501 and DHX-502

Intelligent Detector Duct Housings designed to sample air currents
passing through ducts and allows for detection of smoke in HVAC ducts.
They will accommodate either the CPX-551 or the SDX-551. When
sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the control panel.
WARNING!
The control panel will only operate with Notifier intelligent addressable devices installed.

1-77
Section 4.10 Smoke Detector Installation
The B501, BX-501, B210LP, and B501BH provide the connection between the control panels SLC Loop and
SDX-551/551H/551HT/751, CPX-551/751, the IPX-751 and the FDX-551/551R intelligent detectors.
Installation (refer to Figure 4.10-1)
1) Connect the SLC Loop to the base, Terminal 1 (-) and Terminal 2 (+).
2) If employing an RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator, connect the RA400Z positive terminal to base Terminal
3 and the negative terminal to base Terminal 1.
3) Before installing the appropriate intelligent detector head, set a unique detector SLC address on the head
with a small flat-blade screwdriver. Mark this address on the base and on the head.
4) Fit the head over the base and applying light pressure, turn the head into the base until connection is made.
5) The sensor base includes a tamper-proof feature that, when activated, prevents the removal of the sensor
without the use of a tool. Refer to the installation instructions, included with each base, for further details.
The smoke detector base is supervised and power-limited. Refer to Appendix A for SLC ratings. Wiring
examples of the B524BI/B224BI Isolator Base and the B524RB Relay Base are detailed in Figures 4.10-2 and
4.10-3, respectively.
When no relay or sounder bases are used between a pair of B524BI(A) and/or B224BI(A) isolator bases, a
maximum load of 25 addressable devices can be connected to insure that the isolators power up correctly. When
relay or sounder bases are used between isolator bases, the maximum number of addressable devices in
between the isolator bases is seven.
+
to next device
Channel (+) Channel (+)
-
SLC Loop + SLC
Channel ( -) Channel ( - )
to next device on
SLC Loop
LIB
- SLC
- +
Common + 24VDC
MPS-24A, FCPS, or
APS-6R power supply
RA400Z Remote
LED Annunciator
B501 or BX-501 Detector Base B501BH Detector Base
Figure 4.10-1 Wiring the Smoke Detector Base

1-78 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Class A (Style 6)
Figure 4.10-2 Wiring the B524BI(A)/B224BI(A) Isolator Base
Listed Compatible Control Panel
Class A (Style 6)
Figure 4.10-3 Wiring the B524RB Relay Base
1-79
1-80
ISO-X MMX
CMX
9 9 9
1 8 1 8 1 8
2 7 2 7 2 7
MMX-101
3 6 3 6 3 6
4 5 4 5 4 5
BGX-101L
ISO-X
9
1 8
2 7
LIB-400 3 6
4 5
SLC Loop Maximums:

99 Module Addresses
99 Detector Addresses To next device on
40 ohms total loop resistance (LIB-200) Channel A
50 ohms total loop resistance (LIB-200A/LIB-400)
10,000 feet (3048 meters) of loop (LIB-200)
12,500 feet (3810 meters) of loop (LIB-200A/LIB-400)
AMSLC2a
BX-501 Base XPP
Installation 15088:K
Figure 4.10-4 Two Independent Style 4 SLC Loops
3/21/01
Section 4.11 The XP Series Transponder
The XP Series Transponder provides the AM2020/AFP1010 system with an efficient multiplex subsystem
capability and stand-alone operation in case of failure. The XP Transponder communicates directly with the
control panel's CPU along the LIB communications loop.
The XP Transponders are extremely effective in both high-rise and low-rise buildings where power losses over
long wiring distances dictate the use of remote control equipment, amplifiers or audio/visual power supplies.
Each XP Transponder may contain up to three expansion modules, each with up to eight initiating or notification
circuits, or control relays. Each XP Transponder can occupy up to 27 SLC addressable points (of the module
type). To the AM2020/AFP1010, XP Transponder circuits appear as individual monitor or control modules.
BE-XP Transponder Starter Complement (Power-limited)

The BE-XP includes the XPP-1 Transponder Processor Module, an XPDP dress panel (refer to Figure 4.11-1),
a CHS-4 chassis, all required cables, and instructions. The XPP-1 module provides two field-programmable dual
Form-C relays and one programmable addressable monitor point.
XP Dress Panel (XPDP) ○
XP SERIES TRANSPONDER
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
XPP-1 Module
Figure 4.11-1 XP Dress Panel and XPP-1 Module

1-81
XPC-8 Control Module (Power-limited)
Provides eight Class B or four Class A notification appliance circuits. For audio evacuation applications, the XPC-8
can drive eight speaker circuits Style Y (Class B) or four Style Z (Class A), or can be alternately configured to drive
fireman's telephone circuits.
XPM-8/XPM-8L Monitor Module (Power-limited)

Provides eight Style B (Class B) or four Style D (Class A) initiating device circuits. Supports conventional two
wire smoke detectors and normally-open contact devices such as pull stations, waterflow and supervisory
switches, and 4-wire smoke detectors; XPM-8L supports contact devices and Style B wiring only.
XPR-8 Relay Module (May be power-limited or nonpower-limited depending on relay connection)

Provides eight form-C relays. The XPR-8 may be configured to provide four dual form-C relays for use in dual
channel audio selection applications.
For more information, refer to XP Series Transponder System Manual.
1-82 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section Five
Serial Communications
5.1 Optional Serial Interface Boards
The AM2020/AFP1010 uses serial communication to move data between printers, CRT terminals and
annunciators. The various components used are described here.
Two optional serial interface boards are available for the AM2020/AFP1010. Only one may be used in the system, and
the particular board chosen depends on the specific needs of the installation. Refer to Figure 5.1-3.
SIB-2048A
The SIB-2048A has two printer and two terminal serial interfaces. The first printer interface supports a
PRN Fire Protective Signaling System Printer. The second printer interface is intended for connection to
UL 1950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment printers. The first CRT interface is for use with the
CRT or Fire Protective Signaling System listed terminal. The second CRT interface is intended for
connection to UL 1950 terminals.
The SIB-2048A ACS interface is electrically isolated. Devices connected to the annunciator control
interface may be used to activate modules (points) or display up to 2048 points/zones.
SIB-NET
The SIB-NET contains all of the features of the SIB-2048A. When used with a Media Interface Board
(MIB), the SIB-NET can also communicate with NOTI•FIRE•NET™
NOTI•FIRE•NET™. This allows the AM2020/
AFP1010 to transmit alarm and trouble events through the network to other network nodes for display
and recording. The network allows the NRT/INA to perform reset, acknowledge, and signal silence
functions at the AM2020/AFP1010. The SIB-NET replaces SIB-232, SIB-2048, and SIB-2048A in
existing systems which later require connection to NOTI•FIRE•NET™
NOTI•FIRE•NET™. The SIB-NET supports all
features of the SIB-2048A including ACS annunciators, printers, and CRTs.
WARNING!
The entire network must contain the same version of NOTI•FIRE•NET™ software. Improper
system operation will result if the versions are not the same.
All software part numbers are not compatible with each other. Improper mixing of software part
numbers can compromise life safety functions. If unsure about the compatibility of a particular
software combination, consult the factory.
PRN Printers
UL Fire Protective Signaling System listed printer employing EIA-232 serial interface.
CRT Terminals
UL Fire Protective Signaling System listed terminal employing EIA-232 serial interface and Notifier protocol.
Cabling and Connections
Male DB-25 connectors (Figure 5.1-1) are supplied with remote printers and display terminals. Use these
connectors to wire the interface between the peripherals and the Serial Interface Board (SIB) as illustrated in
Figures 5.2-1, 5.3-1, and 5.3-2.
Male DB-25 Connector

(solder-cup view)
Figure 5.1-1 Male DB-25 Connector

1-83
Shield Terminations
Wiring to the display monitors, remote annunciators, other peripherals, and printers must be twisted shielded
pairs. Refer to Figure 5.1-2 for pair connections illustrations.
SHLDTRM.CDR
Figure 5.1-2 Guidelines for Terminating the Shield
1-84 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

EIA-485 Reference
Earth Ground
EIA-485 (+)
To ICA-4L EIA-485 (-)
EIA-485 (+)
EIA-485 (-)
EIA-232 Reference
Transmit to Printer
EIA-232 Reference
Receive from Printer
EIA-232 Reference
Transmit to AUX Printer
EIA-232 Reference
Ready/Busy from Keltron Printer
P3 Connections EIA-232 Reference

Transmit to CRT
Terminals 1-4: Provide wiring for one PRN printer to EIA-232 Reference
this unsupervised circuit. Receive from CRT
EIA-232 Reference
Terminals 5-8: Provide connection to the Keltron Transmit to AUX Monitor
VS4095/5 printer or any UL EDP-listed printer. Connec- EIA-232 Reference
tion is not supervised. EDP listed printers serve in an
CTS from AUX Monitor
ancillary capacity only.
Terminals 9-12: Provide connection for 1–25 CRTs to

this supervised circuit.
Terminals 13-16: Provide connection to UL EDP-listed

display monitors. Devices are not supervised and serve in
an ancillary capacity only.
Figure 5.1-4 SIB-NET/SIB-2048A Terminal Designations
Installing an Ancillary Device on the EIA-232 Communications Circuit

An ITE listed supplemental signaling device such as a printer or the PageNet-1 can be connected to the EIA-
232 serial printer port connection on the fire alarm system to provide a supplemental signaling capability.
Additionally, sme devices such as PageNet-1 can be actuated by means of dry contacts from the fire alarm
system. For more detailed instructions pertaiing to the installation of an ancillary device, refer to the specific
device manual.
P3 on the
AM2020/
AFP1010

1-85
Section 5.2 The CRT-2 Terminal
The CRT-2 Terminal with keyboard features an 80-column, 25-line display. Function keys allow all control panel
commands to be executed from the keyboard. Since the system control function keys (Acknowledge, Signal
Silence, and Reset) are not protected against unauthorized use by key switch or password, in order to comply
with the UL listing and applicable NFPA standards, the keyboard should be disconnected from the CRT-2 and
locked in a secure location when not being used for programming/troubleshooting of the system, or the modem
function should be enabled in System Programming to prevent the operation of the system control function keys..
(Refer to the TPI-232 Manual, Document 50372, for additional CRT-2 options.) The keyboard may remain
connected when the system is configured and operated in compliance with the NFPA standard on Proprietary
Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems and the CRT-2 is located in the Supervising Station. No keyboard may
be connected to any remote CRT-2 unless the modem function is enabled in System Programming.
Primary and Secondary Power

The CRT-2 requires 120-240 VAC, 50/60Hz primary power. A secondary power source (battery backup) is not
provided; the use of a separate Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS), UL listed for Fire Protective Signaling is
recommended. A UPS is required for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Unit applications.
Electrical Specifications
CRT-2
Voltage: 90 - 264 VAC
Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
Current: 0.5 - 0.2 A
Installation
Connection between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the CRT-2 is provided through an EIA-232 interface on the Serial
Interface Board (refer to Figure 5.2-1). A custom cable must be assembled for connection to the CRT-2 EIA port.
Additional CRT-2s are connected with installer provided cables (AUX on first CRT-2 to EIA port on second CRT-2,
etc.). Refer to Figure 5.3-1 for wiring instructions.
Multiple Terminals
The AM2020/AFP1010 will support up to 25 terminals installed on the EIA-232 circuit of the Serial Interface
Board. Each CRT-2 is shipped from the factory with a keyboard. This keyboard is used to program the control
panel and can only be used on one CRT-2 installed in the chain. The keyboard must either be removed or locked
after programming (except NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises and Central Station Receiving Units, where
the keyboard must remain installed and functional) unless the modem function is enabled in System
Programming.
NOTE
The CRT-2 is factory programmed.
PAR SER2-AUX SER1-EIA
The PAR (Parallel), AUX, and EIA ports are

located on the back of the CRT Monitor.
CRT Function Keys

The function keys on the CRT are labeled with special AM2020/AFP1010 commands. These keys function
identical to the keys on the DIA. For a description of these commands, refer to the Operating Chapter.
1-86 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

50 feet (15.24 meters) typical SIB-2048A
or
Wiring distance limited by SIB-NET
cable capacitance.
See EIA-232E standard.
CRT with Keyboard

One maximum - If using the CRT-2, the keyboard may be
located remotely with any CRT-2 in the chain. If using the
CRT-1, the CRT with keyboard must be first in the chain and
must be in same room as the AM2020/AFP1010.
SIB (Connector P3)
Twisted Pair 9 EIA-232 Reference

Twisted Pair
10 Transmit to CRT

Twisted Pair
12 Receive from CRT
nc
to AUX Port of to EIA Port of CRT with

CRT keyboard
nc
to EIA Port CRT without keyboard

of next CRT
Up to 24 maximum in chain. 50 feet
(15.24 meters) maximum (typical)
between CRTs.
Figure 5.2-1 CRT to SIB Connections
NOTES
• Outputs are power limited (for device/circuit ratings, refer to Appendix A).
• Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted pair cable.
• Apply power to the CRTs prior to start-up of the system, beginning with the last CRT in the chain.
• A total of 25 CRTs may be installed. Only one keyboard (shipped with each CRT) may be used in the entire system
and it may be installed with any CRT in a chain. For all applications EXCEPT NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected
Premises Receiving Units, the keyboard is used only to program the control panel and must be removed or kept in
a locked enclosure after programming the system unless the modem function is enabled in System Programming.

1-87
Section 5.3 Remote Printers
The AM2020/AFP1010 can employ PRN Remote Printer Configuration

Printers. This printer provides a hard-copy printout of Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN for
all status changes within the system and time- instructions on the printer’s menu controls. Set the
stamps the printout with the current time-of-day and printer’s options as follows:
date. The PRN provides 80 columns of data on L/R ADJUST: 0
FONT: HS DRAFT
standard 9 inch by 11 inch tractor-feed paper. LPI: 6 CPI
ESC CHARACTER: ESC
BIDIRECTIONAL COPY: ON
Installation
CG-TAB: GRAPHIC
Remote printers require 120 VAC, 50/60Hz primary COUNTRY: E-USA ASCII
power. A secondary power source (battery backup) is AUTO CR:
LANGUAGE:
OFF
ENGLISH
not provided; the use of a separate Uninterruptable AUTO TEAR: 1S
Power Supply (UPS) 50 watt minimum, UL listed for COLOR OPTION: NOT INSTALLED
FORMLEN:
Fire Protective Signaling is recommended. A UPS is LINES: 6 LPI=60
required for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protected Premises STANDARD: EXECUTIVE 10.5"
Receiving Unit applications. CPI: 10 CPI

SKIP: 0.5"
EMULATE: EPSON
Connection between the control panel and PRN is I/O:
BUFFER: 36K FOR PRN-4
provided through an EIA-232 interface on the Serial 40K FOR PRN-5
SERIAL:
Interface Board. An installer provided cable must be BAUD: 2400
FORMAT: 7 BIT, EVEN, 1 STOP
assembled for connection to the printer's EIA-232 PROTOCOL: XON/XOFF
port. Refer to Figure 5.3-2 for wiring instructions. CHARACTER SET: STANDARD
S1. ZERO: ON
AUTO LF: OFF
MENLOCK: ALL
Using a special print feature, the PRN allows all PAPER:
information programmed into the panel to be printed BIN 1:
BIN 2:
12/72"
12/72"
out (including system configuration and addressable SINGLE: 12/72"
PUSH TRA: 12/72"
device parameters). PULL TRA: 12/72"
PAP ROLL: 12/72"
PAPOPT: NO
NOTE
The PRN is factory programmed.
PRN 50 feet (15.24 meters)

Remote (typical) SIB-2048A
Printer or
Wiring distance limited SIB-NET
by cable capacitance.
See EIA-232E standard.
SIB (Connector P3)

2 Transmit to Printer
3 EIA-232 Reference
Twisted Pair
4 Receive From Printer
nc
NOTES
• Outputs are power limited but not supervised.
• Make connections with overall foil/braided-shield
Plug this DB-25 connector into the twisted pair cable.
EIA-232 Port of the printer. • Near Letter Quality (NLQ) mode cannot be used on
this printer.
Figure 5.3-1 Remote Printer to SIB Connections
1-88 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Keltron Printer
Model VS4095/5
SIB-2048A
50 feet (15.24 meters) or
maximum SIB-NET
(typical)
Wiring distance limited by

cable capacitance. See
EIA-232E standard.
SIB Connector P3
(Power-limited)
EIA-232 Reference 5
Twisted Pair Transmit to Printer 6
nc EIA-232 Reference 7
Twisted Pair Ready/Busy 8
from Printer
Plug this DB-25 connector into the

EIA-232 Port of the printer.
Main Power Supply
TB3- 3 (+)
MPS-24A: and Power-limited
TB3-4 (-)
DC IN - + DC IN
Keltron Remote Printer
Model VS4095/5
Figure 5.3-2 Keltron Printer Connections

NOTES
• Outputs are power limited and are not supervised.
• Connections must be made with overall foil/braided-shield twisted paired cable suitable for EIA-232 applications.
• The SIB can employ two printers.
• Set the DIP switches as follows:
SP1-1 OFF SP2-1 OFF
SP1-2 ON SP2-2 OFF
SP1-3 OFF SP2-3 OFF
SP1-4 ON SP2-4 OFF
SP1-5 OFF SP2-5 OFF
SP1-6 ON SP2-6 OFF
SP1-7 ON SP2-7 ON
SP1-8 OFF SP2-8 OFF

1-89
Section 5.4 Annunciator Modules
ACM-16AT* The ACM-32A*
The Annunciator Control The Annunciator Control
Module-16AT contains 16 Module-32A contains 32 red
red alarm and 16 yellow alarm LEDs, a system
trouble LEDs, 16 trouble LED, an ON LINE/
momentary keypad POWER LED, and a local
switches for controlling each piezo sounder with a silence/
point, a system trouble LED, acknowledge switch for
an ON LINE/POWER LED, audible indication of alarm
and a local piezo sounder and trouble conditions at
with a silence/acknowledge each annunciator.
switch for audible indication
of alarm and trouble AEM-32A*
conditions at each The Annunciator Expander
annunciator. Module-32A expands the
ACM-32A by 32 annunciator
AEM-16AT* points. One expander module can
The Annunciator Expander be supported by an ACM-32A, providing
Module 16AT expands the ACM-16AT a maximum of 64 points.
by 16 annunciator points. Up to three of
these expander modules
*Additional canthat
models exist behave
supported by designations
different letter an for different color LEDs: however, all functions
described areto
ACM-16AT, consistent
a maximumfor all models. For more details
of 64 annunciator on the Annunciator Control System (ACS), refer to
points.
The LDM-32 the ACS Manual. SCS-8**
The LDM-32 Lamp Driver The Smoke Control Station
Annunciator Module provides (SCS-8) module uses eight
32 alarm or 16 alarm and 16 groups of four annunciator points
trouble lamp driver outputs, for fan shutdown control or other
corresponding to 32 heating, ventilation or air
annunciator points which can conditioning functions.
be connected to external
SCE-8
devices such as a custom
The Smoke Control Expander (SCE-
graphic annunciator. When
8) is used to expand the SCS-8 by an
configured to provide 16
additional eight groups of four
alarm and 16 trouble outputs,
annunciator points. Only one
16 switch inputs are available
expander can be used per SCS-8.
for control of system
functions such as signal SCS-8L**
silence, system reset, and The Smoke Control Lamp Driver Station (SCS-8L)
control module activation. module uses eight groups of four annunciator points
for fan shutdown control or other heating, ventilation
The LDM-E32
or air conditioning functions. Must be mounted in
The Lamp Driver Annunciator Expander Module
custom graphic annunciator panel.
LDM-E32 expands the LDM-32 by 32 annunciator
points (maximum of 64 points). SCE-8L
The Smoke Control Expander (SCE-8L) is used to
The LDM-R32
expand the SCS-8L by an additional eight groups of
The LDM-R32 Relay Expander Module LDM-R32
four annunciator points. Only one expander can be
provides the LDM-32 or LDM-E32 with 32 dry Form-A
used per SCS-8L. Must be mounted in custom
(normally open) contacts. The relay module replaces the
graphic annunciator panel.
lamp driver outputs with relay outputs; one LDM-R32 for
each LDM-32 or LDM-E32. For more details on the SCS Smoke Control System,
For more details on the LDM-32 Series Lamp Drivers, refer to the SCS Manual.
refer to the LDM Manual. ** The SCS-8 and SCS-8L firmware has been updated in
conjunction with Software Release M2.8. The new SCS
firmware is not backward compatible with older revisions of
software.
1-90 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
R-120 resistor
Figure 5.4-1 EIA-485 to SIB Connections

Refer to Appendix A for EIA-485 circuit ratings and limitations.
NOTE
If the SIB is not the first device on the EIA-485 circuit, set SW1 on the SIB to the ''out'' position.
The EIA-485 Reference (P5-1) for the SIB must be connected to any ACS device which is not within the same
cabinet. Connect P5-1 of the SIB to:
• AMG-1 at P4-6
• ACM-16AT at TB1-4
• LDM-32 at TB1-4
• NIB-96 or AMG-1/E using an MPS-24A remote from the SIB, connect to TB2 terminal 2 on the MPS-24A
• SCS-8/L at TB1-4
• LCD-80 at P1-4
• RPT-485W Reference A at TB1-5
• RPT-485W Reference B at TB2-5
• RPT-485WF Reference A at TB1-5

1-91
Section Six
Standard-Specific Requirements
The Notifier AM2020/AFP1010 is an expandable multiplex Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) designed for use in
commercial, industrial, and institutional applications. These panels meet the requirements for service under the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards outlined in this
chapter. The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate standard are listed in
each section.
Each system requires (at a minimum) the following equipment:
• Cabinet (CAB-3 Series)
• BE Basic Equipment Package (BE-2020N for the AM2020; BE-1010N for the AFP1010) containing the
Central Processor Unit (CPU-2020 for the AM2020; CPU-2 for the AFP1010), Display Interface Assembly
(the DIA-2020 for the AM2020; DIA-1010 for the AFP1010), Interconnect Assemblies (ICA-4L), BP-3 Battery
Panel and cables.
• MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power Supply and batteries (refer to primary power requirements).
• One of the following Loop Interface Boards: LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400.
• Initiating Devices - MMX Monitor Modules, XP5-M Transponder Modules, manual pull stations, heat
detectors, and Intelligent Detectors such as the SDX-551/751, FDX-551, CPX-551/751, and IPX-751.
In addition, each NFPA standard requires the following specific equipment:
UL 916
AM2020/AFP1010 installations requiring UL 916 Signal System Unit Category UDTZ or UL 864 Process Man-
agement Category QVAX listings must be installed according to the following requirements:
Connect noncritical process management signals to the AM2020/AFP1010 using shorting or
opening contact devices on monitor module points (MMX-1, MMX-101, XPM-8, or XPM-8L).
Use software type "MTRB".
NFPA 72 Protected Premises (Local) Fire Alarm Systems

CMX Control Module installed on SLC Loop 1 and set to module address “96.” This unit must be installed as
outlined in Figures 4.7-2 through 4.7-6 (notification appliances).
NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System

MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip. CMX Control Module installed on Loop 1 and set to module address "97." Power
Supervision Relay. These items must be installed as outlined in Figure 6.1-1.
NFPA 72 Remote Supervising Station Fire Alarm System and

NFPA 72 Central Station Fire Alarm Systems (Protected Premises Unit)
Initiating Devices - MMX Monitor Modules, XP5-M Transponder Modules, manual pull stations, heat detectors,
and Intelligent Detectors such as the SDX-551/751, FDX-551, CPX-551/751, and the IPX-751. For applications
not requiring security functions, refer to The UDACT Manual. For security applications, refer to Chapter 4 of this
document.
NOTE
The use of a DACT (NFPA 72 Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems) is not permitted when one or more of the
following are present in the system: XP Transponder with separate power supply, AA-120/E, AA-100/E, AA-30/E or
a second (remote) MPS-24A or MPS-24AE power supply.
1-92 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

NFPA 72 Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm System
PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER ONE (refer to Figure 6.4-1):
Transmitter - Network Interface Board (NIB-96).
PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER TWO (refer to Figure 6.4-2):

The Receiving Unit is an AM2020/AFP1010 with an MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module for receipt of fire alarms and
one MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module for receipt of trouble signals from the Protected Premises Unit.
PROTECTED PREMISES SYSTEM NUMBER THREE - UDACT (refer to Note 1.)

Transmitter - UDACT. Not suitable for security applications.
(refer to The UDACT Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter manual).
NFPA 72 Central Station Receiving and Proprietary Protected Premises Receiving Units (refer to Notes 1.
and 2.)
CRT Video Display Terminal with Keyboard, PRN Printer, and an Uninterruptable Power Supply listed for Fire
Protective Signaling Use. For use with Systems Number One and Two. For System Number Three applications,
refer to The UDACT Manual.
This unit must be installed in accordance with the following requirements:
• Monitor modules located within the protected premises which are responsible for supervising the state of the
protected premises control unit may be programmed for Tracking (non-latching) operation. Notification
appliances and control relays will "follow" the tracking devices programmed to activate them. Once a tracking
device input circuit is restored to normal, the fire alarm condition clears from that device, all output devices
assigned to the tracking device will return to their non-fire alarm state. This action will occur without activation
of the system reset button.
• The display terminal CRT and printer must be located in the same room as the AM2020/AFP1010.
• The display terminal CRT and printer must be powered by an Uninterruptable Power Supply UL listed for
Fire Protective Signaling. This power source must be supervised by the control panel.
• The keyboard connected to the display terminal must not be removed or made inaccessible at any time.
• Loop Interface Board Requirements:

LIB-200 10,000 feet (3048 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm²)
maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving
Unit and the NIB-96 or MMXs.
LIB-200A 12,500 feet (3810 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm²)
LIB-400 12,500 feet (3810 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm²)
NOTES
1. The use of a DACT (NFPA-72 Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems) is not permitted when one or more of the
following are present in the system: SIB-NET, XP Transponder with separate power supply, AA-120/E, AA-100/E, AA-
30/E or a second (remote) MPS-24A or MPS-24AE power supply.
2. All LIBs are power-limited. If the wiring connected to the LIB-200 leaves the building it must be in conduit. It can not
exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), must not cross any power lines, and must not be in the vicinity of any high voltage.
These outdoor wiring restrictions do not apply to the LIB-200A or the LIB-400.
Refer to Section 4.2 of this chapter and the Device Compatibility Document listed in the Related Documentation Chart
of this manual for information on surge suppressors approved for use with this FACP.

1-93
Section 6.1 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems
For connection of initiating devices and modules in this system, refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6. This
application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions. For additional
ratings, refer to Appendix A.
NOTE
During programming, NFPA menu option "72B" must be chosen.
Braided-shield/Drain Wire
+ To next device
- on SLC Loop
This CMX must be programmed as:
Software Type ID GAS

Address L1M97
SLC LOOP Channel A
off Loop Interface
Board Number 1
Fire Alarm polarity shown!

CMX
White Wire (Contacts shown in
P2 energized position)
MBT-1
Do not Brown Wire

break tabs!
LIB-200
LIB-200A
LIB-400 Red Wire
Black Wire
24V DC Common Listed
Power Supervision Relay
Connect wires to two

red terminals on box
NOTE
10 ohms maximum loop resistance wiring
from power supply to municipal box.
Gamewell
Model M34-56
Local Energy
Municipal Box
MPS-24A
Figure 6.1-1 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System
(Fire Alarm Signal Transmission)
NOTE
Wiring between the MBT-1 and the Municipal Box cannot exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), it must not cross any
power lines and must not be in the vicinity of any high voltage.
1-94 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 6.2 Generating Event-Pending Signals at a Remote Location
Printer PRN
Uninterruptable Power Supply
UL Listed for Fire Protective Signaling

Must be supervised by control panel
CRT with keyboard. Do NOT remove or lock up keyboard.
Control Module (CMX) programmed for Software Type ID Spectralert Horn used to signal a pending trouble condition.
"TPND". This module will be activated for all pending trouble Select a sound (via jumper clips) that is separate and distinct
conditions. The module is silenced upon acknowledgment of from any alarm signal in the installation. The sounder must
all troubles. be installed in the same room as the CRT with keyboard.
Control Module (CMX) programmed for Software Type ID Spectralert Horn/Strobe used to signal a pending alarm
"APND". This module will be activated for all pending alarm condition. Select a sound (via jumper clips) that is separate and
conditions. The module is silenced upon acknowledgment of distinct from the trouble signal selected above. The sounder
all alarms. must be installed in the same room as the CRT with keyboard.
NOTES
• When terminal supervision has been selected, the terminal itself will beep repeatedly while any state
change is awaiting acknowledgment.
• For field wiring, refer to Figure 4.7-3 Power Distribution for CMX Control Modules.
• Any number of the event-pending module types may be used in the system.
• If individual signals for alarm and trouble are not desired, one control module (CMX) with one listed
notification appliance can be used to indicate both alarm and/or trouble pending. Program this module for
Software Type ID "GPND".

1-95
Section 6.3 Supervising an Uninterruptable Power Supply
All connections are supervised and power limited. The MMX-1 Software Type ID "MTRB" may be used to moni-
tor either normally closed or normally open supervisory contacts, as illustrated in Figure 6.3-1(A). An open or a
short condition on the circuit will produce the message "POINT TROUBLE" on the display.
Figure 6.3-1(B) depicts the MMX-1 Software Type ID "MTRB" used to monitor Supervising the Normally
Closed Contacts of an Uninterruptable Power Supply with a CRT-2 Terminal.
NOTE
The CRT-2 must be Revision H or Higher.
A
SLC Loop
Type ID "MTRB"
+ -
Uninterruptable Power Supply UL

MMX-1 Listed for Fire Protective Signaling with
normally closed supervisory contacts
Type ID
"MTRB"
Do not break tabs!
SLC Loop
Type ID "MTRB"
+ -
Uninterruptable Power Supply UL

Listed for Fire Protective Signaling
MMX-1 with normally open supervisory
contacts.
Type ID
"MTRB"
Do not break tabs! ELR 47K, 1/2-watt

Part Number A2143-00
Figure 6.3-1 Uninterruptable Power Supply

1-96 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Section 6.4 NFPA 72 Proprietary Supervising Station Fire Alarm Systems
Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, and Trouble Signal Transmission
All LIBs are power-limited. If the wiring connected to the LIB-200 leaves the building it must be in conduit. It can
not exceed 1000 meters (1093 yards), must not cross any power lines, and must not be in the vicinity of any high
voltage. These outdoor wiring restrictions do not apply to the LIB-200A or the LIB-400. Refer to Section 4.2 of
this manual and the Device Compatibility Document listed in the Related Documentation Chart of this manual for
information on surge suppressors approved for use with this FACP. Refer to Figures 6.4-1 and 6.4-2. Table 6.4-
1 is a minimal configuration for a NIB-96 with base SLC address=01 and may be used when programing the
NIB-96. For further information, refer to the NIB-96 Network Interface Board Manual.
Master Software Master SLC Slave Annunciator Slave Software

Function
Type ID Address Address Type ID
MON L1M1 A6P1 AAST General Trouble
not used not used A6P2 AMON not used
CON L1M3 A6P3 ARST Slave Reset
not used not used A6P4 AMON not used
Security Alarm
SARM L1M5 A6P5 AMON
(typical)
Security Tamper
SSYM L1M6 A6P6 AMON
(typical)
Non-alarm Input
NOA L1M7 A6P7 AMON
(typical)
Control Output
CON L1M8 A6P8 ACON
(typical)
Table 6.4-1 NIB-96 (Minimal Configuration)

1-97
EIA-485 Loop OUT SIB-2048A/SIB-NET in
To additional EIA-485 devices, if installed, Protected Premises
or 120 ohm at the end of the circuit. Control Unit (slave)
NOTES
• This arrangement can be employed
Term. 5 (+) for Central Station and Proprietary
(NFPA 72) service.
EIA-485 Loop IN Term. 6 (-) • This application is not suitable for
separate transmission of sprinkler
supervisory conditions.
• For connection of alarm initiating
SLC Loop IN
devices, refer to Figures 4.6-2
(From Master
through 4.6-6.
FACP LIB at
• During system programming, NFPA
Central Station)
menu option "72D" must be chosen.
SLC Loop Terminal Assignments

OUT
SLC Loop IN:
From: Master LIB-200, LIB-200A, or LIB-400
No connection on P2 or P2 terminals 1(+) and 3(-)
P3 if ICA-4L chassis is To: NIB-96 P5 terminals 1(+) and 3(-)
used. P2 P3 SLC Loop OUT:
NIB-96 From: NIB-96 P5 terminals 5(+) and 7(-)
To: Next device on SLC Loop
EIA-485 Loop IN
From: SIB P5 terminals 5(+) and 6(-)
To: NIB-96 P4 terminals 5(+) and 3(-)
EIA-485 Loop OUT

From: NIB-96 P4 terminals 6(+) and 4(-)
To: Next device on EIA-485 Loop.
Figure 6.4-1 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems

1-98 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01
Fire Alarm and Trouble Signal Transmission
The application provided in Figure 6.4-2 is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory
signals. All circuits are supervised and power limited. 18 AWG (0.75 mm²) is the minimum. There is a
maximum loop resistance of 40 ohms for the LIB-200, and 50 ohms for the LIB-200A and LIB-400. The
maximum distance between the Central Station/Receiving Unit and the MMXs is 10,000 feet (3048 meters)
at 12 AWG (3.25 mm²) for the LIB-200 and 12,500 feet (3841 meters) at 12 AWG (3.25 mm²) for the LIB-
200A and LIB-400. For initiating device connections, refer to Figures 4.6-2 through 4.6-6.
LIB-400 in NFPA 72 Proprietary and Central Station

Receiving Unit SLC Loop
Channel
(-)
(+)
ELR R-47K
CPU in NFPA 72 Protected
Premises Unit
P4 11
10
9
Normally Closed
Trouble Contacts*
Normally Open
Fire Alarm Contacts MMX-1
1 Programmed with the
software type ID
(contacts shown in their "MRTB"
normal state)
NOTE
The MMX-1 and MMX-101 are
interchangeable in this example.
* Trouble contacts will transfer during any supervisory,

security alarm or other trouble condition.
MMX-101
Programmed with the
software type ID
"MON"
Figure 6.4-2 NFPA 72 Proprietary and Central Station Protected Premises

Unit/Proprietary and Central Station Receiving Unit Interface

1-99
Section 6.5 Applying/Removing Power to the Fire Alarm System
After completing the proper installation of all boards, cables and components, apply power in the following
manner:
• Apply AC power
• Connect the battery/secondary power terminals (refer to Connecting the
Main Power Supply, Section 3.3 of this manual).
• Do not take any actions, especially do not activate the acknowledge button,
for at least one minute after power is applied.
• Do not connect any releasing devices until the releasing circuits have
been tested using simulated loads.
• Test system in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7.
When servicing the panel, perform the following steps before removing or connecting any power or supervisory
cables:
• Disconnect any releasing devices
• Remove all EIA-485 connections
• Remove battery/secondary power
• Remove AC power
• Wait 60 seconds
CAUTION!
• Never remove or install boards, internal cables or components
with power applied. Failure to follow the procedure outlined above
can result in irreparable damage to the system components. This
damage may adversely affect the operation of this control unit
but its effect may not be readily apparent.
• Both AC and battery power is required for proper operation.
Note
System will not function without power applied.
1-100 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

AM2020
AFP1010
CHAPTER TWO
OPERATION
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-1

Introduction
About the operation of the panel
Use of intelligent and addressable detectors and modules provide the operator with precise information on the
location of the alarm or trouble, as well as what type of device is reporting the activity.
WARNING
The AM2020/AFP1010 control panel will only operate with Notifier intelligent addressable devices installed.
All operating power, as well as data communications to and from intelligent and addressable devices, is
transmitted on a two-wire LIB Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) that may be wired to meet the requirements of either
NFPA Style 4 (Class B) or Style 6 or 7 (Class A)operation. The AM2020 system can be configured with up to 10
LIB SLC Loops and the AFP1010 system with up to 4 Loops, each of which is capable of supporting up to 99
intelligent detectors and up to 99 addressable control or monitor modules.
Note: The term "loop" is used in a general way throughout this document and does not necessarily mean that the
circuit is a Class A configuration, unless a reference is made to Style 6, Style 7, Style D, or Style Z circuit
performance.
A fire alarm in the AM2020/AFP1010 is initiated by activation of any of the following devices:
• Intelligent smoke or heat detectors (SDX-551/751, SDX-551-TH, CPX-551/751, FDX-551, or
IPX-751, etc.).
• Addressable Manual Pull Stations (BGX).
• Conventional normally-open or normally-closed contact fire alarm initiating devices connected to
addressable MMX Monitor Modules (or equivalent XPM or XP5-M circuits) along a LIB SLC.
During an alarm condition, LEDs on as few as six and as many as 99 addressable initiating devices (smoke
detectors, heat detectors, MMX modules etc.) and/or output modules may be latched on. A latched-on LED on
an initiating device indicates that the device has caused an activation signal to be transmitted to the AM2020/
AFP1010. A latched on LED on an output module indicates that the module has been activated. An activation
signal on the AM2020/AFP1010 includes fire alarms, security alarms, supervisory conditions, or non-alarm inputs.
NOTE
During loss of primary (AC) power, when the AM2020/AFP1010 is operating under secondary power, only LEDs
on intelligent detectors (including DHX-501/DHX-502 duct detectors) will be latched on during a fire alarm.
The AM2020/AFP1010 can be programmed to latch the LEDs on up to

99 addressable devices (MMX, CMX, etc.). This software feature can be
used only if ALL installed addressable devices are stamped with the code
R4 on the product marking label (purchased from Notifier after April 1,
1991.) Use of this feature under any other circumstances can cause the
LIB SLC Loops to shut down during a fire alarm condition. RA-400
Remote LEDs are not permitted for use with this feature (excluding those
wired to DHX-501/DHX-502 Duct Detectors). Use only the RA-400Z
Remote LED when extending the number of latched-on LEDs beyond six.
SDX-551 Photoelectric Detectors can also have an H code after their
model numbers.
NOTE
Detectors have priority over modules. Detectors that come into alarm will assume LED-latch priority
over previously-latched module LEDs.
Output devices (alarm notification appliances, output relays, etc.) are controlled by activation of CMX Control
Modules (or equivalent XPC or XPR circuits) connected along the LIB SLC. A control module may serve as a
Form-C output relay or as a Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC).
About this Chapter

This chapter covers the operation of the AM2020/AFP1010 Combination Fire/Security Protective Signaling
System and the control features available to the operator presented through the perspective of the Display
Interface Assembly (DIA-2020 or DIA-1010).
2-2 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01
PART
TE R M
Number
To the right are general terms and
their associated specific part numbers PRN PRN-4, PRN-5
as referenced in this manual: CRT CRT-2
MMX-1
MMX MMX-101
MMX-2
CMX CMX-1 or CMX-2
This chapter refers to CMX Control Modules and MMX Monitor Modules. If XP or XP5 Series Transponders
are used, unless otherwise stated, the following substitutions may be made:
• MMX Monitor Modules can be substituted with XPM or XP5-M circuits.
• CMX Control Modules configured as Form-C contacts (tabs broken), can be substituted with XPR
circuits or XP5-C circuits (in relay mode).
• CMX Control Modules not configured as Form-C contacts can be substituted with XPC circuits or
XP5-C circuits (in NAC/telephone mode).
NOTE
See warning regarding XP Transponder operation at the beginning of Chapter Three, Section Three. For
more information, refer to the XP Series Transponder System Manual.
About the passwords
The AM2020/AFP1010 functions in one of three levels—Operational Level, Level One, and Level Two. In
Operational mode, the operator may perform the following keypad or menu-displayed functions:
• Acknowledge alarms, troubles, and restorations (clears)
• View acknowledged alarms, troubles, and restorations
• Silence the sounding of fire alarm notification appliances
• Reset the AM2020/AFP1010 System
• Test all intelligent addressable detectors in the system
• Test the panel's LED indicators, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), terminal and printer
• Read the status of the entire AM2020/AFP1010 system, including the addressable devices
• Print out a report on the status of the system or access the history buffer
Access to keypad or menu levels one and two require entry of specific passwords. These levels allow an
authorized programmer to initialize or alter the programming of the AM2020/AFP1010. Level One and Level Two
entry requirements are defined as follows:
Alter Status Level One password required.
Programming Level Two password required.
If the main operator of the system requires access to a function which is password protected, contact the
distributor who installed the system for the required password(s). For more information on programming or altering
the status of the AM2020/AFP1010, refer to Chapter Three of this manual.
Whenever the operator selects a menu, the AM2020/AFP1010 begins a one-minute timer. If no key is pressed
during this minute, the function selected will be aborted and control will return to the state the panel was in prior to
selection of that menu.
NOTE
Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to being reprogrammed. Any new trouble or alarm
reports reviewed during programming may disrupt the programming process. Do not change the
program parameters of any addressable point that is in alarm or trouble.
About the software
Depending on the particular release of software in your system, some menu functions and system features may
not be operable. If you attempt to execute a function not operable, the panel will respond with the message
"FUNCTION NOT ENABLED."
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-3

About addresses
For certain functions such as READ STATUS, the operator must enter a device, software zone, or annunciator
point address. Leading zeroes are not required. The address assumes the following format:
LXX(D/M)YY, ZXXX or AXXPYY
SLC Loop Software Zone

Enter "L" followed by 1 to 10 for AM2020. Enter "Z" followed by 1 to 240.
Enter "L" followed by 1 to 4 for AFP1010.
Annunciator Point
SLC Loop Device Enter "A" followed by 1 to 32 for the an-
Enter "D" for an intelligent detector or "M" for an nunciator module address, then "P" fol-
addressable module followed by an address in lowed by the module point 1 to 64.
the range 1 to 99.
For example, L3M44 must be entered as the address for the 44th module on LIB SLC Loop 3.
About the Backspace Key

The backspace key serves two purposes:
BACK
1) At a menu prompt: SPACE
PRESS@1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,
6=MONON,7=CTLON :
the backspace key "aborts" the selection of that menu.
2) When entering data or making a selection from a menu:
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.
STATUS@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@:@L4D3
the backspace key erases the last character, or menu choice entered.
2-4 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

About entering alphanumerics
Most of the keys on the DIA keypad serve more than one function. For instance, the 3 key is used to enter the
digit 3 or the letter D when entering the address of a detector.
The AM2020/AFP1010 toggles which character is displayed on the LCD with each successive keypress of that
same key. This allows the operator to press a particular key until the desired character is displayed. That
character is entered into the display whenever the next, different, key is pressed. If two of the characters
contained on a particular key (for instance, the D and the 3) need to be entered in succession, the ALPHA ENTER
key must be used (see example that follows). After the full address has been entered into the display, press
ENTER to transfer the display contents to the system for processing.
Example: To enter L8D3,

K L
Press SIGNAL
SILENCE
and the letter K will be displayed.
K L
Press SIGNAL
SILENCE
again and the K will change to L.
O
Press 8 and the letter O is displayed to the right of the displayed letter L.
O
Press 8 again to change the letter O to the digit 8.
D
Press and the letter D will be displayed to the right of the displayed characters L8. The
3 partial address displayed now reads L8D.
Press ALPHA
ENTER
to enter the letter D into the display.
D
Press and a second letter D will be displayed to the right of the displayed characters L8D.
3 The partial address displayed now reads L8DD.
D
Press again to change the second D to the digit 3.
3 The completed address now reads L8D3.
Press ENTER to transfer the display contents to the AM2020/AFP1010 system for processing.
About Walk Test

The Walk Test function is a service feature that allows one-man testing of devices on any selected LIB. The
Walk Test feature will automatically abort after 15 minutes of inactivity if inadvertently left enabled by the service
representative.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-5

About the display time
The AM2020/AFP1010 has a separate time field in the display for each event that occurs in the system.
All Systems Normal: During periods of no activity, the time field reflects the current time. For AM2020/AFP1010
systems with NOTI•FIRE•NET™, the time is synchronized every hour by the network master clock (last
AM2020/AFP1010, INA, or NRT node on network to have its time changed).
Single, unacknowledged event: When an event has occurred but has not been acknowledged, and no other event
has occurred, the CRT terminal and the DIA display the time this event occurred.
Multiple, unacknowledged events: The display will show the actual time that the first unacknowledged event
occurred. After the first event is acknowledged, the time shown on the display does not represent the time at
which the event occurred, but instead indicates the time at which the event is displayed.
Single/multiple previously acknowledged events: The time shown for an acknowledged event is the time at which
that event was last placed in the display by activation of the ack/step key (not the time at which the event
occurred).
About the print time

Output from the printer, as well as to the panel's history file, for a particular event (alarm, trouble, acknowledgment,
etc.) includes the time the event was sent to the printer, which, in most cases, is identical to the time the event occurred.
In extreme cases, when many events have occurred within a few seconds, the time printed for a particular event may
differ from the actual event time by up to one minute. After events have been acknowledged, only the event history file
(if enabled) and the system printer will provide a record of the time at which events occurred.
About priorities
Every event the AM2020/AFP1010 displays is prioritized. This includes the processing of incoming alarm and
trouble events, acknowledging events, the clearing of events, and acknowledging the clearing of events (receiving
unit operation only). Security alarms will increment the trouble counter on the terminal status line of the CRT.
NOTE
Security alarms are processed like fire trouble conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010.
The AM2020/AFP1010 processes and displays events under the following priorities, highest priority first:
1) Fire Alarms 8) Cleared Fire Alarms

2) Security Alarms 9) Cleared Security Alarms
3) Supervisory Signals 10) Cleared Supervisory Signals
4) Device Troubles 11) Cleared Device Troubles
5) Disabled Zones 12) Cleared Disabled Zones
6) System Troubles 13) Cleared System Troubles
7) Annunciator Troubles 14) Cleared Annunciator Troubles
In addition, detectors have a higher priority than modules within each detector/module category; the lower the
address, the higher the priority (see list below). The display of certain events can be pre-empted by others at the
time they are acknowledged. Pay careful attention to the display when acknowledging events.
Node 1, Loop 1 Detector 1, Loop 1 Detector 2, Loop 1 Detector 3 … Loop 10 Detector 99

(followed in priority by)
Node 1, Loop 1 Module 1, Loop 1 Module 2, Loop 1 Module 3 … Loop 10 Module 99
Node 1, Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3… Zone 240
Node 1, System Trouble Indices (in Hex) T00, T01, T02… TFF
Node 1, Annunciator Trouble Indices (in Hex) N00, N01, N02… NFF
Note: Node numbers are applicable only if the panel is connected to NOTI•FIRE•NET™
2-6 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01
About System Test
System Test, or "Detector Test" as it is often referred to, is a manually initiated test of all intelligent detectors
installed in the system. When the user presses the system test key the fire panel performs a chamber test of
each intelligent detector to ensure its proper operation. System test can take up to one minute before
displaying its results. There are two types of display:
DETECTOR TEST:ALL OK 01+05+00+02+00+80

+25+00+06+00 TOT=119 05:00P 05/22/00
Each LIB displays the total number of intelligent devices installed on it, as well as the overall system total.
DETECTOR TEST FAIL: 110,119,211,213,605,

617,799,815,015,020+ 05:30 05/22/00
Each failed device is represented by a three digit number. The first digit indicates the LIB number (0=10), and
the last two the device address. If more than ten devices have failed a "+" is shown after the last detector
number. If more than ten detectors failed, the serviceman would have to repair, replace or disable the ten
listed, and then rerun System Test in order to locate the remaining ones.
About Periodic Test

The fire panel performs a periodic automatic chamber test of all intelligent detectors installed in the system to
ensure their proper operation. When a detector has failed its automatic chamber test, it will generate a trouble
message as in Section 5.1 with "DET FAILED TEST" in the type of trouble field. The service man would then
have to repair or replace the indicated device.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-7

Section One
The Display Interface Assembly
Section 1.1 Normal Operation
During normal fire alarm operation when no alarms or troubles exist, the system will display the following:
Custom 40-Character User Label
NOTIFIER A PITTWAY COMPANY

ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL 04:32P 03/01/00
Current Time and Date

Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
The operator can perform the functions associated with the following keys without having to enter a password:
A
READ ACK
STATUS STEP
SIGNAL
SILENCE
(a description of the READ STATUS
and the SPL FUNCT keys follows)
SYSTEM
RESET
S
( SYSTEM
SPL TEST
FUNCT
LAMP
TEST
2-8 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

AC POWER - A green LED will illuminate to indicate that the system is
PIEZO SOUNDER - The local panel piezo sounder operating from the primary power supply.
provides an audible indication of the system alarm or FIRE ALARM - A red LED will flash to indicate that the panel has detected
trouble conditions. The sounder will pulse to indicate at least one fire alarm in the system. The red LED will light steadily when
the detection of at least one fire alarm condition in the all fire alarms have been acknowledged. The panel display will provide
system, and will sound steadily when the system is in detailed information on any alarms received.
trouble. The sounder is silenced when all conditions TROUBLE/SECURITY ALARM - A yellow LED will flash to indicate any
have been acknowledged. If the sounder sounds unacknowledged change of status in the system. The panel display will
steadily, and it cannot be silenced by the acknowl- provide detailed information about each change of status signal received.
edgment of all system alarm/trouble conditions, CALL After all change of status conditions have been acknowledged, and while at
YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY. least one trouble condition still exists, the Trouble/Security Alarm LED will
illuminate steadily. Note: Security alarms are treated as fire trouble condi-
80 CHARACTER LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY - The tions in this combination fire alarm/security system.
LCD displays the current status of the entire AM2020/ DISPLAY TROUBLE - A yellow LED will illuminate when a trouble condition
AFP1010 system. While programming the AM2020/ is detected in the display assembly. If this LED is illuminated the contents of
AFP1010, the LCD provides various system configu- the display must be considered invalid. Call your service representative
ration menus and prompts. This display also is illumi- immediately.
nated when the AM2020/AFP1010 is under AC power. SIGNAL SILENCE - A yellow LED will illuminate steadily when all the control
The display will remain illuminated for one minute af- modules in the system which can be silenced have been silenced. A flash-
ter the loss of AC power; any keypad or system activ- ing yellow LED indicates a partial signal silence condition (some of the con-
ity will re-illuminate the display for one minute. trol modules that can be silenced have been silenced.)
ACK STEP - This key is used to acknowledge system alarm or

trouble conditions. When depressed, the operator acknowledges
the new status of the device indicated on the display. Depression AUTO STEP - During READ STATUS, this function key auto-
of this key will also step the display to the next device in alarm or matically scrolls the display through a list of system conditions
trouble. After all such system alarm and trouble conditions have such as devices that are in alarm or trouble.
been acaknowledged, the ACK STEP key may be used to step the
PRIOR, NEXT - During READ STATUS, these keys allow the
display through the existing system alarm and trouble conditions.
user to step forward or backward through a list of system con-
SIGNAL SILENCE - This key, during a fire alarm condition, will
ditions such as devices that are in alarm or trouble.
deactivate all activated control modules that have been pro-
grammed to permit signal silencing. READ STATUS - Allows the status of the entire system to be
read, including the status of the Loop Interface Boards, the ad-
SYSTEM RESET - This key is used to clear all system alarm and
dressable detectors, and the control and monitor modules.
trouble conditions. If an alarm or trouble condition still exists after
System Reset, that alarm/trouble condition will resound. Note: The ALTER STATUS - Provides access to "Level One" functions, such
function of this key is inhibited until all alarms and troubles have as setting the FACP clock.
been acknowledged. PROG - This "Level Two" function key provides access to Pro-
SYSTEM TEST - The System Test button is not functional. System gramming Mode, for configuring the AM2020/AFP1010.
testing is automatic. SPL FUNCT - This key generates system and installed point
LAMP TEST - this key is used to perform a test of LEDs on the reports.
control panel and to test the panel display. The test will illuminate the ALPHA ENTER - During Programming Mode, pressing ALPHA
panel LEDs in sequence for a timed period and flash the panel display. ENTER stores the character displayed and permits the alternate
When the test has been completed, the panel LEDs and the panel character on that key to be entered next (see page 2-5).
display will return to their prior status.
BACK SPACE - Erases the last alphanumeric keypress, or serves
as an "escape" key during programming.
NOTE - These keys and their functions are duplicated on the alpha- ENTER - Menu selections are entered and programming data is
numeric keypad of the DIA. stored in AM2020/AFP1010 memory upon pressing this key.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-9

Section 1.2 Read Status
The Read Status feature of the AM2020/AFP1010 allows the operator to display the status of the entire
system. To execute READ STATUS:
A
Press READ
STATUS
The display will show:
PRESS@1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,
6=MONON,7=CTLON @@@ :
Enter 1 for Display System Configuration. This selection provides information on any of the system
parameters programmed into the AM2020/AFP1010 - the number and style of the Loop Interface Boards, the
AVPS-24s and APS-6Rs, the Software Zone Boundary, the system time delays, annunciator modules installed,
etc.
Enter 2 for Point Read. This selection provides information on the status of any intelligent detector,
addressable module, software-defined zone or annunciator point in the system.
Enter 3 for Alarm. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone in a fire alarm
state.
Enter 4 for Trouble. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone in trouble.
Enter 5 for Disable. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed device or zone disabled.
Enter 6 for Monitor On. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed non-fire or security
monitor module activated.
Enter 7 for Control On. This selection provides information on the lowest addressed control module
activated.
NOTES
Read Status options 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 use the same format as the Point Read option to display their
indicated point information.
For Read Status options 3,4,5,6, and 7, use the ACK/STEP key to view any other devices in the
alarm, trouble, disabled, or active state. See Prior/Next/Autostep in Section Two.
For an AM2020/AFP1010 FACP on the NOTI•FIRE•NET system, programming and read status
operations should always be performed from a Network Reporting Terminal (NRT).
Never attempt to perform programming or read status operations from a local panel when the NRT is
simultaneously attempting to do so.
2-10 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

READ STATUS
Display System Configuration Menu Option 1
Selecting 1 from the Read Status Menu allows the operator to review the various system parameters entered
into the AM2020/AFP1010. The System Configuration Menu:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,
6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM, 0=CONT :
Note that when 4 is chosen from the menu, the total number of AVPS and/or APS-6R power supplies will be
displayed.
Enter Menu Choice: Status Displayed:
THESE@LIB@BOARDS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@
1 1=Y,2=Y,3=Y,4=Y,5=N,6=N,7=N,8=N,9=N,10=N
Y=installed N=not installed
2 THE@SLC@LOOP@STYLES@ARE@AS@FOLLOWS:
1=6,2=6,3=6,4=6,5=4,6=4,7=4,8=4,9=4,10=4
The default value for SLC Loops not installed is NFPA

Style 4
3 VER=60,SIL=045,CUT=0000
VER = Alarm Verification Time (in seconds)

SIL = Signal-Silence Inhibit Time (in seconds)
CUT = Signal Cut-out Time (in seconds)
THERE@ARE@CURRENTLY@04@AVPS-24@INSTALLED
4 @IN@THE@SYSTEM
NOTE: The number "04" in the above display represents the total number
of AVPS and/or APS-6R power supplies installed in the system.
ZONES 001 - 200 ARE FORWARD ACTIVATED

5 ZONES 201 - 240 ARE REVERSE ACTIVATED
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-11

Enter Menu Choice: Status Displayed:
TS=N@@@@@@@SL=N@@@@@@@APM=N,CMR=N,NAR=N,
6 LEDL=N,PEC=N,BC=N,PTI=N RPT=N
TS = Is the connection to the terminal supervised? (If TS=N, the terminal will not audibly
indicate state changes [i.e., no Bell characters will be sent]).
SL = Is the Status Line option enabled?
APM = Is the connection to the auxiliary printer monitored?
CMR = Is control module state reporting enabled?
NAR = Is "NONA"/"NOA" monitor module state reporting enabled?
LEDL = LED latches on more activated addressable devices?
PEC = Continue to transmit under printer error conditions?
BC = Is bidirectional copy enabled?
PTI = Is the primary printer trouble inhibited?
RPT = Are printer reports directed to terminal output?
DPZ=N,LMD=45,LMM=20,LMC=90,72ABCD,71,RC,
7 BTYP=N,BCAP=12,BSBY=24,ERM=N,BLN=N,PAL=N
DPZ = Is the piezo disabled during programming?

LMD = Local Mode detector address.
LMM = Local Mode monitor module address.
LMC = Local Mode control module address.
72A = Protected premises fire alarm system.
72B = Auxiliary fire alarm service.
72C = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7)
72D = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7)
71 = Do not use (see Chapter 2, section 1.1.7)
RC = Proprietary supervising station or central station receiving unit.
BTYP = Type of battery installed in the system.
BCAP = Ni-cad battery capacity.
BSBY = Ni-cad battery standby time.
ERM = Is event reminder enabled?
BLN = Is device blinking enabled?
PAL = Is pre-alarm option enabled?
8 PRESS 1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT
:
Option 8 provides you with a Read Status sub-menu for viewing the status of the
intelligent SIB, installed annunciators, external interface, or DACT. This menu is
described on the next page.
HIZNDET=Z150,LOZNDET=Z001,DVTCNTR=15
9 SER=Y,DFT=Y,PGR=Y,MDM=Y,NAM=N,RP=Y,SUP=Y
HIZNDET = High zone for day/night detector sensitivity.

LOZNDET = Low zone for day/night detector sensitivity.
DVTCNTR = Detector verification trouble counter limit.
SER = Is "SACM"/"SEQM" monitor module state reporting enabled?
DFT = Is drift compensation enabled?
PGR = Is PAGE-1 enabled?
MDM = Is modem enabled?
NAM = Is the NAM-232 enabled?
RP = Is rapid polling enabled?
SUP = Is supervisory ACS reporting enabled?
0 PRESS 1=IDO
Option 0 provides you with a Read Status Sub-menu for viewing the status of the
International Display Option. Pressing 1 will display IDO=0 for normal display. ID)=Y
will be shown when IDO is enabled for countries requiring it (China).
2-12 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Menu Choice 8:
Enter Option Choice: Status Displayed:
1 ISIB=Y
ISIB = Is the Intelligent Serial Interface Board installed?
NOTE
ISIBs available for the AM2020/AFP1010 system include the SIB-2048A and
SIB-NET. For an AM2020/AFP1010 connected to a NOTI•FIRE•NET™
system however, the only ISIB that can be used is the SIB-NET. If a SIB-NET
is not installed, NOTI•FIRE•NET™ specific functions can not be pro-
grammed or read under Read Status (see Chapter One).
2 THESE ANNUNCIATORS ARE INSTALLED:

(PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE UNTIL DONE)
Due to its size, the Annunciator Read Status display is separated into two
screens, illustrated below. Pressing <ENTER> invokes the next display.
1=Y, 2=N, 3=N, 4=N, 5=Y, 6=Y, 7=N, 8=N,

9=Y,10=N,11=N,12=Y,13=Y,14=Y,15=N,16=N,
17=Y,18=Y,19=Y,20=N,21=N,22=N,23=N,24=N,
25=N,26=N,27=N,28=N,29=N,30=N,31=N,32=N
UPDN=N,ADDR=010,DBID=BC00D148
3 MIBA=H,MIBB=H,PORTS=2 ASRD=N ASRE=N
UPDN = Is the ACS Port upload/download enabled?

* ADDR = FACP NOTI•FIRE•NET™ address.
* DBID = Database identifier.
* MIBA = MIB-W/WF threshold for Channel A. (On the MIB-WF, only
the Channel A threshold setting is used.)
* MIBB = MIB-W threshold for Channel B.
* PORTS = Number of data ports monitored.
* ASRD=ACK/SIL/RES disabled at panel.
* ASRE=ACK/SIL/RES re-enabled on LAN Fail
* These items are NOTI•FIRE•NET™ specific functions and
are only displayed when a SIB-NET is installed.
4 DACT=01
DACT = Base address of the UDACT (blank for none installed).
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-13

READ STATUS
Point Read Menu Option 2
Selecting 2 from the Read Status Menu allows the operator to review the various detector, module, software
zone or annunciator point parameters entered into the system. The system prompts the operator for the
address of the point to be read:
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.
@STATUS (BCKSPC TO ABORT) @@@@:
Upon entering the address, the system will display a distinct screen format, depending on the particular type
of device being read, as illustrated below:
NOTE
After a one-minute timeout, the Control-By-Event (CBE) and the annunciator point mapped address
is displayed for devices and zones. Cooperative Control-By-Event (CCBE) is displayed for reverse
zones and are only used as part of the NOTI•FIRE•NET™ operation. To display this information
immediately, press ENTER after the status line appears.
Detectors
Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL. Software Type I.D.20-Character Custom Label
NORMAL@SMOKE(ION)@@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@SMOKE
@D@@@A@T@K@@@@@@@SH@V000@H@034@@@@@L02D26
Device
Disabled
Device in Tracking Verification Percentage of Address
Alarm Selected Counter Alarm Threshold
Device in Sensitivity Selection:

Trouble Low, Medium, High.
Day/Night Detector Sensitivity Setting:

Low, Medium, High.
Detector Verification
If verification is enabled for this point, the V indicator appears and the 3-digit counter shows the number of times
the verification timer was activated for the point without going into alarm. The counter returns to zero when power
is cycled to the AM2020/AFP1010 or by following the procedure in the Resetting Sensor Verification Counters
section of this document. If you disable verification, the counter will retain its last value. If verification is not
enabled for this point, the V indicator does not appear; however, the 3-digit number still appears. Note that the
counter does not increment unless verification is enabled.
NOTE
A detector may be in periodic test during a read status. In this case, the detector status will be
normal but the percentage of alarm threshold will be greater than 100%. If this happens, wait one
minute, then perform another read status.
2-14 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01
Control Modules
Status: DISABL, ON, TROUBL, OFF, *OFHOOK, NORMAL. Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
DISABL@CONTROL@@@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@BELL
@D@CF@A@T@@@W @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@S@@L01M36
Device
Disabled Device Device in Walk Test Address
Activated Trouble Selected
Control Module Signal Silence Enabled
CO = On
CF = Off
*An OFHOOK status indicates that a telephone off-hook (ring-in) signal has been received,
but has not been answered by the operator at the fire fighter telephone ACS switchboard.
Monitor Modules
Fire Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL.

Non-fire and Security Status: DISABL, ON, TROUBL, OFF.
Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
NORMAL@MONITOR@@@@@@BASEMENT@SMOKES
@D@MO@A@T@K@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@L05M12
Device
Disabled
Device in Alarm Device in Tracking Address
(Active in a non- Trouble Selected
fire mode)
Monitor Module On
(Non-fire and security
types only)
Software Zones
Status: DISABL, ALARM:, TROUBL, NORMAL. Software Type ID 20-Character Custom Label
ALARM:@FORWARD@ZONE@@ATTIC@DEVICE@ZONE
@D@@@@A@T@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z023
Zone
Disabled Zone in Alarm Zone in Trouble Address
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-15

Annunciator Points
Status: ON, TROUBL, OFF, REQEST*, or blank. 20-Character Custom Label
OFF@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@@ANNUNCIATOR@ONE
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P23
Software Type ID Address
*A REQEST status indicates that a telephone off-hook (ring-in) signal has been received and
answered by the operator at the fire fighter telephone ACS switchboard, but has not been
connected to the telephone line.
Read Status Menu
Special Status Options 3 - 7
Option 3 provides information on devices or zones in a fire alarm state. Option 4 provides information on
devices or zones in a trouble state. Option 5 provides information on disabled devices or zones. Option 6
provides information on activated non-fire or security monitor modules. Option 7 provides information on
activated control modules. Selecting 3, 4, or 5 from the Read Status Menu prompts the operator to choose
between zones and devices. The following example performs a search for the lowest device in a fire alarm
state.
PRESS 1=SYS,2=PTREAD,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,
6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3
DO@YOU@WANT@ZONE@OR@DEVICE@STATUS?
(Y=ZONE,N=DEVICE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT))@@:@N
ALARM:@SMOKE(ION)@@@COMPUTER@ROOM@SMOKE
@@@@@@A@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@M@034@@@@@L02D26
NOTE
The control-by-event and the annunciator point mapped address is displayed for devices and zones
after a one minute timeout. In a NOTI•FIRE•NET system, cooperative control-by-event equa-
tions are displayed for reverse zones. To display this information immediately, press ENTER
after the status line appears.
2-16 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Section Two
Prior/Next/Auto Step
The Prior, Next, and Autostep keys are used in conjunction with options 2 through 7 of the Read Status Menu.
Upon selection of one of these options an address range is defined by the AM2020/AFP1010 for which similar
searches can be performed using the Prior, Next and Autostep Keys. These functions enhance and speed up
the search process, because they eliminate having to re-enter the Read Status Menu for the same function
being repeated.
PRIOR - Searches the database in a reverse direction from the current address (refer to note).
NEXT - Searches the database in a forward direction from the current address (refer to note).
AUTOSTEP - Performs an automatic search of the database in the forward direction from the current address
with a two second display of status line, followed by a two second display of the CBE and annunciator point
mapped address, for each of the points found. (The CCBE equation is displayed for reverse zones on the
NOTI•FIRE•NET system.)
NOTE
The control-by-event and the annunciator point mapped address is displayed for devices and zones
after a one minute timeout. The cooperative control-by-event is displayed for reverse zones. To
display this information immediately, press ENTER after the status line appears.
Starting PRIOR NEXT / AUTOSTEP Ending

Search < Current Address > Search
Address Address
The Autostep key can be used as an alternate method for generating special reports.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-17

Section Three
Special Function
The Special Function feature of the AM2020/AFP1010 allows the operator to generate AM2020/AFP1010
status reports or view the AM2020/AFP1010 History File.
S
Press SPL The display will show:
FUNCT
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
SPL FUNCT
Reports Menu Option 1
PRESS@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,
6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Enter 1 for a System Configuration report, 2 for an Installed Point report, 3 for a Fire Alarm report, 4 for a
Trouble report, 5 for a Disable report, 6 for a Monitor Module On report (including non-fire and security
monitor modules), or 7 for a Control Module On report.
The display will show:
PRESS 1=REQUEST,2=ABORT
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Enter 1 to execute the report or 2 to abort a report already in progress.
NOTE
Only one report can be conducted at any one time. The reports are not displayed on the DIA.
Reports are either displayed on the CRT and/or printed by the printer depending on whether or not
printer reports are redirected to the CRT during programming. An example of a report
printout is illustrated in Figure 3-1.
2-18 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01
The special function report printouts (refer to Figure 3-1) assume the same display format as the Point Read
option under Read Status. For a description of the various report fields, refer to Point Read.
Note: APS-6Rs will be counted as AVPSs in the Special Function Report Printout.
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
press@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
PRESS 1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
**@SYSTEM@CONFIGURATION@REPORT@BEGIN@**@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
THESE@LIB@BOARDS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@@@@@@@@1=Y,2=N,3=N,4=N,5=N,6=N,7=N,8=N,9=N,10=N
THE@SLC@LOOP@STYLES@ARE@AS@FOLLOWS:@@@@@1=4,2=4,3=4,4=4,5=4,6=4,7=4,8=4,9=4,10=4
VER=05,SIL=005,CUT=0504
THERE@ARE@CURRENTLY@00@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM
ZONES@001@-@200@ARE@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@@@ZONES@201@-@240@ARE@REVERSE@ACTIVATED
TS=N@@@@@@SL=Y@@@@@@@@APM=Y,CMR=Y,NAR=Y,@LEDL=N,PEC=N,BC=N,PTI=N@@@@@@@@@@ RPT=N
DPZ=N,LMD=20,LMM=20,LMC=20,72ABCD,71,RC,BTYP=N,BCAP=12,BSBY=48,ERM=Y,BLN=Y,PAL=N
ISIB=Y
THESE@ANNUNCIATORS@ARE@INSTALLED:@@@@@@@(PRESS@ENTER@TO@CONTINUE@UNTIL@DONE)
@1=N,@2=N,@3=N,@4=N,@5=N,@6=N,@7=N,@8=N,@9=N,10=N,11=N,12=N,13=N,14=N,15=N,16=N,
17=N,18=N,19=N,20=N,21=N,22=N,23=N,24=N,25=N,26=N,27=N,28=N,29=N,30=N,31=N,32=N
UPDN=N,ADDR=010,DBID=BC00d148, @@@@MIBA=H,MIBB=H,PORTS=2,ASRD=N,ASRE=N
DACT=01
HIZNDET=Z150,LOZNDET=Z001,DVTCNTR=15 SER=Y,DFT=Y,PGR=Y,MDM=Y,NAM=N,RP=N,SUP=Y
***@SYSTEM@CONFIGURATION@REPORT@END@***@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
PRESS@1=SYS,2=POINT,3=ALM,4=TBL,5=DIS,6=MONON,7=CTLON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
*****@INSTALLED@POINT@REPORT@BEGIN@*****@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
ALARM:@FORWARD@ZONE@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z001
()@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P01
DISABL@REVERSE@ZONE@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@D@@@@@T@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@Z202
OR()@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P02
OR()
ALARM:@SMOKE@(ION)@@OFFICE@ARea@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A@@@@@@@SH@@V010@H@045@@@@@@L01D01
(Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03
TROUBL@SMOKE(PHOT0)@FACTORY@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@T@@@@@@@@@@V000@H@045@@@@@@L01D02
(Z202)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03
NORMAL@HEAT(ANALOG)@MAINTENANCE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@V000@H@045@@@@@@L01D03
(Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03
NORMAL@MONITOR@@@@@@FIRST@AID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@K@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@L01m01
(Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P04
ON@@@@@CONTROL@@@@@@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@CO@@@@@W@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@s@L01M02
OR(Z01)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P05
OFF@@@@CONTROL@@@@@@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@CF@@@@@W@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@S@L01M03
OR(Z202)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P06
ON@@@@@ANn@ZONE@@@@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P01
DISABL@ANN@ZONE@@@@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P02
ON@@@@@ANN@DETECTOR@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P03
OFF@@@@ANN@MONITOR@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P04
ON@@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P05
OFF@@@@ANN@CONTROL@@BUILDING@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@A01P06
******@INSTALLED@POINT@REPORT@END@******@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Figure 3-1 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function Report Printout
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-19

READ STATUS
The History File Menu Option 2
PRESS@1=PRINT,2=DISPLAY,3=STEP,4=RANGE/
STATUS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
Choices 1, 2, and 3 will prompt the user for the beginning and end of the History File range.
The maximum number of events that the system can save in the History File is 400.
Enter "1" to produce a printed report of the History File. An example of a History File
printout is illustrated in Figure 3-2.
Enter "2" to perform an automatic display of the History File on the DIA and CRT terminal
(if employed).
Enter "3" to perform a manual display of the History File on the DIA and CRT. Use the
ENTER key (on DIA) or RETURN key (on CRT) to advance the display.
Enter "4" to display the History File range (the number of entries contained in the file), and
current status (active/inactive).
2-20 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

To differentiate between history file printouts (refer to Figure 3-2) and system printouts (refer to Figure 3-1), the
colon (:) in the time field has been replaced by the semicolon (;).
PRESS@1=RPTS,2=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
PRESS@1=PRINT,2=DISPLAY,3=STEP,4=RANGE/STATUS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@FIRST@EVENT@(1@-@008)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@LAST@EVENT@(001@-@008)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@8
*********@HISTORY@REPORT@BEGIN@*********@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
ALARM:@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101
ACK@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101
@@@SIGNAL@SILENCE@@@@@@@@REQUESTED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;23P@03/01/00
@@@SYSTEM@RESET@@@@@@@@@@ACTIVATED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00
CLR@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101
ACL@AL@SMOKE@(ION)@DETECTOR@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04;32P@03/01/00@101
NOTIFIER@TEST@SYSTEM@ONE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@@04;32P@03/01/00
DETECTOR@TEST:ALL@OK@@@02+00+00+00+00+00+00+00+00+00@TOT=002@04;32P@03/01/00
**********@HISTORY@REPORT@END@**********@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Figure 3-2 AM2020/AFP1010 Special Function History File Printout
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-21

Section Four
Fire Alarms
The following example illustrates the system format used to display fire alarm conditions:
Device Type (relates to
Software Type ID)
Detectors: Modules:
FIXED PHOT D MON NORM CLD
FIXED THER D MON PULL STA
HEAT(ANALOG) MONITOR
ION DUCT DET PULL STATION
SMOKE (ION) SMOKE (CONV)
SMOKE ION HP WATER FLOW
SMOKE ION LP Custom Device Label
SMOKE(COMBO) that was entered during
Device Status SMOKE(PHOTO) programming.
ALARM:@SMOKE(PHOTO)@@@COMPUTER@ROOM
FOURTEENTH@FLOOR@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00@124
Device Address
Software Zone Label in the range 01-99.
of the first software zone Time and Date
that the device was mapped Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
to during programming.
SLC Loop Number
in the range 1-9,
with 0= SLC 10.
NOTE
The piezo sounder will pulse for fire alarm conditions.
2-22 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Section 4.1 Acknowledging a Fire Alarm
To acknowledge a fire alarm condition at the panel:
ACK and the ALARM: device status will change to

Push
STEP ACK AL (Acknowledged Fire Alarm).
When the fire alarm condition clears (either automatically in the case of devices programmed for Tracking, or
by depression of the SYSTEM RESET key), the panel will display CLR AL and the piezo will resound. To
acknowledge the clearing of a fire alarm:
ACK and the CLR AL status will change to

Push
STEP ACL AL (Acknowledged Clear Fire Alarm).
When multiple events have occurred, the system will display the first event that occurred (with the exception
that the first fire alarm will always override any previous trouble). When the ACK STEP key is pushed, the
operator will have acknowledged the highest priority event, not necessarily the event that is being displayed
on the CRT Monitor and DIA. The acknowledged message for the first prioritized event will be displayed for
several seconds, followed by display of the next priority unacknowledged event.
NOTES
• The piezo sounder will be silenced only after all events have been acknowledged.
• Security alarms are treated like fire trouble conditions in the AM2020/AFP1010.
• Reset the system using the System Reset Key after all alarms have been investi-
gated and subsequently cleared.
• Alarm signals from devices not selected for tracking need a system reset in order
to clear.
For an AM2020/AFP1010 panel on the NOTI•FIRE•NET system, acknowledgment of any event may be
accomplished from the local fire alarm panel, intelligent network annunciator (INA), or network reporting
terminal (NRT). Acknowledging alarms and events from any of these locations automatically provides
acknowledgment at all locations. Fire alarm signals are acknowledged individually at the local fire alarm
panel, NRT, or INA. If the same event on the same point occurs on multiple nodes, the event on the node with
the lowest node address has the highest priority. For more information on priorities and acknowledging events
on the NOTI•FIRE•NET system, refer to the INA Manual, Document 15092, or the NRT Manual, Document
15090.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-23

Section Five
Troubles
Section 5.1 Trouble ................. with SLC Loop Devices
The following example illustrates the format used to display device trouble conditions:
Device Type (relates to Software Type ID):
Detectors: Modules:
FIXED PHOT D ACCESS MONTR GN ALARM FORC PULL STATION
FIXED THER D ALARMS PEND GN SUPR FORC SMOKE (CONV)
HEAT(ANALOG) AREA MONITOR GN TRBL FORC SPEAKER
ION DUCT DET CMX CONTROL GN WAT FORC SPRNKLR MNTR
SMOKE (ION) CMX FORM C GN WATER FLW SPRVSRY MNTR
SMOKE ION HP CONTROL MON NORM CLD SYSTEM MONTR
SMOKE ION LP DACT CONNECT MON PULL STA TELEPHONE
SMOKE(COMBO) EQUIP MONITR MONITOR TRBL MONITOR
SMOKE(PHOTO) FORMC MANUAL MONITOR PAGE TRBLS PEND
FORM C RELAY NON ALARM TROUBLE
GENERAL PEND NON ALM MON TROUBLE FORC
GN ALARM PAGE WATER FLOW
Device Status GN ALARM EVC POWER (CONV)
Custom Device Label
that was entered during
programming.
TROUBL@SMOKE(PHOTO)@@COMPUTER@ROOM
Z087@MAINTENANCE@REQ@@04:32P@03/01/00@124
Device Address
Software Zone in the range 01-99.
The first zone that the Time and Date
device was mapped to Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
during programming.
SLC Loop Number
Type of Trouble: in the range 1-9,
with 0=Loop 10.
For Detectors: For Modules:
DET FAILED TEST DEVICE DISABLED SECURITY NO COM
DEVICE DISABLED INVALID REPLY SECURITY TAMPER
DRIFT TOLERANCE OPEN CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT
INVALID REPLY POINT TROUBLE SPRNKLR TROUBLE
LOW CHAMBER VAL SECURITY ALARM SUPRVSRY SIGNAL
MAINTENANCE REQ SECURITY ALERT
PRE-ALARM ALERT
VER COUNT OVFLW
NOTE
The piezo sounder will sound steadily for unacknowledged trouble conditions.
2-24 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Section 5.2 Trouble .................. with Disabled Zones
The following example illustrates the format used to display disabled zone trouble conditions:
Device Type: Custom Zone Label

Device Status FORWARD ZONE that was entered during
REVERSE ZONE programming.
TROUBL@FORWARD@ZONE@@@FIRST@FLOOR
@@@@@ZONE@DISABLED@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00 Z001
Time and Date

Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year
Type of Trouble
(Fixed)
Zone Address
in the range
Z001-Z240.
NOTE
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-25

Section 5.3 Trouble ...........................with the AM2020/AFP1010 System
The following example illustrates the format used to display system trouble conditions. For an explanation
of some trouble messages, refer to Section Seven.
Device Status Specific Trouble Message
TROUBL@CATASTROPHIC@LOOP@INTERFACE@BOARD
@2@COMMUNICATION@FLT@04:32P@03/01/00@T19
Time and Date Trouble Index

Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year Provide this index to your
Notifier Representative for
troubleshooting.
Section 5.4 Trouble ..............................with the Annunciators
The following example illustrates the format used to display trouble conditions with the Annunciator Control
System modules. For an explanation of some trouble messages, refer to Section Seven.
Device Status Annunciator Module Specific Trouble Message
TROUBL@ANNUNCIATOR@01@INSTALLATION@ERROR
MAIN@LOBBY@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00@N00
Time and Date Trouble Index

Hour:Minute Month/Day/Year Provide this index to your
Custom Annunciator Label
User defined during programming. Notifier Representative for
troubleshooting.
NOTE
2-26 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Section 5.5 Block Acknowledge
The function of block acknowledge gives the user the ability to acknowledge multiple trouble conditions with a
single depression of the ACK STEP key. The AM2020/AFP1010 block acknowledge function is normally
enabled. With block acknowledge enabled, the AM2020/AFP1010 will function as follows:
• Fire Alarm conditions including clears (tracking devices only) must be acknowledged individually as
described on the preceding pages. Fire Alarm conditions restored by depression of the system reset
key do not require acknowledgment.
• All current unacknowledged conditions must be processed by the system before block acknowledge
is executed (events will be acknowledged individually until then).
• No acknowledged event messages are recorded for individual troubles once the block acknowledge
message has been displayed.
• Trouble clears will be recorded for individual troubles that have not been initiated by a system reset.
• Trouble clears no longer have to be acknowledged.
• Troubles may come and go without being acknowledged.
• Upon completion of block acknowledge the AM2020/AFP1010 will enter its display acknowledged
events mode of operation (see displaying current alarms and troubles section).
To disable the block acknowledge function, refer to the local parameters NFPA programming section in
Chapter Three of this manual. If the AM2020/AFP1010 block acknowledge function is disabled, the AM2020/
AFP1010 will process alarm and trouble conditions in Receiving Unit Mode as described on the preceding and
following pages respectively. See caution note below for restrictions.
ACK
Push to execute block acknowledge. The following
STEP message will appear:
**********@BLOCK@ACKNOWLEDGE@***********
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
CAUTION
For an AM2020/AFP1010 connected to a NOTI•FIRE•NET system which also includes an NRT or an
AFP-200 panel, receiving mode is not supported and block acknowledge should be enabled. Enabling
receiving mode in this situation will prevent the panel from functioning properly and alarms will not be
acknowledged. A NOTI•FIRE•NET system is not listed for proprietary receiving unit operation.
If no NRT or AFP-200 is present on the network, the AM2020/AFP1010 may be configured for
receiving mode or block acknowledge, provided that all other nodes (INAs, AM2020/AFP1010s) on
the system are configured in the same manner.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-27

Section 5.5A Acknowledging Troubles in Receiving Unit Mode
(Block Acknowledge Disabled)
The receiving unit mode of operation is required for all NFPA proprietary supervising station and central station
receiving units.
To acknowledge a device, zone, system or annunciator module trouble condition:
Push ACK and the TROUBL status will change to

STEP ACK TB (Acknowledged Trouble).
When the trouble condition clears, the panel will display CLR TB and the piezo will sound again. To
acknowledge the clearing of a trouble condition:
Push ACK and the CLR TB status will change to

STEP ACL TB (Acknowledged Clear Trouble).
When multiple events have occurred, the AM2020/AFP1010 will display the first event that occurred (with the
exception that the first fire alarm will always override any previous trouble). When the ACK STEP key is
pushed, the operator will have acknowledged the highest priority event, not necessarily the event that is being
displayed on the CRT Monitor and DIA. The acknowledged message for the first prioritized event will be
displayed for several seconds, followed by display of the next priority unacknowledged event.
NOTE
The piezo sounder will be silenced only after all events have been acknowledged.
Section 5.6 Displaying Current Alarms and Troubles

To display alarms and troubles that have been acknowledged but not cleared:
ACK
Push and the next event in AM2020/AFP1010
STEP memory will be displayed on the LCD. All
events in memory can be reviewed by repeated
depression of the ACK STEP key.
2-28 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

Section Six
Remote Peripherals
The AM2020/AFP1010 will support the installation of optional remote Video Display Terminals and printers.
The CRT Terminal

The CRT displays all system information. The CRT can also display system reports if printer reports are
redirected to the CRT during programming. The CRT is provided with a keyboard that can be used to program
the AM2020/AFP1010.
Local Applications
Since the system function/control keys (acknowledge, signal silence, and reset) on the CRT keyboard
are not key lock or password protected against unauthorized use, in order to comply with the UL listing
and the NFPA standards, the keyboard may not be connected to the CRT, with the following excep-
tions:
• during programming and maintenance of the system
• if the system is operated in compliance with the NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling System
configuration and the AM2020/AFP1010 panel is the Primary Supervising Station
• if the modem selection is enabled in System Programming
Refer to the TPI-232 Manual for additional CRT-2 options.
Receiving Unit Applications

If employed under NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System (Receiving Unit) applications, the keyboard
cannot be removed or locked up. The keyboard must remain connected and operationally functional in
the system.
The Printer
The printer can be used to provide a permanent record of all system events. Alarms, troubles, and
acknowledgments are recorded as they occur in the system. In addition, the printer can be used to print out
status information and system reports.
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-29

Section Seven
Trouble Messages
Many of the AM2020/AFP1010 device, zone, system and annunciator trouble messages are self-explanatory.
Those messages needing further clarification are listed below. If the system is displaying a message that is
not self-explanatory and is not listed here, refer to the AM2020/AFP1010 Trouble-shooting Guide (Document
50432) and/or contact your Notifier distributor. .
CAT. COMM. FAULT

Catastrophic communications failure - the annunciator associated with this message is no longer functioning. The
connection may be broken.
CAT. FAIL. INCOMPATIBLE SOFTWARE

OR INVALID CBE
The panel is operating under an earlier version of software after newer software features have been programmed
into the system. Contact the factory to establish valid software compatibility. Complete reprogramming of system
CBE equations may be required.
CATASTROPHIC LOOP INTERFACE BOARD

"X" COMMUNICATION FLT
Communication has failed between the AM2020/AFP1010 and the LIB Board specified in the "X" field of the
message. This failure may be due to several reasons: the LIB Board has failed electronically; the LIB Board is
programmed but not installed in the system; the LIB Board is installed but is not programmed into the system; or a
poor connection has been made between the CPU and the LIB Board.
COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE IN PORT A*

Data is not being received on network (MIB) Port A. This trouble is only reported if the node is configured for dual
port monitoring.
COMMUNICATION LINK FAILURE IN PORT B*

Data is not being received on network (MIB) Port B. This trouble is only reported if the node is configured for dual
port monitoring.
DET FAILED TEST

This detector failed its periodic detector test. The periodic detector test verifies the alarm operation of the detector.
This trouble will also be generated when non NOTIFIER devices are detected on the SLC. The detector should be
removed and replaced by an authorized service representative.
DRIFT TOLERANCE
This detector's drift compensation value is outside the allowable range. This detector can no longer be compensated
and should be replaced.
EXPANDER MODULES
The number of annunciator expander modules for this annunciator is less than the number indicated by its DIP switch
settings.
EXT EQP ANN "XX" OR AUDIO/TELEPHON

External equipment connected to the trouble contacts of an annunciator, AMG or FFT-7 has failed.
INSTALL. ERROR
Installation error with an Annunciator Control System module. An annunciator has been physically installed in an
AM2020/AFP1010 system, but has not been programmed; or has been programmed, but not installed.
INVALID REPLY
The AM2020/AFP1010 has received either no response or an invalid response from an addressable LIB SLC
Loop device. Confirm that the LIB SLC Loop is connected properly to the device and that the device address
has been set correctly.
2-30 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

LAN COMMUNICATION FAILURE*
The specific network node (panel) can no longer communicate with the rest of the network, indicating a problem
with the network connections.
LOW CHAMBER VAL

The chamber value of the detector is too low for operation. This indicates a malfunction in the detector. The
detector must be removed and replaced by an authorized service representative.
MAINTENANCE REQ
The chamber value of the detector has exceeded 80 percent of the Alarm Threshold (determined by the
sensitivity selection of Low, Medium, or High), and has remained there for at least a 26-hour period. This
condition may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an
authorized service representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms.
MANUAL CONTROL
This annunciator is being controlled manually.
PRE-ALARM ALERT
The chamber value of the detector has exceeded 80% of the alarm threshold (determined by the sensitivity
selection of Low, Medium or High), and has remained there for at least a 60-second period. This condition
may be due to a dirty detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized
service representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms.
POINT TROUBLE
A monitor module dedicated to monitoring trouble conditions has been activated.
SECURITY ALARM
A security device programmed as SARM has been activated indicating a burglary or security violation. This
condition should be checked immediately.
SECURITY ALERT
A security device programmed as SACM has been activated indicating that a monitored event has occurred.
SECURITY TAMPER
A security device programmed as SSYM or SEQM has been activated indicating that monitored equipment
has been tampered with. This condition should be checked immediately for a SSYM device because it may be
due to a burglary or security violation.
SECURITY NO COM
The AM2020/AFP1010 has received either no response or an invalid response from an addressable SLC loop
device programmed for security operation. This may be the result of a burglary, other security violation, the
failure of a device, an improperly addressed device, or failure of the field wiring.
SPRNKLR TROUBLE
A supervisory condition that indicates sprinkler equipment supervised by a monitor module is in an abnormal
state (i.e. a sprinkler valve has been closed). Note that a break in the wiring of a supervisory circuit is a
trouble condition that yields OPEN CIRCUIT, not SPRNKLR TROUBLE.
SUPRVSRY SIGNAL
A supervisory condition that indicates equipment supervised by a monitor module is in an abnormal state (i.e.
low pressure indication). Note that a break in the wiring of a supervisory circuit is a trouble condition that
yields OPEN CIRCUIT, not SUPRVSRY SIGNAL.
VER COUNT OVFLW

This detector has exceeded the allowed detector verification limit. This condition may be due to a dirty
detector. The detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service
representative. Failure to do so may eventually result in false alarms.
* NOTI•FIRE•NET-specific trouble messages
Operating 15088:K 3/21/01 2-31
Section Eight
Drift Compensation
Drift Compensation
AM2020/AFP1010 software is designed to automatically compensate for chamber sensitivity drift due to detector
contamination in SDX-551/751 photo detectors and CPX-551/751 ion detectors. This software-based
compensation meets NFPA 72, Chapter 7 "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance" periodic sensitivity testing and
maintenance requirements without removing and testing each smoke detector in an installed system. This does
not eliminate the need for visual inspection or testing for smoke entry.
Alarm sensitivity in a detector chamber tends to increase over time. This increase is caused by chamber
contamination. In time, if the clean air level exceeds the alarm threshold a false alarm occurs. Drift compensation
eliminates this problem by increasing the alarm threshold as needed to maintain constant sensitivity. When the
detector is too dirty to compensate, a trouble is indicated automatically.
No additional programming is required for drift compensation. Every detector has three sensitivity levels: low,
medium, and high. These levels assign specific "percent obscuration per foot" values for each device.
Low Sensitivity Medium Sensitivity High Sensitivity

(% ob scuration p er foot) (% ob scuration p er foot) (% ob scuration p er foot)
Photo Detector 2.0 1.5 1.0
Ion Detector 3.0 1.5 1.0
IPX-751 2.9 - 3.6% 2.2 - 2.9% 0.8 - 1.5%
FAPT-751 2 - 4% 2 - 4% 1 - 2%
Drift compensation is executed when:
• The system powers up.

• A non-communication INVALID REPLY clears.
• Every 120 hours based on at least four samples.
Whenever a detector is replaced, an immediate compensation must be forced. The installer should remove the
existing detector, wait for at least three minutes, and then install the new detector.
After servicing a system containing drift compensation software, some detectors may cause a drift compensation
trouble indication within 15 minutes after reapplication of power. These detectors may have undergone several
drift sensitivity adjustments in the past and may not be properly compensated during power up compensation. A
second compensation may be required before the trouble condition clears. This second compensation will be
completed automatically after 120 hours. If a trouble condition for a detector still exists after a second
compensation, clean and/or replace it.
If power has not been removed and reapplied recently and drift compensation trouble is indicated for a particular
device, clean and/or replace the detector immediately.
2-32 Operating 15088: K 3/21/01

AM2020
AFP1010
CHAPTER THREE
PROGRAMMING
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-1

3-2 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
Introduction
This chapter covers the programming options of the AM2020/AFP1010 Combination Fire/Security Protective
Signaling System and the features available to the operator. This chapter is presented through the
perspective of the CRT-2 Monitor. The prompts are displayed on the CRT screen in the order that they appear
(top to bottom) on the pages that follow. For programming the control panel from the built-in keypad, an
overview of the panel’s Display Interface Assembly (DIA-2020 or DIA-1010) is illustrated in Chapter Two,
Operation. Installation information for the CRT is located in Chapter 1.
Menus
At the top of each sub-menu in this programming guide, a string of keys are displayed to illustrate the
sequence of keys needed to reach a particular menu. For example:
D}X 1X OR 7X
Select Programming Mode Select Partial Point Select MESSAGE option to
Programming change Custom User Label.
Passwords
Access to keypad or menu levels one and two require entry of specific passwords. These levels allow an
authorized programmer to initialize or alter the programming of the AM2020/AFP1010. Level One and Level
Two entry requirements are defined as follows:
Alter Status Level One password required.

Programming Level Two password required.
If the main operator of the system requires access to a function which is password protected, contact the
distributor who installed the system for the required password(s). The AM2020 and AFP1010 are shipped with
initial Level One and Level Two passwords of five zeroes (00000).
NOTE
Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to being reprogrammed.
Backspace key V
The Backspace key serves several purposes. At a menu prompt, the Backspace key aborts the selection of
that option:
ENTER@40@CHARACTER@USER@LABEL:
When entering data, the Backspace key erases the last character or digit entered:
ENTER@40@CHARACTER@USER@LABEL:@NOTIFIER
At certain points during operator or programming functions, the Backspace key aborts all the data just entered.
For instance, during Full Point Programming, a particular point must be fully programmed before the control
panel can use the information. If the Backspace key is pressed at a prompt ( : ) before all parameters (i.e.
address, Type ID, equation, etc.) for that point are entered into the control panel, then all previous entries for that
point will be ignored.
About Transponder Rapid All-Call

When the All Call button is pressed on an AMG connected to an AM2020/AFP1010 panel, an All Call activation
signal is received by the panel. Upon receipt of the All Call signal, the AM2020/AFP1010 panel will
immediately activate all specially programmed XP Transponder "SPKR" (programmed Software Type ID) circuits.
Programming is performed in the XP Transponder using the XRAM-1 (see XP Transponder System Manual).
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-3

About SIB-NET
The SIB-2048A and SIB-NET serial communications boards are available for use on the AM2020/AFP1010
system (see Chapter One). For the AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTI•FIRE•NET™ system, only the SIB-NET may
be used. If a SIB-NET board is not installed, specific NOTI•FIRE•NET functions can not be programmed or
viewed under Read Status.
NOTES
When a Network Reporting Terminal (NRT) is present on the NOTI•FIRE•NET, programming and
read status operations should always be performed from the NRT . If an INA is present on the
NOTI•FIRE•NET and no NRT is employed, programming and read status operations should be
performed from the INA. Never attempt to perform programming or read status operations from the
local panel when the same operations are being performed from the NRT or INA. For more information
on performing read status operations on the NRT or INA, refer to the NRT manual, Document 15090
and the INA manual, Document 15092.
When changing system programming on NOTI•FIRE•NET, it may be necessary to power down the
control panel to synchronize the network.
3-4 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

The Initial Programming Outline
For initial programming of the AM2020 or AFP1010, or for major changes and additions, the following basic
procedure is recommended to prevent errors resulting in reprogramming and wasted time.
• Make copies of the Program Work Sheets (contained in the Glossary) in the back of this manual.
• Use these Work Sheets to record the exact information for every detector, module, annunciator point
and software zone in the system. Pay special attention to the Software Type IDs listed in Section Three.
For voice systems, pay close attention to AMG annunciator point commands as described in Voice
Alarm Multiplex-2020 manual.
• If a CRT is to be used, configure it as described in Chapter 1.
• Assemble and apply power to the control panel as described in the Installation Chapter (also the VAM-
2020 manual, if appropriate). All system boards (including all LIBs) must be physically installed.
• The Level 1 and Level 2 passwords can be changed. The AM2020/AFP1010 is delivered from the factory
with passwords of 00000. Write down or memorize your passwords! To change the passwords, enter
the following:
D 00000 X 6 X (1 2) X OR
• If the control panel is to be programmed before installation of LIB SLC Loop devices, the panel will exit
programming and sound the piezo when each programmed device is not detected. To avoid the piezo
from sounding, use the following key sequence (after entering the password):
1X7XyXyXyXV
When the first device has been programmed into the system, the control panel will report a trouble
condition and will exit programming mode. Important: Do not acknowledge this trouble. Reenter
programming mode and the control panel will no longer exit programming or sound the piezo for
subsequent trouble conditions. (When programming is complete, remember to enable the piezo sounder
for normal system operation.)
• For initial system programming, read Full System Programming and answer all the questions in that
section before entering programming mode. Then, enter Full System Programming and load all the
answers into the control panel.
• Enter Full Point Programming. Use the work sheets developed in the second step of this outline and enter
information on all points in the system. Program points in the following order:
1) Annunciator Points 2) Zones 3) Detector Points 4) Module Points
• When devising Control-By-Event equations for a particular device, remember that the label of the first
software zone in the equation will appear on the panel display, along with the label of the device, when
an alarm condition occurs. See Label option in Partial Point Programming section for more information.
• Enter the System Message.
• Install all devices and thoroughly test the entire system. The Walk Test feature can be used to test
devices and their programming.
• Make a hard-copy record of the program on the printer.
• If desired, upload the program to store on an external device (computer hard drive or floppy), see
Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-5

3-6 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
Section One
Main Programming
The Programming Mode is accessed by entering the following (level 2 password required):
D } X
After entering the Programming Mode, the display will show the Main Programming menu:
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Main Programming menu has eight options, where:
1=PSYS Partial System Programming - Selective programming of system-wide functions

(number of LIBs, AVPS-24/AVPS-24E*, ISIB, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Cut-out, Alarm
Verification, number of annunciator modules, etc.).
2=FSYS Full System Programming - Complete programming of system-wide functions (num-

ber of LIBs, AVPS-24/AVPS-24E*, ISIB, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Cutout, Alarm Verifi-
cation, number of annunciator modules, etc.).
3=PPRG Partial Point Programming - Selectively altering the operating parameters of LIB
SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones and annunciator points.
4=FPRG Full Point Programming - Complete programming of addressable LIB SLC Loop de-
vices, software-defined zones, annunciator points and their respective operating pa-
rameters.
5=REMV Remove - Permits the selective removal (from control panel memory) of any of the
system's addressable SLC Loop devices, software-defined zones or annunciator
points.
6=PSWD Password - Allows the programmer to assign custom five-digit Level One and Level
Two passwords.
7=MSG Message - Allows the Level Two programmer to define the custom 40-Character User
Label displayed on the CRT Monitor and the panel's Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
8=HIS History - Allows the programmer to enable or disable storage of events and the clear-
ing of stored events.
* The number of APS-6R power supplies should be included in the AVPS count.
The Main Programming Menu flow chart is located in Figure 1-1. Detailed information on the Main Programming
options follows.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-7

Press PROG key
Enter Level 2
Password
Valid
No Error Message
Password?
Yes
Select Main
Programming
Menu Option 1-8
1 = PSYS
see Figure 1-2
(partial system programming)
2 = FSYS
(full system programming) see Section 1.2
3 = PPRG see Figure 1-10

(partial point programming)
4 = FPRG see Figure 1-13

(full point programming)
5 = REMV
(selective removal of see Section 1.5
devices, zones, etc.)
6 = PSWD
(assign or alter passwords) see Section 1.6
7 = MSG
(assign or alter message
see Section 1.7
displayed on control panel)
8 = HIS
(enable, disable, or clear see Figure 1-14
history buffer)
Figure 1-1 Main Programming Menu Flow Chart
3-8 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.1 Partial System Programming D }X1X
1=PSYS
Option 1 from the Main Programming menu allows the programmer to change the programming of system-
wide functions such as Alarm Verification of detectors, Signal-Silence Inhibit, Signal Cut-out, disabling the
piezo sounder, enabling Rapid Polling, and enabling supervision of peripheral equipment in the system.
Additional system parameters, such as the number of APS-6R, LIBs, Annunciators and ISIB in the system. The
LIB SLC Loops can also be changed in Partial System Programming.
After selecting option 1 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the Partial System
Programming submenu:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:
NOTE: Submenu option 4 includes APS-6R as well as AVPS power supplies.
The Partial System Programming submenu has nine options, where:
1=INST Installation - Installation or removal of the Loop Interface Boards from memory.
2=STY Style - Changing (in memory) the NFPA style of the SLC Loops.
3=TDLY Time Delays - Setting the time delays for Alarm Verification, Signal-Silence Inhibit,
and Signal Cut-Out.
4=AVPS Audio/Visual Power Supplies - Telling the AM2020/AFP1010 how many Audio/Visual
Power Supplies and APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supplies are installed in the system.
5=ZBND Zone Boundary - Setting the zone boundary for the software memory map.
6=EXTEQ External Equipment - Changing the external equipment options, such as electrical
supervision of the CRT Monitor.
7=LOCP Local Parameters - Setting local parameters, such as enabling or disabling the piezo
sounder during point programming of SLC Loop devices, LIB Local Mode and NFPA pro-
gramming.
8=ISIB Intelligent Serial Interface Board - Installation or removal of the Intelligent Serial In-
terface Board (SIB-2048A or SIB-NET) or annunciator modules (see Chapter One,
Serial Communications, for a description of annunciator modules). Also used to en-
able the external interface for upload/download, and Universal Digital Alarm Commu-
nicator Transmitter selection.
9=PARM Additional System Parameters - Selection of additional system parameters such as

the detector day/night sensitivity settings, rapid polling, etc.
The Partial System Programming Menu flow chart is located in Figure 1-2. Detailed information on the Partial
System Programming options follows.
NOTES
When removing loop interface boards, all installed points on the affected LIBs are automatically
removed upon cycling power to the system. Programming information for installed points can be
stored in a VeriFire™ database prior to removal of the LIB. Use of the VeriFire™ application for
the reprogramming of previously removed points is highly recommended.
When removing annunciator modules, all installed points on the affected annunciators must be removed
first for proper system operation.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-9
1= PSYS
Select Partial System

Programming Submenu
Option 1-9
1 = INST
(install/remove loop
interface boards)
see Figure 1-3
2 = STY
(choose NFPA style for SLC see Figure 1-4
loops)
3 = TDLY
(setting of alarm verification, see Figure 1-5
signal silence, etc.)
see Section 1.1.4

4 = AVPS
Note: Include the
(program # of supplies for
number of devices
system)
employing the trouble
bus.
5 = ZBND
(set the boundary for see Section 1.1.5
software memory map)
6 = EXTEQ
(select options for CRT see Figure 1-6
monitor and/or printer)
7 = LOCP
(enable/disable piezo see Figure 1-7
sounder, LIB local mode, &
NFPA prog)
8 = ISIB
see Figure 1-8
(install/remove ISIB)
9 = PARM
(day/night sensitivity see Figure 1-9
settings, etc.)
Figure 1-2 Partial System Programming Submenu Flow Chart
3-10 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.1.1 LIB Installation D
}X1X1X
1=INST
Option 1 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the installation or removal of LIB SLC Loops
from memory. The LIB boards must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a
system trouble condition. The Installation Option flow chart is located in Figure 1-3.
The AM2020 is capable of a maximum of ten LIB Signaling Line Circuits (1980 devices total in the system).
The AFP1010 is capable of a maximum of four LIB Signaling Line Circuits (792 devices total in the system).
The following programming example illustrates the installation of Loop Interface Board number 3.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@THE@LIB@BOARD@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3
IS@LIB@BOARD@03@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@03@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@LIB@BOARD?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
PROGRAMMING@COMPLETE@@-@@POWER@DOWN@TO@MAKE@APPROPRIATE@CHANGES
Refer to Chapter One of this manual for information on LIB-400 and its correct slot address. See notes in Section
1.1, Partial System Programming.
Section 1.1.2 LIB SLC Loop Style D }X1X2X

2=STY
Option 2 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the programmer to change in AM2020/
AFP1010 memory the NFPA style for the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) connected to each LIB. The SLC must still
be field wired in accordance with the style set in memory (Chapter One-Installation). The Style Option flow chart
is located in Figure 1-4.
The following programming example illustrates setting SLC Loop number 5 as an NFPA Style 6 circuit. The
CRT screen prompts are displayed in the priority that they appear (top to bottom).
ENTER@THE@SLC@LOOP@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@5
ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@05@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@SLC@LOOP?@(Y=YES,N=N0)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
Change
Enter LIB Install/Remove Enter Style
1 = INST board # (1-10) LIB selected of SLC Loop
another No
LIB?
Yes
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-3 Install Option Flow Chart
Change
Enter NFPA Style
2 = STY Enter Loop # Another No (Exit Prog Mode)
for loop (6 or 4)
Style?
Yes
Figure 1-4 Style Option Flow Chart
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-11

Section 1.1.3 Time Delays D }X1X3X
3=TDLY
Option 3 from the Partial System Programming submenu allows the programmer to enable/disable Alarm
Verification of detectors, Signal-Silence Inhibit and Signal Cut-out for control modules, as well as setting the
appropriate time delays for these functions. For a full description of these functions, see the Glossary of Terms
and Abbreviations at the end of this manual.
3 = TDLY
Change Enable
Enter Detector
Detector Detector
Yes Yes Verification
Verification Verification
Time (5-50 sec)
Time? Time?
No No
Change Enable Signal Enter Signal Silence

Signal Silence Yes Silence Inhibit Yes Inhibit Time
Inhibit Time? Time (1-255 sec)
No No
Change Enable Enter Signal Cut-

Signal Cut- Yes Signal Cut- Yes Out Time
Out Time? Out Time? (1-2040 sec)
No No
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-5 Time Delay Option Flow Chart
The following programming example illustrates enabling all three functions:
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@ :@3
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@(5@-@50@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) :@35
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@(1@-@255@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) :@240
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@(1@-@2040@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS) :@600
3-12 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

General Considerations
The capability of the control panel to provide the functions of Alarm Verification, Signal Cut-out, and Signal-
Silence Inhibit can be enabled/disabled by the programmer in both Full and Partial System Programming.
However, to make use of these functions, the Signal Silence option (for silenceable control modules) and the
Alarm Verification option (for addressable detectors) must still be enabled/disabled individually for each SLC
Loop device under Full or Partial Point Programming.
For instance, when programming Alarm Verification:
• Under Full or Partial System Programming, the programmer turns Alarm Verification ON and sets the
verification time period.
• Under Full or Partial Point Programming, the programmer individually selects Alarm Verification for each
detector:
Detector 1 = YES
Detector 2 = NO
Detector 3 = YES
Detector 4 = YES
and so forth for each detector in the system.
For signal cut-out, the data can be entered in one second increments: however, the AM2020/AFP1010 will round
up to the nearest value/increment of 8. For example, if 7 is entered, the displayed value will be 8. If 9 or 15 is
entered, the displayed value is 16. If 60 is entered, the value is 64.
Section 1.1.4 Enabling the Trouble Bus D }X1X4X

4=AVPS
The presence of auxiliary power supplies (formerly the AVPS-24) and other optional devices employing the trouble
bus connector at P5 on the CPU must be programmed into memory by selecting option 4 from the Partial System
Programming submenu. At the prompt "ENTER THE NUMBER OF AVPS-24 INSTALLED IN THE SYSTEM (0-16)",
enter the total number of devices employing the trouble bus. The devices must be physically installed and
connected to P5 on the CPU to prevent creating a system trouble condition. The example below illustrates the
software installation of two AA-30 amps, one AA-120 amp, and two APS-6R power supplies.
ENTER@THE@NUMBER@OF@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM@(0@-@16)@@@@@@@@:@5
Section 1.1.5 Zone Boundary D }X1X5X

5=ZBND
The AM2020/AFP1010 can make use of up to 240 software-defined “zones.” These zones can be either
forward–activated (FZON) or reverse–activated (RZON), depending upon the particular installation
requirements. These forward and reverse zones must be grouped separately, with the forward group always
preceding the reverse group. The highest forward-activated zone in the system is the Zone Boundary, which
must be in the range of Z001 - Z239. For a full description of Forward and Reverse Activating Software Zone,
see the Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations at the end of this manual.
Unless the use of complex Control-By-Event or Cooperative Control-By-Event Equations is required in the
system, set the Zone Boundary to Z200 (default). (For more information, see Control-By-Event Programming
and Cooperative Control-By-Event Programming).
Forward Zones Reverse Zones
Z001 Zone Boundary Z240
The following programming example illustrates setting the Zone Boundary for zone 200.
ENTER@ZXXX@OF@HIGHEST@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@ZONE@IN@SYSTEM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-13
Section 1.1.6 External Equipment D
}X1X6X
6=EXTEQ
Option 6 from the Partial System Programming Menu allows the changing of any optional features associated
with the CRT Monitor or Printer(s).
Terminal Supervision - Electrical supervision of the CRT Monitor. Unless terminal supervi-
sion is selected, the CRT will not beep (i.e., no bell characters will be
sent) when unacknowledged troubles or unacknowledged alarms are
present.
Terminal Status Line - The bottom line of the CRT will display the number of unacknowl-
edged alarms and troubles, and the total number of alarms and
troubles in the system. The Terminal Status Line appears on the
CRT display only.
Auxiliary Printer Monitoring - The AM2020/AFP1010 will monitor the auxiliary printer's Ready/Busy
line for error conditions. Note: The P40 is a special internal 40-col-
umn printer. This option should not be enabled for external 80-col-
umn printers.
Control Module Reporting - Control module state changes will be printed out.
NONA/NOA Module Reporting - Module state changes for modules with the Software Type ID NONA
or NOA will be printed out. See Software Type IDs for further infor-
mation on all Software Type IDs.
LED LATCH - Enables 99-device LED latching. See restrictions under LED Latch-
ing.
Printer Error Continue - Data will be transmitted to the printer under Printer Error conditions
(Paper Out or Printer Off Line generates an error condition under
which data may be lost). Enable for special applications only.
Bidirectional Copy - The CRT will process data received through its AUX port. Enable for
special applications only (see the CCM-1 Product Installation Docu-
ment).
Printer Trouble Inhibit - The AM2020/AFP1010 monitors the primary printer's Rx line for error
conditions. This option inhibits the generation of a trouble message
for Paper Out or Printer Off Line. Enable for special applications only
(see the VGAS Installation manual).
Printer Reports Redirected to CRT- System reports will be echoed to the CRT interface. Enable for spe-
cial applications only (see the VGAS Installation Manual and the
NAM-232 For Use With AM2020/AFP1010 Manual, Document
50424).
The External Equipment Option flow chart is located in Figure 1-6.
3-14 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

6 = EXTEQ
Change
Terminal
Supervision? No
Change
Yes Terminal Status
Line? No
Enable/Disable Change Aux

Terminal Supervision Yes Printer Prog? No
Change Control
Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Aux
Module State Yes
Terminal Status Line Yes Printer
Reporting?
Enable/Disable Aux
Printer No
Change NONA/
NOA Module State
No
Reporting?
All devices
purchased after
No 4/1/91? Yes
Yes Enable/Disable
NONA/NOA State
Change Printer Enable/Disable LED Reporting
Change No Error Handling? Latching
Bidirectional
Copy?
Yes
Yes
Enable/Disable Data
Transmit During
No Printer Error
Enable/Disable
Bidirectional Copy
Change Primary
Printer Prog? No
Change Printer
Yes Report Handling? No
Enable/Disable
Primary Printer
Yes
Trouble
Enable/Disable (Exit Prog Mode)

Printer Reports
Redirected to CRT
Figure 1-6 External Equipment Option Flow Chart
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-15

The following programming example illustrates enabling of all external equipment functions except transmit of data
during printer error conditions, bidirectional copy, primary printer trouble error reporting, and redirecting printer
reports to the CRT.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@@@@@:@6
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO): @@@@;@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@"NONA"/NOA"@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"NONA"/NOA"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@ :@Y
WERE@ALL@ADDRESSABLE@DEVICES@FACTORY-PURCHASED@AFTER@4/1/1?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRINTER@ERROR@HANDLING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@TRANSMIT@DATA@UNDER@PRINTER@ERROR@CONDITIONS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@TROUBLE@INHIBITED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRINTER@REPORT@HANDLING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REDIRECT@PRINTER@REPORTS@TO@THE@TERMINAL?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@:@N
NEW@ALM:@0000@@@TOT@ALM:@0000@@@NEW@TBL:@0000@@@TOT@TBL:@0000
Terminal Status Line
The terminal status line also displays signal silence information in the same manner as the Signal Silence LED. The Signal
Silence field displays the messages ALL SILENCED, PARTIAL SILENCE or is blank for a non-silenceable system.
ALARM:@SMOKE(PHOTO)@COMPUTER@ROOM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@03:58P@03/01/00@101
@@@SIGNAL@SILENCE@@@@@@@@REQUESTED@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@03:58P@03/01/00@101
NEW@ALM:@0001@@@TOT@ALM:@0001@@@NEW@TBL:@0000@@@TOT@TBL:@0000@@@ALL@SILENCED
LED Latching
The AM2020/AFP1010 offers an LED-latching option:
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:
If you respond N for no, the control panel will employ a default latching algorithm, which limits the number of addressable device
LEDs that will illuminate when the device is in alarm. With this option programmed NO, after six alarm initiating addressable
devices are in alarm any additional devices going into alarm will not light their integral LED, nor any remote annunciator such as
the RA400Z. This situation could impact system operation if DHX-501 duct detectors are configured to control fan systems or
other building equipment from their integral relay because the relay is controlled by the detector's LED. If the duct detector is
not one of the first six addressable devices reporting an alarm, then it can not control its integral relay. However, if the
programming option is set YES, then their integral LED will light when the duct detector is in alarm and the relay will transfer. If
you respond Y for yes, optional latching for more devices will be employed.
Default Latching
• Maximum of six devices can be latched at once (five modules maximum).
• Detectors have priority over modules. After six devices have been latched, detectors that come into alarm will
assume LED-latch priority over previously-latched module LEDs.
• Under secondary (DC) power, only intelligent detectors (including DHX-501 Duct Detectors) will be latched.
3-16 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Optional Latching for More Devices
• The control panel will latch up to 99 devices, subject to the limitations outlined below.
• All devices in the system must be of the R4 variety (see below).
• No RA-400 Remote LEDs can be installed on any device, excluding the DHX-501 Duct Detectors.
• Due to a finite amount of 24 VDC power available for devices on each SLC Loop, illumination of only
a certain quantity of LEDs will actually be visible under conditions where large numbers of LEDs have
been latched on. Note that remote LEDs off of DHX-501 Duct Detectors will always illuminate since they
are powered from a source other than the SLC Loop.
• Under primary (AC) power, 99 devices can be latched.
• Detectors have priority over modules. After 99 devices have been latched, detectors that come into
alarm will assume LED-latch priority over previously-latched module LEDs.
• Under secondary (DC) power, only intelligent detectors (including DHX-501 Duct Detectors) will be
latched.
• Due to a finite amount of 24 VDC power available for devices on each SLC Loop, illumination of only a certain quantity
of LEDs will actually be visible under conditions where large numbers of LEDs have been latched on. Note that
remote LEDs off of DHX-501 Duct Detectors will always illuminate since they are powered from a source other than
the SLC Loop.
MORE LED latching can only be employed if ALL installed addressable

devices were purchased from the Notifier factory after April 1, 1991.
Use of this feature under any other circumstances can cause the SLC
Loops to shut down. Devices compatible with more LED latching will
have the code R4 stamped on the product marking label. SDX-551/751
Photoelectric detectors can also have an H code after the model number.
NOTES
• Modules refer to monitor and control modules, and XP Transponder circuits. Devices are defined as
intelligent detectors and modules.
• Software Type IDs PWRC, NCMN, SCON and NOA will never latch under Default Latching.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-17

Section 1.1.7 Local Parameters D }X1X7X
7=LOCP
Option 7 of the Partial System Programming Menu allows the changing of Local Parameters, such as enabling/
disabling the panel’s piezo sounder (for trouble conditions while programming SLC Loop devices into memory),
LIB Local Mode, NFPA listings, battery parameters, event reminder, device blink, and pre-alarm programming.
7 = LOCP
Change
Piezo
Condition? No
Chane Program Enter Max Enter Max Address
LIB Local Yes Local Yes Address For For Monitor Module
Mode? Mode? Detector (1-99) (1-99)
Yes
No
Enable/Disable Enter Max Address
Silencing of Piezo Local Mode for Control Module
during Prog No Addresses (1-99)
Cleared
Change Change
Enter Battery
Yes Battery No NFPA
Type
Prog? Listing?
NICAD
Yes
Battery?
Yes
Enter Battery
Cpacity
(9-32 AHR) Select NFPA Program/
Listing Remove Listing
No
Enter Battery
Standby Time
No
Enable/Disable Change
High Rate Event
Charge Reminder? No
Change
Device
Blink? No
Yes
Change
Pre-Alarm
Enable/Disable Function? No
Yes
Event Reminder
(Exit Prog Mode)
Enable/Disable
Yes
Device Blink
Enable/Disable
Pre-Alarm
Function
Figure 1-7 Local Parameter Option Flow Chart
3-18 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

The following programming example illustrates the disabling of the panel’s piezo sounder, programming LIB Local
Mode, modifying NFPA listings, programming the battery parameters, changing the event reminder, device blink
and pre-alarm programming.
NOTE
The sounder must be enabled upon completion of programming!
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM@@@:@7
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PIEZO@TROUBLE@CONDITION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PIEZO@SOUNDER@SILENCED@WHILE@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@LIB@LOCAL@MODE@PARAMETERS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@LOCAL@MODE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@DETECTOR@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@99
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@MONITOR@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@:@99
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@:@99
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@TYPE@OF@BATTERY@INSTALLED@(L=LEAD-ACID,N=NICAD)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY@(9@-@32@IN@1@AHR@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@12
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME@(4,@24,@48@OR@60@HR)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@48
DO@YOU@WANT@24@HOUR@HIGH@RATE@CHARGE@FOR@BATTERY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DEVICE@BLINK?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DEVICE@BLINK@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
General Operation of the Piezo Sounder

• The piezo sounder provides feedback each time a key is pressed on the DIA.
• The piezo sounder sounds for unacknowledged alarm conditions.
• The piezo sounder sounds steadily for unacknowledged trouble or supervisory conditions.
• The piezo sounder chirps periodically (approximately every 12 seconds) for acknowledged
conditions remaining in the system upon selection of the Event Reminder option.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-19

Local Mode Operation
Local Mode operation allows the LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400 boards to run independently of the CPU if CPU
to LIB communications should fail.
Local Mode is programmed in the Local Parameters portion of System Programming. The programmer identifies
all of the SLC addressable control points (modules and transponder points) at and below the boundary address
programmed, that are to be activated upon alarm. Detector and monitor module Local Mode addresses are no
longer supported. All detectors and monitor modules participate in Local Mode. The programmer should enter 99
for detector and monitor module Local Mode Addresses.
All LIB boards use the same control-by-event, with the following format:
IF Any intelligent detector with an address less than or equal to the maximum detector Lo-
cal Mode address is in alarm.
AND/OR Any monitor module with an address less than or equal to the maximum monitor mod-
ule Local Mode address is in alarm.
THEN All control modules with an address less than or equal to the maximum control mod-
ule Local Mode address will be activated.
Extended Local Mode Operation
Devices local to each individual LIB are divided into Local Mode categories based on Software Type IDs. All
devices within the Local Mode address range will participate in Local Mode. Below is a description of each Local
Mode category and a table showing which device types reside in each category. For complete definitions of
Software Type IDs, refer to Section Three, Software Type IDs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
PHOT MTRB SPSU WAT CON TPND TELE APND WFS SSC PWRC
ION MPAG SUPR SPKR GPND PAGE EVGA WFC
THER NOA FORC GTC GAS
MON SARM CMXS TRS GAC
PULL SSYM CMXC TRC
FTHR SACM FRCM DACT
WAT SEQM
SCON
CATEGORY DESCRIPTION
NCMN 1 If any of the participating standard inititating devices in Category 1 become active, then at a minimum all
participating indicating devices in Category 5 will be activated (other indicating devices may activate as
NONA a side effect of standard initiating device activation.)
FPHT 2 These initiating devices are never acted on by local mode and have no side effects for other devices.
3 If these initiating devices become active, Type ID SSC will activate.
MPUL 4 If these initiating devices become active, Type IDs WFS and WFC will activate.
IOND 5 If any of the participating standard initiating devices in Category 1 become active, then all participating
standard indicating devices in Category 5 become active.
IONH 6 During local mode these indicating devices are always active.
7 These indicating devices will activate if they participate in local mode.
IONL
8 These indicating devices will activate if any participating or nonparticipating alarm input is active.
CMBO 9 These indicating devices will activate if any initiating module with Type ID WAT is active.
A These indicating devices will activate if any initiating module with Type ID SPSU or SUPR is active.
B These devices deactivate temporarily upon system reset to remove power to conventional devices al-
lowing them to reset.
Table 1-1 Extended Local Mode Categories and Software Type IDs
3-20 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

NFPA Listings
NFPA listing allows the programmer to change the operation of the panel based on the NFPA listings selected.
Each listing will select one or more mandatory modules.
Listing Software ID Address
* NFPA 72 (72A) Local Fire Alarm Systems EVGA L1M96
NFPA 72 (72B) Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems GAS L1M97
** NFPA 72 (72C) Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems GAC L1M98

GAC L1M99
** NFPA 72 (72D) Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems n/a n/a
** NFPA 72 (71) Central Station Fire Alarm Systems n/a n/a
Receiving Unit (RCV) and Central Station Unit n/a n/a
* Fire alarm input devices automatically default to latching operation when the 72A listing is selected.
** NFPA 72 (72C), (72D), and (71) are no longer required and should not be selected during programming.
Once a module is programmed by an NFPA Listing selection, that module can only be removed from the system
by de-selection of that same listing. Selection of RCV disables the block acknowledge function. RCV must be
enabled for all Central Station Receiving and Proprietary and Protected Premises receiving units. RCV is not
supported by NOTI•FIRE•NET™ systems that contain an NRT or AFP-200 panel.
NOTES
• Modules must be connected on the LIB SLC Loop with the appropriate address(es) set in order
to avoid trouble conditions.
• NFPA modules selected must be in their normal state or acknowledged prior to de-selection
otherwise trouble conditions may not clear from the panel memory.
Pre-Alarm Function
The pre-alarm function causes the FACP to generate a trouble message when the chamber value of the detector
has exceeded 80% of the alarm threshold (determined by the sensitivity selection of low, medium, high).
• With pre-alarm enabled, the 80% condition must be present for at least a 60 second period and will
indicate a "PRE-ALARM ALERT" message on the FACP after that period.
• With pre-alarm disabled the 80% condition must be present for at least a 26 hour period and will indicate
a "MAINTENANCE REQ" message on the FACP after that period.
NOTE
This condition (detector exceeding 80% of alarm threshold) may be due to a dirty detector. The
detector should be inspected and cleaned as necessary by an authorized service representative.
Failure to do so may result in a false alarm.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-21

Section 1.1.8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Programming
D }X1X8X
8=ISIB
Option 8 from the Partial System Programming Menu allows the programmer to change parameters associated with an
Intelligent Serial Interface Board (ISIB). ISIB Programming has four submenu options, ISIB Installation, Annunciator
Installation, External Interface Parameters and UDACT Selection. Detailed descriptions of the four ISIB programming
options are located on the pages that follow. The SIB-2048A and SIB-NET ISIBs are available for use with the AM2020/
AFP1010. For AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTI•FIRE•NET™ the SIB-NET is the only ISIB available. Refer to
Chapter One, Serial Communications, for a description of available intelligent serial interface boards.
8 = ISIB
Select ISIB
Submenu Option 1-4
1 = INSTL Change Yes Enable/Disable

(Sib installation) ISIB? ISIB
No
2 = ANN Enter annunciator

Yes
(annunciator to be changed
installation) (1-32)
Install
annunciator Enter Change
Yes No
selected? Label Another?
No
3 = XINT Change Change

(external Upload/ No SIB
interface) Download? Address?
Yes Yes
Enable/Disable
Upload/Download? Enter SIB Address
Change Change Change MIB

Channel No Channel No No Change
No B Threshold? Data Port ACK/SIL/RES? No
A Threshold? Monitoring?
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enter Number of Do you want

Enter Channel Enter Channel ACK/SIL/RES
Channels to No
A Threshold B Threshold disabled at panel?
Monitor
Do you want
ACK/SIL/RES re- No
enabled on LAN
Comm Fault?
4 = DACT Change
(communicator UDACT Yes Install UDACT?
programming? No
transmitter)
ISIBFLOW.CDR
Yes
No
Enter base
address (1-32)
(Exit Program
Mode)
Figure 1-8 Intelligent Serial Interface Board Option Flow Chart

3-22 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
After entering option 8 from the Partial System Programming submenu, the display will show the ISIB submenu:
PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :
1=INSTL - ISIB Installation D }X1X8X1X

This option allows the installation or removal of the Intelligent Serial Interface Board from control panel
memory. The board must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a system trouble
condition. The following programming example illustrates the installation of the Intelligent Serial Interface
Board.
PRESS@1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT :@1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
See notes in Section 1.1, Partial System Programming.
2=ANN - Annunciator Installation D }X1X8X2X

This option allows the installation or removal of annunciators (EIA-485 devices) from the AM2020/AFP1010
memory. The modules must still be physically installed or removed from the system to prevent a system
trouble condition. The following programming example illustrates the installation of annunciator module 1.
ENTER@THE@ANNUNCIATOR@NUMBER@TO@CHANGE@(1@-@32) :@1
IS@ANNUNCIATOR@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL :@ANNUNCIATOR@ONE
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ANOTHER@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@N
* The SCS-8 and SCS-8L firmware has been updated in conjunction with Software Release 2.8. The new SCS
firmware is not backward compatible with older revisions of software.
3=XINT - External Interface Parameters D }X1X8X3X

This option allows the programmer to change the parameters associated with the external interface port.
The following example illustrates enabling all associated parameters.
* DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ACS PORT@UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@THE@ACS PORT@UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* ENTER@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS@(0@-@249)@ @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@249
* DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MIB-W@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A@(H=HIGH,L=LOW) :@L
* DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MIB-W@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B@(H=HIGH,L=LOW) :@H
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@MIB@DATA@PORT@USAGE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@USE@BOTH@MIB@DATA@PORTS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKOUT@SETTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKED@OUT@AT@THE@PANEL?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@RE-ENABLED@DURING@LAN@COMM@FAULT?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
* These items are NOTI•FIRE•NET™ specific functions and are only programmed when a SIB-NET is used.
NOTES
• During an upload/download, the fire protection capability of the AM2020/AFP1010 is enabled (it is limited for download). To
reduce the risk of incompatible databases, the programmer should NEVER program any parameters into the control panel
while an upload/download is in progress.
• To communicate over the external interface, the annunciator modules MUST first be disconnected since both functions
use the same serial port.
• When an Intelligent SIB Board is changed from one address to another, the CCBE is lost. If the address is changed back
to the previous address, CCBE will return.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-23
4=DACT - UDACT Installation D }X1X8X4X
This option allows the installer to program a Notifier UDACT (Universal Digital Alarm Communicator
Transmitter) and specify its base annunciator protocol address in the system. The example below illustrates
programming a UDACT.
Before programming a UDACT into an AM2020/AFP1010 system, the number of annunciator addresses
required must be determined. First, take the number of annunciator points in the system and add 8 points (for
the UDACT). Then, divide the total by 64 to obtain the number of annunciator addresses required (round up to
next whole number if decimal).
PRESS 1=INSTL,2=ANN,3=XINT,4=DACT :@4

DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE UDACT PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO YOU WANT A UDACT INSTALLED? (Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER THE BASE ADDRESS FOR UDACT OPERATION (1@-@32) :@1
NOTES
• The UDACT can only be programmed into or removed from the system through the Partial System
Programming Menu.
• The UDACT must be programmed at an installed annunciator address. Once programmed, the first 8
annunciator protocol points (base address only) automatically become unique fire panel status
indicators (see UDACT Manual). These 8 functions required by the UDACT override any previous
AM2020/AFP1010 annunciator point programming. When a UDACT is installed, the first 8 AM2020/
AFP1010 annunciator points associated with the UDACT base address cannot be reprogrammed/
removed and have no read status functionality.
• Answering "NO" for the question, "Do you want a UDACT installed?" disables the automatic 8 point
UDACT programming and restores these points to their original annunciator point programming.
• Multiple annunciator addresses may need to be programmed depending upon the range specified by
the UDACT annunciator address switches.
• The UDACT cannot be used in systems containing an AVPS-24/AVPS-24E, AA-30/AA-30E, AA-120,
AA-120E or XP Transponder since a primary power failure signal transmission will not be delayed as
required for this application.
• When using the UDACT in a system with a NIB-96, use care to ensure that the EIA-485 addresses
selected do not overlap with those of the NIB-96.
• When a UDACT is programmed into the system, both the red and yellow LEDs will illuminate on an
annunciator point mapped to a supervisory input during the presence of a supervisory signal for that
point, unless the supervisory ACS reporting option has been enabled.
• Off-premises transmission of security alarms using the UDACT must be made by mapping input
points with the Software Type ID SACM and SEQM to annunciator points within the range of the UDACT.
Use of other security Type IDs for this purpose will result in simultaneous transmission of a trouble
signal.
• Multiple UDACT usage per AM2020/AFP1010 system is not permitted.
3-24 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.1.9 Additional System Parameters D }X1X9X
9=PARM
This option allows the programmer to enable/disable additional system parameters such as the day/night
sensitivity of detectors or rapid polling. For a full description of these functions, see the Glossary of Terms and
Abbreviations at the end of this manual.
9 = PARM
Change
Enable
High Day/ Enter Zone # to
Yes High Yes
Night be set High
Zone?
Zone?
No No*
Change Enter Zone

Low Day/ Enable
Yes Yes # to be Set
Night Low Zone?
Low
Zone?
No No*
* Zone Cleared Change

Detector
Enable
Detector
Enter Detector
Verification Yes Yes Verification
Verification Trouble Count
Trouble
Trouble? (1-20)
Counter?
No No
Change
Enable/Disable
SACM/SEQM
Module State
Yes SACM/SEQM
State Reporting
Reporting?
No
Change Drift Enable/Disable

Compensation Yes Drift
? Compensation
No
Change Enable/Disable
Yes Pager
Pager Prog?
No
Change
Enable/Disable
Modem Yes
Modem
Prog?
No
Change Enable/Disable
Yes
NAM Prog? NAM
No
Change
Rapid Enable/Disable
Yes Rapid Polling
Polling
Prog?
No
Change Enable
Supervisory Supervisory
ACS
Yes ACS
Reporting? Reporting?
No
(Exit Prog Mode)
Figure 1-9 Additional System Parameters Option Flow Chart

Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-25
The following programming example illustrates enabling these functions.
PRESS@1=INST,2=STY,3=TDLY,4=AVPS,5=ZBND,6=EXTEQ,7=LOCP,8=ISIB,9=PARM :@9
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@A@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX) @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z150
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@A@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX) :@Z1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ DETECTOR@ VER.@TROUBLE @COUNTER?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@ DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE @ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
ENTER@DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE@ COUNT@(1@-@20 :@15
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@REPORTING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@OPERATION?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@PAGER@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PAGER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@MODEM@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@MODEM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@NAM@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@NAM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@RAPID@POLLING@PROGRAMMING?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@RAPID@POLLING@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO @YOU @WANT @TO@ CHANGE@ THE @SUPERVISORY@ MODULE@ ACS @REPORTING?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
DO@ YOU@ WANT@ SUPERVISORY@ MODULES @TO@ ILLUMINATE@ ACTIVE @LED?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) :@Y
Day/Night Sensitivity
The function of Day/Night sensitivity is to force intelligent detectors into high or low sensitivity when the
appropriate zones are active, regardless of the detectors normal sensitivity setting. If both the high and low
zones are active, the system is forced to high sensitivity. The Day/Night high and low sensitivity zones may
be individually activated by control-by-event (CBE) equations written for this purpose or through the use of
control-by-time equations.
The capability of the control panel to provide the function of day/night sensitivity can be enabled/disabled in
both Full and Partial System Programming. However, the day/night sensitivity option (for addressable
detectors) must be enabled/disabled individually for each SLC Loop device.
The following must be performed when programming Day/Night Detector Sensitivity:
• Enable the Day/Night Sensitivity and set the zone number. This is a global setting.
• Select Day/Night Sensitivity for each individual detector. For example:
Detector 1 = YES
Detector 2 = NO
Detector 3 = YES
Detector 4 = YES
Detector Verification Trouble

If set, the control panel will generate a trouble for each intelligent detector which exceeds the verification
counter trouble limit. This feature can be used to isolate those devices which excessively go into detector
verification before causing false alarm conditions in the panel. To clear this condtion reset the detector verification
counters as described in Section 2.6.
SACM/SEQM Module Reporting
If selected for reporting, module state changes for modules with the Software Type ID SACM or SEQM will be
printed out. See Software Type IDs for further information on all Software Type IDs.
Drift Compensation
If set, the addressable detectors will automatically compensate for environmental contaminants and other
factors over time, until the drift tolerance value has been exceeded. When the drift tolerance value has been
exceeded, the control panel will signal a maintenance alert for the apropriate detector.
3-26 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
Pager
The Pager mode must be enabled when a compatible pager is connected to the auxiliary printer port.
Modem
If enabled, the following remote device (CRT) functions are inhibited: ACK STEP, SIGNAL SILENCE, SYSTEM
RESET, PROGRAMMING, and ALTER STATUS. This option must be employed when a modem is used to
receive signals from an off-premise device or when the keyboard is to remain attached to the CRT in a system that
is not configured and operated as a Proprietary Fire Alarm System. See the TPI-232 manual.
NAM
The NAM-232 is used to tie a remote FACP to the NOTI•FIRE•NET™ via telephone lines. If the NAM is
enabled, the following options are automatically programmed as indicated:
• Terminal Supervision = Enabled

• Terminal Status Line = Enabled
• Receiving Unit Mode = Enabled
• Event Reminder = Disabled
• Reports Redirected to Terminal = Enabled
• Modem = Disabled
This special application only supports the ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNAL SILENCE, and SYSTEM RESET
network functions and is intended for Protected Premises Fire Alarm System (Local) use only. Local use of a
CRT, printer or other 232 device from the remote FACP is prohibited. No other system network functions can
be implemented due to system contraints. For more information refer to the NAM-232 for Use With AM2020/
AFP1010 Manual, Document 50424.
Rapid Polling
The AM2020/AFP1010 has the option to utilize a rapid polling algorithm to process certain monitor modules on
a priority basis. When used properly, this can result in a much faster response from fire alarm call points (pull
stations) and security devices. If Rapid Polling is enabled, the first 20 module addresses on each LIB SLC
loop are polled more frequently than the other addresses and should be used for high priority input devices
when using this feature. However, as a consequence all other SLC addresses will be polled less frequently. XPM-
8 circuits and output devices (CMX and XPC-8 circuits) should not be assigned addresses in the rapid polling
range.
Supervisory Module ACS Reporting

If selected for reporting, activation of modules with the Software Type ID SUPR or SPSU will cause the primary
(top) LED to light instead of the secondary (bottom) LED for an ACS Annunciator Point. This feature must be
enabled for proper transmission of supervisory signal transmission with ADEMCO contact ID mode on a UDACT
communicator.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-27

Section 1.2 Full System Programming D }X2X
2=FSYS
Option 2 from the Programming Menu walks the programmer through complete initial programming of system-wide
functions. Alarm Verification, Signal-Silence Inhibit, Signal Cut-Out, and the supervision of peripherals are all
programmed under this option, as well as the number of AVPS, APS-6R, LIBs, ISIB and Annunciator Modules in
the system, and SLC Loop styles. The following CRT display illustrates the screen prompts during the installation
of three SLC loops, four Annunciator Modules and the enabling of all optional functions. Refer to Chapter One of
this manual for information on LIB-400 and its correct slot address.
For information on the parameters programmed here, refer to Partial System Programming.
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
IS@LIB@BOARD@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@STYLE@OF@SLC@LOOP@01@(6@OR@4)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6
IS@LIB@BOARD@02@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
IS@LIB@BOARD@03@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
IS@LIB@BOARD@04@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
AM2020
only
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TIME@(5@-@50@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@@@@:@45
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@INHIBIT@TIME@(1@-@255@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@:@60
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@SIGNAL@CUT-OUT@TIME@(1@-@2040@IN@1@SECOND@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@:@1200
Include ENTER@THE@NUMBER@OF@AVPS-24@INSTALLED@IN@THE@SYSTEM@(0@-@16)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4
number of ENTER@ZXXX@OF@HIGHEST@FORWARD@ACTIVATED@ZONE@IN@SYSTEM@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200
devices DO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@SUPERVISION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
employingDO@YOU@WANT@THE@TERMINAL@STATUS@LINE@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
the trouble DO@YOU@WANT@THE@AUXILIARY@PRINTER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
bus here. DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@CONTROL@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"NONA"/"NOA"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
WERE@ALL@ADDRESSABLE@DEVICES@FACTORY-PURCHASED@AFTER@4/1/91?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@"LED@LATCHING"@FOR@MORE@DEVICES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@TRANSMIT@DATA@UNDER@PRINTER@ERROR@CONDITIONS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@BIDIRECTIONAL@COPY@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRIMARY@PRINTER@TROUBLE@INHIBITED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REDIRECT@PRINTER@REPORTS@TO@THE@TERMINAL?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@N
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@LOCAL@MODE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@DETECTOR@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@45
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@MONITOR@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@26
ENTER@MAXIMUM@ADDRESS@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@LOCAL@MODE@(1@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@19
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
SELECT@NFPA@LISTING@-@1=72A,2=72B,3=72C,4=72D,5=71,6=RCV@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@PROGRAM@OR@REMOVE@THIS@LISTING?@(Y=PRG,N=RMV)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@MODIFY@NFPA@LISTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
ENTER@THE@TYPE@OF@BATTERY@INSTALLED@(L=LEAD-ACID,N=NICAD)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
ENTER@THE@BATTERY@CAPACITY@(9@-@32@IN@1@AHR@INCREMENTS)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@32
ENTER@THE@BATTERY@STANDBY@TIME@(4,@24,@48@OR@60@HR)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4
DO@YOU@WANT@24@HOUR@HIGH@RATE@CHARGE@FOR@BATTERY?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
3-28 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

DO@YOU@WANT@THE@EVENT@REMINDER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@DEVICE@BLINK@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PRE-ALARM@FUNCTION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
IS@ANNUNCIATOR@01@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ANNUNCIATOR@1
IS@ANNUNCIATOR@02@TO@BE@INSTALLED@IN@SYSTEM?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N
* ENTER@THE@INTELLIGENT@SIB@ADDRESS@(0@-@249)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :160
* ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@A@(H=HIGH,L=LOW)@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@H
* ENTER@THE@MIB-W@VALUE@THRESHOLD@FOR@CHANNEL@B@(H=HIGH,L=LOW)@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@H
* DO@YOU@WANT@TO@USE@BOTH@MIB@DATA@PORTS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@LOCKOUT@SETTINGS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
* DO@YOU@WANT@ACK/SIL/RES@RE-ENABLED@DURING@LAN@COMM@FAULT?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@A@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
ENTER@HIGH@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z200
DO@YOU@WANT@A@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
ENTER@LOW@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@ZONE@(ZXXX)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z201
DO@ YOU @WANT@ THE @DETECTOR@ VERIFICATION @TROUBLE@ ENABLED?@ (Y=YES,N=NO) @@@@@@ :@ Y
ENTER@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@TROUBLE@COUNT :15
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@REPORT@"SACM"/"SEQM"@MODULE@STATE@CHANGES?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@DRIFT@COMPENSATION@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@PAGER@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@MODEM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THE@NAM@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@N
DO@YOU@WANT@RAPID@POLLING@ENABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@SUPERVISORY@MODULES@TO@ILLUMINATE@ACTIVE@LED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@ :@Y
* These items are NOTI•FIRE•NET™ specific functions and are only programmed when a SIB-NET is used.
See notes in Section 1.1, Partial System Programming.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-29

Section 1.3 Partial Point Programming D }X3X
3=PPRG
Option 3 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the operational parameters of SLC Loop
devices, software-defined zones, and annunciator points.
After selecting option 3 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the Partial Point Programming
submenu:
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Partial Point Programming submenu has six options, where:
1=TYPID Type ID - Changing the Software Type ID of SLC Loop devices, zones and annunciator
points.
2=CBE Control-By-Event - Redefining the Control-By-Event associated with each detector,

module, or zone.
3=LBL Label - Renaming the custom user label for any detector, module, or zone.
4=OPTNS Options - Selecting the optional features associated with any detector or module.
5=AMAP Annunciator Point Mapping - Selecting Annunciator Point Mapping for any detector,
module, or zone.
6=CCBE Cooperative Control-By-Event - Edit the CCBE associated with reverse activated
zones for NOTI•FIRE•NET.
The Partial Point Programming flow chart is located in Figure 1-10. Detailed information on the Partial Point
Programming options follows.
NOTE
Each option under Partial Point Programming prompts the programmer to enter the address of the
detector, module, zone, or annunciator point to be affected. Leading zeros are not required. The
address assumes the following format:
LXX(D/M)YY (for devices) or ZXXX (for zones) or AXXPYY (for annunciator points)
SLC Loop Addressable Detector or Mod- Software-defined Annunciator Annunciator

1 to 10 (AM2020), ule followed by an address in Zone Z1 to Z240 Module 1 to 32 Point 1 to 64
1 to 4 (AFP1010) the range 1 to 99
Example: For the 44th module on SLC Loop 3, enter L3M44
3-30 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

3 = PPRG
Select Partial Point

Programming Submenu
Option 1-6
1 = TYPID
(Change device, zone, or annunciator see Section 1.3.1
point software type ID)
2 = CBE
(change CBE list or equation which
controls interaction between devices, see Section 1.3.2
and software zones)
3 = LBL
(change custom label associated with
each device, and software zone)
see Section 1.3.3
4 = OPTNS
(enable/disable for each device signal see Figure 1-11
silence, walk test, alarm verification,
sensitivity, or tracking)
5 = AMAP
(individually maps devices or software
zones to annunciator points for remote see Figure 1-12
annunciation)
6 = CCBE
(change CCBE equation associated
see Section 1.3.6
with reverse activated zones)
Figure 1-10 Partial Point Programming Flow Chart
Section 1.3.1 Type ID D }X3X1X

1=TYPID
Option 1 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Software Type ID of
any detector, module, zone or annunciator point. This pre-setting of all devices in the system gives the control
panel the ability to execute specific functions for each device type. The following CRT display illustrates the
assignment of the Software Type ID SCON to the 14th monitor module on SLC Loop 3.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@LXX(D/
M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L3M14
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@SCON@
For a complete description of the various Software Type IDs, see Software Type IDs.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-31
Section 1.3.2 Control-By-Event D }X3X2X
2=CBE
Option 2 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Control-By-Event (CBE)
for any detector, module or software zone. The panel maintains a CBE for each device and zone installed in
the system.
NOTE
A software zone is not a physical zone, but rather a software grouping in control panel memory.
When programming a particular device, the control panel prompts the programmer with:
ENTER@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The following CRT screen display illustrates CBE programming for smoke detector number 23 on SLC Loop 2
to activate software zones 15 and 29.
PRESS@1=TYPID,2=CBE,3=LBL,4=OPTNS,5=AMAP,6=CCBE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@L2D23
(Z15@Z29)
For a complete description of the types, parameters, limitations, and guidelines of CBE programming, see
Control-By-Event Programming in Section Four.
Section 1.3.3 Label D }X3X3X

3=LBL
Option 3 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the 20-character custom label
associated with each detector, module, or software zone in the system. Acceptable characters for device or zone
labels are as follows:
Letters A through Z, digits 0 through 9, periods (.), dashes (-), and spaces.
The following CRT display illustrates renaming control module 21 on SLC Loop 1.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@L1M21
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@BELLS@@@
Programming Tip:
Creative use of the custom label feature allows the programmer to be extremely specific in naming each SLC
device. For instance, for a group of addressable devices congregated in a particular area (such as a floor or a
section of a building), map each device to the same software zone and label the zone to serve as an additional 20
characters of information to the individual device labels. Assume Detector 3 initiates an alarm.
Only the first zone listed in the control-by-event (CBE) list of the initiating devices will display the 20-character
label, along with the label of the initiating devices itself when in alarm.
Note: Since Annunciator points do not have individual custom labels, Annunciator addresses are invalid entries
on this menu.
Detectors 1
through 5
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Software Zone all mapped to
the
same Software
Specific location General location
Zone
ALARM: SMOKE(PHOTO) GUEST KITCHEN 3RD FLOOR WEST WING 05:48P 03/01/97 103
The result is a 40-character label that characterizes a particular addressable device.
3-32 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.3.4 Optional Features D
}X3X4X
4=OPTNS
Option 4 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to individually enable or disable, per
device, the functions of Signal Silence and Walk Test (for control modules), Alarm Verification and Sensitivity (for
addressable detectors), and Tracking (addressable detectors and monitor modules). These functions must still be
enabled or disabled, as appropriate, for the entire system (see Partial System Programming). For an explanation
of the functions of Signal Silence, Alarm Verification, Sensitivity, and Tracking, see the Glossary of Terms and
Abbreviations at the end of this manual. The Optional Features flow chart is located in Figure 1-11.
NOTE: The AM2020/AFP1010 will not permit Signal Silence programming for control modules with
Software Type IDs, TELE, PWRC, APND, TPND, and GPND. See Software Type IDs for an explana-
tion of all Software Type IDs.
4 = OPTNS
Enter Addressable Device
(panel determines device entered and branches accordingly)
Addressable
Control Module Monitor Module
Detector
Change
S/W ID Type TELE, PWRC,
All Other S/W ID Types Verification
APND, TPND, or GPND Change No Option?
Tracking
Option?
No
Yes
Change Signal Yes Enable/Disable

Silence Verification Option
No Option?
Change
Enable/Disable
Walk Test
Tracking Option
Option? Yes Change
No
Detector
Sensitivity?
Enable/Disable
Yes Signal Silence No
Option
Yes
Enable/Disable
Walk Test
Option Enter Senstivity
(low, med, or high)
Change
Tracking
No Option?
Change
Day/Night
No Control? Yes
(Address Prompt) Enable/Disable

Yes
Tracking Option
Enable/Disable
Day/Night
Sensitivity
Figure 1-11 Optional Features Flow Chart

Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-33
A control module example:
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L3M20
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y
IS@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y
IS@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
A monitor module example:
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L5M13
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TRACKING@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
An addressable smoke detector example:
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@:@L5D17
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THIS@DETECTORS@VERIFICATION@OPTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@:@Y
IS@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@OPTN@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THIS@DETECTORS@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@M
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@TRACKING@OPTN@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@DAY/NIGHT@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@:@Y
IS@THERE@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@:@Y
NOTE
Control modules that activate monitor modules via physical connections must not have the walk test
option enabled.
Section 1.3.5 Annunciator Mapping D }X3X5X

5=AMAP
Option 5 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to individually map devices or zones to
annunciator points for remote annunciation. The Annunciator Point Mapping Option Flow Chart is located in
Figure 1-12.
Enter Software Zone, Change

Map to an Enter Annunciator
5 = AMAP Addressable Device, or Annunciator Yes
Annunciator?
Yes
Number
Annunciator Point Mapping?
No No
(Address Prompt)
Figure 1-12 Annunciator Mapping Option Flow Chart
3-34 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

The following CRT display illustrates mapping monitor module 11 on SLC Loop 1 to Annunciator Module 1, Point
1.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@:@L1M11
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@CHANGE@THE@ANNUNCIATOR@MAPPING@FOR@THIS@POINT?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A1P1
If an annunciator point has more than one control point mapped to it, then all the control points must have
identical control-by-event and signal silence programming. Each telephone point must have its own distinct
annunciator point for telephone "ring-signal" to function. Each annunciator point must be installed through Full
Point Programming before a device, module, or software zone may be mapped to it.
NOTE
Each detector, module or zone may only be mapped to one annunciator point. Therefore, if it is
desired to map a detector, module or zone to more than one annunciator point; the detector, module
or zone may be mapped to a dummy zone and the dummy zone may be mapped to an annunciator
point. This is for annunciation purposes only. If control is desired from both annunciators, then
custom shadow annunciator software must be used. Contact Notifier for further information.
For annunciator point mapping information on an AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTI•FIRE•NET, refer to
Chapter Two, Operation, in the INA manual, document 15092.
Smoke First Annunciator

L3D64 A1P12
Detector Point
Second Annunciator
Z23 A9P2
Point
Dummy Zone
*Section 1.3.6 Cooperative Control-By-Event D}X3X6X

6=CCBE
Option 6 of the Partial Point Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Cooperative Control-By-
Event (CCBE) for any reverse activated zone when using the AM2020/AFP1010 with the NOTI•FIRE•NET.
NOTE
When programming a particular reverse zone, the control panel prompts the programmer with:
ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The following CRT screen display illustrates CCBE programming for reverse zone number 220 to activate
other zones on NOTI•FIRE•NET network nodes.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@Z220
ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
OR(N8Z1@N8Z2@N8Z3@N8Z4@AND(N9Z1@N9Z2@N9Z3@N9Z4)@AND(N10Z1@N10Z2@N10Z3@N10Z4))
For a complete description of the types, parameters, limitations, and guidelines of CCBE programming, see
Control-By-Event Programming in Section Four.
*This item is a NOTI•FIRE•NET specific function and is only programmed if a SIB-NET is used.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-35
Section 1.4 Full Point Programming D }X4X
4=FPRG
Option 4 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to completely program of all the addressable
detectors, modules, software-defined zones and annunciator points in the AM2020/AFP1010 system. The
programming examples illustrate the CRT screen prompts displayed during Full Point Programming.
For a description of each of the parameters programmed here, refer to Partial Point Programming.
NOTE
The control panel continuously loops back through the Full Point Programming routine, allowing the
programmer to enter devices, software zones or annunciator points one after the other. Use the
Backspace key to exit Full Point Programming.
4 = FPRG
Enter Software Zone, Addressable

Device, or Annunciator Point
(Backspace to Exit Mode)
(panel determines item entered and branches accordingly)
Addressable
Control Module Software Zone Annunciator Point Monitor Module
Detector
Enter Software Enter Software Enter Software Enter Software Enter Software
Type ID Type ID Type ID Type ID Type ID
Enter CBE Enter CBE

Enter CBE List Enter CBE List
Equation Equation/List *
Enter Custom Enter Custom Enter CCBE ** Enter Custom

Label Label (Reverse Zones Label
Only)
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable Enter Custom Enable/Disable
Detector
Signal Silence Label Tracking Option
Verification
Enter Detector
Enable/Disable
Sensitivity Map to
Walk Test Map to
(low, med, or high) Annunciator Annunciator
Point? No No Point?
Enable/Disable
Tracking Yes
Map to Yes
Annunciator Enter Enter
Point? No Annunciator Annunciator
Enable/Disable Day/
Point Point
Night Sensitivity
Control Yes
Enter Annunciator
Point
Map to
Annunciator
Point? No
Yes
Enter * Equation for Reverse Zone,
Annunciator List for Forward Zone
Point ** NOTI•FIRE•NET only
Figure 1-13 Full Point Programming Flow Chart

3-36 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
Example: Programming Addressable Detectors
Photoelectric Smoke Detector on SLC LOOP 2 programmed to activate two software zones (Z13, Z29) and a
control module (L2M19), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "02".
PRESS@1=PSYS,2=FSYS,3=PPRG,4=FPRG,5=REMV,6=PSWD,7=MSG,8=HIS@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT@@@@:@L2D23
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@PHOT
(Z13@Z29@L2M19)@
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@DETECTOR@
IS@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@OPTN@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO):@Y
ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@H
IS@THERE@DAY/NIGHT@SENSITIVITY@CONTROL@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@AXXPYY@FOR@ANNUNCIATOR@POINT@MAPPING@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@A2P2
Example: Programming Annunciator Points

Installation of individual annunciator points.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@:@A12P10
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@ADET
Example: Programming Monitor Modules

Monitor Module on SLC Loop 3 programmed to monitor a full zone of conventional 4-wire smoke detectors,
and activate a software zone (Z13), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "03".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@:@L3M15
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@SCON
(Z13)@
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@BASEMENT@DETECTORS
IS@THE@TRACKING@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
Example: Programming Control Modules

Control Module on SLC Loop 2 programmed to turn on in response to an alarm condition on either of two
software zones (Z13 or Z29), and also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "04".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@:@L2M19
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@CON
OR(Z13@Z29)@
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@MAIN@LOBBY@BELLS
IS@THE@SIGNAL@SILENCE@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@:@Y
IS@THE@WALK@TEST@OPTION@TO@BE@ENABLED@FOR@THIS@DEVICE?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
NOTE
Control modules that activate monitor modules via physical connections must not have the walk
test option enabled.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-37

Example: Programming Software Zones
Software Zone 13 programmed as a forward zone to activate two other software zones (Z15 and Z29), and
also mapped to annunciator module address "02" point "05".
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@:@Z13
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@FZON
(Z15@Z29)@
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@FIRST@FLOOR
Reverse zones on an AM2020/AFP1010 system with NOTI•FIRE•NET can be programmed with both CBE
and CCBE equations. Below is an example of Zone 220 programmed as a reverse zone to activate zones on
other network nodes.
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@INSTALL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@:@Z220
ENTER@TYPE@ID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@RZON
(@)@
* ENTER@COOPERATIVE@CONTROL-BY-EVENT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
* OR(N8Z1@N8Z2@N8Z3@N8Z4@AND(N9Z1@N9Z2@N9Z3@N9Z4)@AND(N10Z1@N10Z2@N10Z3@N10Z4))
ENTER@20@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@LABEL@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@LIBRARY@@@@@@@@@@@@@
DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@MAPPED@TO@AN@ANNUNCIATOR?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
* This item is a NOTI•FIRE•NET specific function and is only programmed when a SIB-NET is used.
3-38 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.5 Remove D }X5X
5=REMV
Option 5 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to remove (from control panel memory) SLC
Loop devices, software-defined zones or annunciator points. The devices can still be installed in the system,
but the AM2020/AFP1010 will stop looking for these devices by not addressing them.
NOTES
• Devices that are removed from the system's program will not function in any capacity until reinstalled
under Full Point Programming. CAUTION - devices that have had their LEDs latched ON must be returned
to their normal state before removal (execute System Reset for detectors or control OFF for modules).
• Unacknowledged points must be acknowledged prior to removal.
The programming example below illustrates the CRT screen prompts during removal of an SLC Loop device
(smoke detector 34 on SLC Loop 10).
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@REMOVAL@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@:@L10D34
Section 1.6 Password D }X6X

6=PSWD
Option 6 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the Level One and Level Two
passwords for the AM2020/AFP1010.
NOTES
• The AM2020/AFP1010s are shipped with initial Level One and Level Two passwords of 00000. As a
security measure, the control panel does not echo password digits to the DIA and CRT screen. Rather,
it displays an asterisk (*) for each digit entered. After entering five password digits, pressing ENTER
(on the DIA) or RETURN (on the CRT) places the new password into operation.
• Acceptable characters for a password are the digits 0-9.
PRESS@1=LEVEL@ONE,2=LEVEL@TWO@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
@@@@@ENTER@LEVEL@TWO@PASSWORD:@*****
A Forgotten Password?
If a Level One or Level Two password is incorrectly entered, the panel will respond by displaying a special
code word and prompt the programmer to reenter the password. If the password has been forgotten, record
this code word and contact NOTIFIER. After proper authentication, the original password can be determined
from deciphering the code word. An example of this code word follows:
@@@ENTER@LEVEL@ONE@PASSWORD:@*****
@@INVALID@PASSWORD:@@@@@@@7129406@@@@@@@@@REENTER@PASSWORD:
Section 1.7 Message D }X7X

7=MSG
Option 7 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the 40-Character Custom User Label
for the system. Acceptable characters for the label include Letters A though Z, digits 0 through 9, periods (.),
dashes (-), and spaces.
ENTER@40@CHARACTER@CUSTOM@USER@LABEL@@:@NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-39

Section 1.8 History Mode D }X8X
8=HIS
Option 8 from the Programming Menu allows the programmer to change the parameters associated with History
Mode. Once the History option is enabled, the AM2020/AFP1010 has the capability to store the most recent 400
system events.
8 = HIS
Select History
Submenu Option 1-3
1 = START
(Starts the recording of events
into the history file)
2 = STOP
(Stops the recording of events (Exit Prog Mode)
into the history file)
3 = CLEAR
(Clears out selected number of Enter # of Events to be
oldest events from history file) Cleared
Figure 1-14 History File Option Flow Chart
After selecting option 8 from the Main Programming menu, the display will show the History Mode Programming
submenu:
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
3-40 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

The History Mode Programming submenu has three options as described below:
1=START D }X8X1X
This option allows the programmer to start storing events into the panel's history file. The following example
enables history mode:
PRESS@1=START,2=STOP,3=CLEAR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
2=STOP D }X8X2X
This option allows the programmer to stop storing events into the panel's history file. The following example
disables history mode:
3=CLEAR D }X8X3X
This option allows the programmer to clear out of history file memory a selected number (1-N, where N represents
the number of stored events) of the oldest history events recorded. The following example illustrates this by
clearing out the entire history file.
ENTER@NUMBER@ENTRIES@TO@CLEAR@(1@-@400)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@400
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-41

3-42 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
Section Two
The Alter Status Menu
The Alter Status Mode is accessed by entering the following (level 1 password required):
C|X
After entering the Alter Status Mode, the display will show the Alter Status menu:
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Alter Status menu has six options, where:
1=DIS Disable - Disabling or enabling any individual addressable detector, module, or soft-
ware zone in the system.
2=CTL Control - Manually turning on and off a control module.
3=DSEN Detector Sensitivity - Altering the sensitivity of any of the addressable detectors in
the system.
4=TIME Time - Resetting the system time/date clock.
5=DIAG Diagnostics - Performing system diagnostics.
6=WALK Walk Test - Allows the programmer to select which Loop Interface Boards will partici-
pate in walk test and generates the walk test reports.
7=GZON Group Zone - Allows the programmer to select which zone (and its associated points)
to be disabled or enabled as a group.
The Alter Status Menu flow chart is located in Figure 2-1. Detailed information on the Alter Status options
follows.
NOTE
When an AM2020/AFP1010 with NOTI•FIRE•NET is in walk test mode, a trouble condition will
appear for that AM2020/AFP1010 node at the INA and/or NRT.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-43

Press
ALTER STATUS
key
Enter Level 1
Password
Valid
No Error Message
Password?
Yes
Select Alter Status

Menu Option 1-7
1 = DIS
(enable/disable of devices or see Section 2.1
software zone)
2 = CTL
(manually turn on/off a see Section 2.2
control module)
3 = DSEN
(alter sensitivity of any see Section 2.3
addressable detector)
4 = TIME
(set the panel time/date see Section 2.4
clock)
5 = DIAG
(perform system see Section 2.5
diagnostics)
6 = WALK
(specify LIBs for Walk Test, see Section 2.6
and Walk Test reports)
7 = GZON
(Group Zone disable or see Section 2.7
enable)
Figure 2-1 Alter Status Menu Flow Chart
Section 2.1 Disable Point C |X1X

1=DIS
Option 1 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to disable and subsequently re-enable individual
devices or zones. When a device is disabled, it is no longer polled by the AM2020/AFP1010.
The following example illustrates disabling monitor module 4 on SLC Loop 1.

NOTE
The programmer should NEVER disable a point that is in alarm.
The programmer should never turn on (using option 2 of the Alter Status Menu) or program a disabled point.
Telephone (TELE) and remote page (PAGE) Type IDs can not be disabled.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@LXX(D/M)YY,@ZXXX@OR@AXXPYY@FOR@PT.@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT):@L1M4
* DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@POINT@DISABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ :@Y
Note: Disable does not affect annunciator points.

* Programming 15088:K 3/21/01
3-44
Section 2.2 Control Module C |X2X
2=CTL
Option 2 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to selectively turn on or off control modules from
the control panel.
The following example illustrates turning on control module 22 on SLC Loop 1.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
ENTER@LXXMYY@FOR@CONTROL@MODULE@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@L1M22
DO@YOU@WANT@POINT@TO@BE@ON@OR@OFF?@(Y=ON,N=OFF)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
Section 2.3 Detector Sensitivity C |X3X

3=DSEN
Option 3 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to alter the sensitivity of any addressable detector.
The sensitivity of a detector can be set at one of three levels - low, medium and high. Refer to Chapter Two,
Section 8 of this manual for information on sensitivity levels and drift compensation.
The following example illustrates setting a high sensitivity for Detector 14 on SLC Loop 3.
ENTER@LXXDYY@FOR@DETECTOR@TO@CHANGE@(BCKSPC@TO@ABORT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@L3D14
ENTER@THE@DETECTOR@SENSITIVITY@SELECTION@FOR@THIS@DEVICE@(L=LOW,M=MED,H=HIGH):@H
Section 2.4 Time C |X4X

4=TIME
Option 4 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to reset the time/date system clock.
ENTER@THE@MONTH@(1@-@12)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3
ENTER@THE@DAY-OF-MONTH@(1@-@31)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@THE@YEAR@(0@-@99)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@93
ENTER@THE@DAY-OF-WEEK@(1=SUN,...,7=SAT)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@2
ENTER@THE@HOURS@IN@MILITARY@TIME@(0@-@23)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@15
ENTER@THE@MINUTES@(0@-@59)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@37
NOTIFIER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@ALL@SYSTEMS@NORMAL@@03:37P@03/01/97
NOTES
• Military time and conventional time are the same for the hours of 1:00 am to noon. To convert
conventional time to military time for the hours of 1:00 pm to midnight remove the colon from the
conventional time and add the resulting number to 1200. Example: 1:34 pm conventional time is
134 + 1200 = 1334 hours military time (13 hours and 34 minutes).
• On the NOTI•FIRE•NET system, the time and date are synchronized every hour by the master
clock node on the network. The last AM2020/AFP1010, INA, or NRT on the network where the time
and date were manually programmed is the master clock node.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-45

Section 2.5 Diagnostics C |X5X
5=DIAG
Option 5 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to perform system diagnostics.
The Diagnostics Option submenu is shown below:
PRESS@1=RVER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@@
1=RVER - Reset Detector Verification Counters C |X5X1X

This option allows the programmer to reset the detector verification counters for all installed intelligent detectors
and clear all detector verification error conditions.
The detector verification counter associated with each detector indicates how many times that detector has en-
tered the alarm verification routine without producing a valid fire alarm.
The following example illustrates the execution of this option:
PRESS@1=RVER@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@RESET@THE@DETECTOR@VERIFICATION@COUNTERS?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@:@Y
Section 2.6 Walk Test C |X6X

6=WALK
Option 6 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to select which LIBs will participate in walk test.
Upon completion of walk test, the programmer will be able to choose from the optional walk test reports.
After Selecting option 6 from the Alter Status menu, the display will show the Walk Test submenu:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:
The Walk Test submenu has six options, where:
1=SEL Select - Select which LIB boards will participate in Walk Test.
2=UNP Unprogrammed Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for un-
programmed devices in the area designated for Walk Test that are connected to the SLC
but not defined in the panel database.
3=UNI Uninstalled Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for
uninstalled devices in the area designated for Walk Test that have been defined in the
panel data base but not physically installed on the SLC.
4=TEST Tested Devices Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for tested de-
vices in the area designated for Walk Test.
5=UNTST Untested Device Report - Allows the programmer to generate a report for untested
devices in the area designated for Walk Test.
6=EXIT Exit Walk Test - Allows the programmer to exit/abort the Walk Test Mode.
3-46 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

6 = WALK
Select Walk Test

Submenu Option 1-6
Yes
Enter
1 = SEL Enter LIB # Included
Another LIB No
(select LIBs for Walk Test) in Test
for Test?
(Exit Alter Status Mode, see

2 = UNP notes under 1=SEL)
(generates report for
unprogrammed devices)
3 = UNI
(generates report for
uninstalled devices)
Enter LIB # for Test Request/Abort
Report Test Report
4 = TEST
(generates report for tested
devices) (Prints report, Exit Alter Status Mode)
5 = UNTST
(generates report for untested
devices)
6 = EXIT
(Exits Walk Test Option) (Exit Alter Status Mode)
Figure 2-2 Walk Test Option Flow Chart
1=SEL - Select C | X6X1X

This option allows the programmer to select which LIBs will participate in Walk Test. The following example selects
LIBs 1 and 3 for Walk Test:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@TO@BE@INCLUDED@IN@WALK@TEST@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@MORE@LIBS@FOR@WALK@TEST?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@TO@BE@INCLUDED@IN@WALK@TEST@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@3
DO@YOU@WANT@TO@ENABLE@MORE@LIBS@FOR@WALK@TEST?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@N
NOTES
• Upon completion of the walk test LIB selection, a system trouble is generated to indicate the control
panel is operating under limited fire protection. Only the LIBs selected for walk test are affected.
• Each LIB collects information immediately after it is selected. The programmer should not generate a
walk test report until 20 seconds after LIB selection or the report will be missing data and should be
considered invalid. If this happens, abort the walk test and start again.
• If one or more LIBs have been selected for walk test, additional LIBs cannot be selected without exiting
walk test.
• For every intelligent addressable device activated during walk test, a walk test count message is sent
to the printer.
• Conventional devices attached to an addressable device with a Software Type ID of SCON (or
equivalent) can not be individually tested with walk test, because walk test does not perform a reset on
PWRC (or equivalent) devices. Do not perform a System Reset during a Walk Test. System Reset does
not function properly while in Walk Test mode of operation and may result in unwanted activation of
various output modules. If a system reset occurs during a Walk Test, exit Walk Test mode and re-enter.
• Walk Test will automatically abort if no devices are tested for 15 minutes.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-47
C | X6X(2,3,4 5)X or
2=UNP - Unprogrammed Device Report
3=UNI - Uninstalled Device Report
4=TEST - Tested Device Report
5=UNTST - Untested Device Report
These options allow the programmer to generate the desired Walk Test report. These reports are generated
on a LIB basis. They use the same display format as the Point Read option under Read Status except for the
status field which is report-specific (no Control-by-Event or annunciator point mapping is reported). The
results of the report are not displayed on the CRT screen but are printed out on the printer.
1=REQUEST Begins the selected report.

2=ABORT Aborts the selected report in progress.
NOTE
Only one report can be conducted at any one time.
WARNING: Do not reset the Control Panel while in Walk Test mode. Execution of a System Reset during a
Walk Test may cause unwanted activation of various output modules (CMX, XPC, etc.). If a Sys-
tem Reset occurs during a Walk Test, exit Walk Test Mode and re-enter.
The following CRT screen illustrates conducting a Tested Device Report. The printout of this test is illustrated
in Figure 2-3.
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4
ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@FOR@WALK@TEST@REPORT@(1@-@10) :@1
PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@BEGIN@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@END@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
6=EXIT - Exit Walk Test C |X6X6X

This option allows the programmer to exit/abort Walk Test. In order to exit/abort Walk Test Mode, reenter
Alter Status Mode and choose option 6 from the Walk Test submenu.
The following example demonstrates exiting/aborting Walk Test:
PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@6
NOTE
Upon exiting/aborting Walk Test, the Walk Test system trouble is cleared and the AM2020/AFP1010
resumes full fire protection.
3-48 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Smoke Detector Activation During Walk Test
Activation of smoke detectors during Walk Test for the Series 500 smoke detectors can be accomplished by
placing the optional Test Magnet (System Sensor model number M02-24) against the cover opposite the test
module socket, as shown below:
The LEDs should track within 10 seconds indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. (The LEDs will turn off
when the magnet is removed.) If Alarm Verification is enabled for the detector, the magnet will have to be held in
place for a longer time until the system verification is completed.
The Series 700 smoke detectors can be activated during Walk Test by placing the Test Magnet against the cover
between LED 1 and the test module socket in the area shown below:
The LEDs should track within 30 seconds, indicating an alarm and annunciating the panel. (The LEDs will turn off
when the magnet is removed.)
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-49

PRESS@1=SEL,2=UNP,3=UNI,4=TEST,5=UNTST,6=EXIT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@4
ENTER@LIB@NUMBER@FOR@WALK@TEST@REPORT@(1@-@10)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
PRESS@1=REQUEST,2=ABORT@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@1
LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@BEGIN@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
TEST01@SMOKE@(ION)@@OFFICE@AREA@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@101
TEST01@SMOKE(PHOTO)@FACTORY@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@102
TEST01@HEAT(ANALOG)@MAINTENANCE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@103
TEST01@MONITOR@@@@@@FIRST@AID@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@104
TEST03@CONTROL@@@@@@FIRST@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@101
TEST02@CONTROL@@@@@@SECOND@FLOOR@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@102
LIB@01@TESTED@DEVICE@REPORT@END@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@04:32P@03/01/00
Troubleshooting Tip: The test count indicates the number of

times the device has been activated during Walk Test. If two
devices have been mistakenly set to the same address, and
these two devices are activated once each during walk test, a
TEST02 indication will be indicated for one device and the
missing device address will not show up on the report at all.
Figure 2-3 Printout of an AM2020/AFP1010 Walk Test Report
3-50 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 2.7 Group Zone Disable C |X7X
7=GZON
Option 7 from the Alter Status Menu allows the programmer to disable and subsequently re-enable all
appropriately mapped points (input devices and zones) associated with a particular software zone. When a
point is disabled, it is no longer polled by the AM2020/AFP1010.
When a zone is disabled using this feature, a trouble message is generated for this zone. Then the entire CBE
database is searched for all input devices and zones, looking for this "group" zone to be the first zone in each
point's individual CBE. A trouble message will be generated for each point (input device or zone) matching the
above criteria as it is found and disabled. During the search process the user interface is locked out.
The following example illustrates group disabling Zone 2.
NOTE:
The programmer should never program a disabled point.
PRESS@1=DIS,2=CTL,3=DSEN,4=TIME,5=DIAG,6=WALK,7=GZON@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@7
ENTER@ZXXX@FOR@ GROUP @ZONE @CHANGE@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Z2
DO@YOU@WANT@THIS@GROUP@ZONE@DISABLED?@(Y=YES,N=NO)@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@:@Y
Example: Point CBE

Z1 ( )
Z2 ( )
Z3 ( )
As a result of disabling Z2 using the group
L1D1 (Z1) zone disable function, L1D2 and L1M2 will
L1D2 (Z2) automatically be disabled as well.
L1D3 (Z3)
L1M1 (Z1)
L1M2 (Z2)
L1M3 (Z3)
The "first zone" does not necessarily mean being the first operand in a CBE. A zone can be located anywhere
within the CBE. The following CBE examples all have the same effect for group zone functions:
(Z1)
(Z1 L1M1)
(L1M1 Z1)
(L1M1 L1M2 Z1 Z2)
Z1 is the first zone found in each individual CBE.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-51

Section Three
Software Type IDs
All point addresses for devices, software zones, and annunciator points must be programmed with an appropriate
Software Type identification. Software Type IDs allow the AM2020/AFP1010 to identify the type and configuration
of specific devices, zones, and annunciator points associated with the panel.
Each Type ID is categorized by groups. There are 18 separate groups of Software Type IDs which are defined in
the tables on the following pages. Each table consists of the following format.
Type ID - This is the software type entered by the programmer for a particular point.
Display Label - The characters displayed for addressable devices, zones, and annunciator points on the control
panel during alarm, trouble, and read status conditions.
Type of Device - Type of devices compatible with, and/or description of operating parameters for, the particular Type ID
The control panel will not permit the changing of a Software Type ID in one group to a Software Type ID in another
group. To accomplish this, the device must be reinstated with the Software Type ID of the desired group by using
the Full Point Programming option of the Main Programming Menu.
NOTE: The XP Transponder will revert to Local Mode program operation upon loss of communications with the AM2020/
AFP1010. Therefore, use extreme care when assigning Software Type IDs to XP Transponder circuits. For instance, an
XP circuit assigned Software Type ID SPSU will initiate a supervisory condition under communication with the AM2020/
AFP1010, but will result in an alarm condition under local XP operation.
Group 1: Addressable Detectors
Type ID Display Label Type of Device
CMBO SMOKE(COMBO) IPX-751 Intelligent Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/Thermal Detector.

FAPT-751 Acclimate™ Multi-sensor (Photo-Thermal)
FPHT FIXED PHOT D SDX-551/751 Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector with a fixed
sensitivity level. (This software type is obsolete and should not be used).
FTHR FIXED THER D FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor with a fixed sensitivity level. (This
Software Type ID can only be used in Canadian applications and does not meet
UL sensitivity requirements for use in the U.S.).
ION SMOKE(ION) CPX-551/751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector.
IOND ION DUCT DET CPX-551-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector with a fixed sensitivity
level. (The sensitivity of this detector can not be adjusted. All other detector
functions will be equivalent to type ION). This detector is used in conjunction
with the DHX-501 or DHX-502 duct detector housing.
IONL SMOKE ION LP CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector. (This Software Type ID can
only be used in Canadian applications and has the same programming options
as type ION).
IONH SMOKE ION HP CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector. (This Software Type ID can
only be used in Canadian applications and has the same programming options
as type ION).
IONV SMOKE (IONV) Same as ION. This software type is to be used in elevator lobbies where a
Supervisory conditon is to be repor ted while an alarm is being verified via
detector verification.
PHOT SMOKE(PHOTO) SDX-551/751 Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector.The SDX-551/751

photo detector does not require a different Software Type ID when used with
the DHX-501 or DHX-502 duct detector housing.
PHOV SMOKE (PHOTV) Same as PHOT. This software type is to be used in elevator lobbies where a
Supervisory conditon is to be repor ted while an alarm is being verified via
detector verification.
THER HEAT(ANALOG) FDX-551 or FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Sensor.
3-52 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Group 2: Output Modules
• These Software Type IDs cannot be programmed for Signal Silence.
• These Software Type IDs do not have any control-by-event programming.
• If the Software Type ID requires Form-C relay function, the two tabs on the CMX must be broken.
Otherwise, the tabs must not be broken.

APND ALARMS PEND CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will
activate upon receipt of an alarm condition, and remain in the ON state until all
alarms have been ACKNOWLEDGED.
DACT DACT CONNECT CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C (in
relay mode) that will delay the reporting of AC power loss. Any other trouble
condition will be reported immediately. This module is used in conjunction with a
digital alarm communicator.
GAC GN ALRM FORC CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay,an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C
(in relay mode) to switch power to a Reverse Polarity Trip Device for NFPA 72
Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems applications (RPT-680 required). This type
can also be used for general alarm activation.
GAS GN ALARM CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) config-
ured as a Municipal Box Transmitter for NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems
applications (MBT-1 required). This Type ID can also be used for general alarm
activation.
GPND GENERAL PEND CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will
activate upon receipt of an alarm and/or trouble condition, and remain in the
ON state until all events have been ACKNOWLEDGED.
GTC GN TRBL FORC CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C
(in relay mode) activated under any System Trouble condition.
PAGE PAGE CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) config-
ured for remote paging (RPJ-1 required).
PWRC POWER (CONV) CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay or an XP5-C (in relay mode)
used to momentarily interrupt power (during system reset) to conventional 4-wire
smoke detectors powered from a remote main power supply.
SSC GN SUPR FORC CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C
(in relay mode) activated under any Supervisory condition (includes sprinkler type).
TELE TELEPHONE CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) config-
ured for telephone operation. Note: The CMX and XP5-C will not provide a ring-
back signal when a call is placed.
TPND TRBLS PEND CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will
activate upon receipt of a trouble condition, and remain in the ON state until all
troubles have been ACKNOWLEDGED.
TRC TROUBLE FORC CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C
(in relay mode) that will activate upon receipt of a trouble condition(s) and remain
in the ON state until the trouble(s) clear(s).
TRS TROUBLE CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode) that will
activate upon receipt of a trouble condition(s) and remain in the ON state until
the trouble(s) clear(s).
WFC GN WAT FORC CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an XP5-C
(in relay mode) activated under any Water Flow condition.
WFS GN WATER FLW CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC module mode)
configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit, activated under any Water Flow
alarm condition.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-53
Group 3: Software Zones

FZON FORWARD ZONE A software-defined zone that is forward-activating.
RZON REVERSE ZONE A software-defined zone that is reverse-activating.
• A Forward-Activating Zone is a software zone in control panel memory which once activated by an
addressable input device or other forward zone may in turn activate other zones and/or addressable
output devices directly. Zones and output devices activated by a forward zone are contained in the CBE
List of that forward zone, or the zone may be listed in the CBE of the addressable output device.
• A Reverse-Activating Zone is a software zone in control panel memory which if not activated directly
by an addressable input device or forward zone may be activated through an associated CBE equation.
A Reverse Zone may be listed in other CBE Equations.
Group 4: Alarm Initiation Modules

MON MONITOR MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to
monitor normally-open contact, shorting-type devices other than 4-wire
smoke detectors (i.e. conventional heat detectors, pull stations, etc.).
MPUL MON PULL STA BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station.
NCMN MON NORM CLD MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to
monitor normally-closed contact, opening-type devices.
NOA NON ALARM MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit that
functions identically to Software Type ID NONA with one exception -
subsequent alarms from this Type ID will not reactivate silenced output
devices - once silenced, outputs will remain silenced until reactivated by
another Software Type ID (or cleared by System Reset and reactivated).
NONA NON ALM MON MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to
monitor normally-open contact, shorting-type non-alarm devices. Activa-
tion of a module with Software Type ID NONA will not initiate a fire alarm
condition:
• System Alarm LED will not illuminate.
• Does not activate alarm status line count on a CRT.
• No affect on modules programmed as APND (alarm pending)
or GPND (general event pending).
• Alarm, clear alarm, or acknowledgments are not reported for
this type.
PULL PULL STATION BGX-10 Addressable Manual Pull Station.
SCON SMOKE (CONV) MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor conventional
4-wire smoke detectors. This module has a longer reset period than
modules programmed as MON.
WAT WATER FLOW MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated
to a Water Flow Alarm device.
3-54 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Group 5: Output Modules
CMXC CMX FORM C CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an
XP5-C (in relay mode).
CMXS CMX CONTROL CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode)
configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit.
CON CONTROL CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode)
configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit.
FORC FORM C RELAY CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an
XP5-C (in relay mode)
FRCM FORMC MANUAL CMX Control Module configured as a Form-C relay, an XPR-8 relay, or an
XP5-C (in relay mode). This device is not deactivated when a system reset
occurs. This module can be used for some fan control applications and can
be mapped only to an AFCM annunciator point.
SPKR SPEAKER CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-C (in NAC mode)
configured as a speaker circuit.
Note: Each Type ID listed above is prompted for Signal Silence during programming. If the silence option has been
programmed for these addressable devices, they can be turned off using the Control OFF function under the Alter Status
Menu or by pushing the appropriate annunciator point switch. Of the above Type IDs, only CON, FORC, and SPKR can
be silenced by pressing the Signal Silence button, initiating a partial signal silence. If the Software Type ID requires Form-
C relay function, the two tabs on the CMX must be broken. Otherwise, the tabs must not be broken.
Group 6: Supervisory/Security Modules

SACM ACCESS MONTR MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device.
This module will be activated by an open or a short condition. Activation of a
module with this Software Type ID will not initiate a security alarm condition:
• Security Alarm LED will not illuminate.
• Does not activate trouble status line count on a CRT.
• No effect on modules programmed as TPND (trouble
pending) or GPND (general event pending).
• Trouble, clear trouble or acknowledgments are not reported
for this type.
SARM AREA MONITOR MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device.
This module will be activated by either an open or a short condition and
produces a SECURITY ALARM message in the display.
SEQM EQUIP MONITR MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit that functions identically to Type
ID SACM.
SPSU SPRNKLR MNTR MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated to
a normally open sprinkler supervisory switch. Activation of a module with
Software Type ID SPSU will generate a trouble condition (produces a
SPRNKLR TROUBLE message) not an alarm. The option of Tracking
(troubles self-restore) is automatically selected for this software type.
SSYM SYSTEM MONTR MMX Monitor Module or an XP5-M circuit used to monitor a security device.
This module will be activated by either an open or a short condition and
produces a SECURITY TAMPER message in the display.
SUPR SPRVSRY MNTR MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit dedicated to
a normally open supervisory switch. Activation of a module with Software
Type ID SUPR will generate a trouble condition (produces a SUPRVSRY
SIGNAL message) not an alarm.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-55
Group 7: Evacuation Modules
EVGA GN ALARM EVC CMX Control Module, an XPC-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit (in NAC
mode) configured as a Notification Appliance Circuit, activated on General
Alarm, for NFPA 72 Local Fire Alarm Systems applications.
Note: This software type cannot be silenced if a module of Software Type ID WAT (Water Flow) has been activated.
Group 8: Annunciator Control
AAST ANN ACK/STEP Annunciator Point used to execute ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP.
ALMP ANN LAMP TST Annunciator Point used to execute LAMP TEST.
ARES ANN RESET Annunciator Point used to execute SYSTEM RESET.
ASGS ANN SIG SIL Annunciator Point used to execute SIGNAL SILENCE.
Group 9: Annunciator Zone

AZON ANN ZONE Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any software zone mapped
to it.
Group 10: Annunciator Detector
ADET ANN DETECTOR Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any intelligent detector
mapped to it.
Group 11: Annunciator Module
AMON ANN MONITOR Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any MMX Monitor Module,
XPM-8 circuit, or XP5-M circuit mapped to it.
Group 12: Annunciator Input

AINP ANN INPUT Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any generic input (software
zone, intelligent detector, monitor module, XPM-8 circuit or XP5-M circuit)
mapped to it.
Note: Items in groups 9,10 and 11 may be re-mapped to group 12 only.
3-56 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Group 13: Annunciator Output
ACON ANN CONTROL Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any CMX Control Module, XPC-8
circuit, XPR-8 relay, or XP5-C circuit mapped to it. This annunciator point can also
be used for manual control of relays, speaker and notification circuits.
AFCM ANN FORC MAN Annunciator Point that is not deactivated upon system reset. Used for fan
control and similar applications only with an FRCM control
device.
Group 14: Annunciator Telephone

Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any CMX Control Module or
ATEL ANN TELEPHON
XPC-8 or XP5-C circuit configured for telephone operation. This annuncia-
tor point can also control the state (connect/disconnect) of the circuit.
Group 15: Annunciator Supervisory

ASUP ANN SUPRVSRY Annunciator Point that indicates the state of any SPSU or SUPR module
mapped to it.
Group 16: Trouble Module

MTRB TRBL MONITOR MMX Monitor Module, an XPM-8 circuit, or an XP5-M circuit used to
monitor any trouble contacts external to the system. This module will be ac-
tivated by either an open or a short condition, and produces a POINT
TROUBLE message in the display. A Control-By-Event equation need
not be entered for this type since it only produces a trouble signal, not an
alarm.
Note: This software type can be used to monitor power from an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) under
NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems applications or to monitor remote Main Power Supply in XP
Transponder systems.
Group 17: Page Module

MPAG MONITOR PAGE MMX Monitor Module or an XPM-8 circuit or XP5-M circuit dedicated to a normally
open switch. Activation of a module with Software Type ID MPAG connects the
remotely located Fire Fighter's Telephone handset to the paging system. This Type
ID is used in conjunction with the PAGE Type ID (RPJ-1 required).
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-57

Group 18: Annunciator Manual Mode
AMAN ANN MANUAL Annunciator Point that indicates manual mode for an annunciator module.
The annunciator point can also turn the manual mode off or on. This Type
ID is used in conjunction with INA ACS or FACP shadow point programming.
3-58 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Section Four
Control-By-Event Programming
4.1 Control-By-Event Programming
Introduction
Control-By-Event (CBE) Programming is used to provide a variety of responses based on various
combinations of events (initiating conditions). The Control-By-Event Programming controls the interaction
between the alarm initiating devices, the internal software zones, and the alarm notification appliances
associated with an AM2020/AFP1010.
NOTE
Software Zones
The AM2020/AFP1010 contains 240 software zones to be used in CBE programming. These software zones
are broken into two types, Forward-Activating Zones (FZON) and Reverse-Activating Zones (RZON). These
forward and reverse zones must be grouped separately in the system's programming, with the forward group
always preceding by lower zone number the reverse group. This is accomplished by setting the Zone Boundary
(see Section 1.1.5, Zone Boundary, for more information on setting the zone boundary). Once the boundary is
set, all software zone numbers above the Zone Boundary are RZONs and all software zones below and including
the Zone Boundary are FZONs.
Forward-Activating Zones
FZONs are used to activate addressable output devices and/or other software zones. The software zones that
can be activated, however, must have a higher zone number than the FZON being utilized.
Reverse Activating Zones

RZONs are activated from addressable input devices and/or other software zones. The software zones that can
be used to activate a reverse zone must have a lower zone number than the RZON being activated.
Lists and Equations

Control-By-Event Programming can be accomplished in two ways, via the List and the Equation. Lists are
used for addressable initiating devices (detectors and monitor modules) and forward activating zones, where as,
Equations are used for addressable output devices (control modules) and reverse activating zones.
When an addressable initiating device or forward-activating zone is programmed with a List, the AM2020/AFP1010
activates all the items, called Operands, in the list when activation of the device or zone occurs. The operands
listed for an addressable initiating device can be notification modules and/or software zones (forward or reverse
activating). For a forward activating zone, the operands can be forward zones that are higher than its address,
reverse activating zones and/or addressable control modules.
Example:
A photoelectric detector has a List of (L1M1 L2M2), where L1M1 and L2M2 are control modules. When the
detector is in alarm, all the items in the Control-By-Event List are enabled so both control modules are
activated.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-59

The real power of the CBE Programming comes from the equation, which is evaluated by the control panel to
determine a variety of alarm initiating conditions. The equation provides the real decision-making ability
through the use of an operator acting on a set of operands. The operands for an output module can be addressable
initiating devices, software zones (forward or reverse-activating), or addressable control modules assigned an
address lower than its own. For a reverse-activating zone, the operands can be addressable initiating devices,
forward zones, or reverse zones that are lower than its address.
The format for an equation is shown below, where the operators are OR, AND, NOT, XZONE, DEL, SDEL, and
TIM; and the operands are groupings of initiating devices and/or software zones, as well as information
specific to the format of individual operators.
Operator(- - - - Operands - - - -)
Examples: OR(Z9 Z15 Z23)

AND(L1D1 Z3 L1D35 L1D72)
NOT(Z23)
XZONE(Z23)
DEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (L1M1))
SDEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1))
TIM(SU MO TU WE TR FR SA HH.MM HH.MM)
All of the operator formats above are explained in detail on the following pages.
Control-By-Event Programming Constraints

• There can only be one DEL or SDEL operator in a control-by-event equation, not both.
• If there is no duration time field in a DEL or SDEL, the equation will always be activated.
• The maximum value of DELAY TIME + DURATION TIME is 255:59:59.
• If either the day, month or year field is omitted, that field is assumed to be all allowable values of the
field omitted. Example: 12--90 is equivalent to any day in December 1990.
• The HH.MM field for START TIME and STOP TIME uses military time.
• The HH.MM field for STOP TIME must be greater than the START TIME.
• The maximum value of START TIME or STOP TIME is 24:00.
• If an alarm condition occurs, all active TIM devices will be deactivated. All TIM equations will be
ignored until all alarms are restored, at which point all TIM devices will return to their proper state.
See Section 4.3, Size Limitations for the constraints on the size, in bytes, of the CBE.
3-60 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

4.2 Operators
OR
Operator: The first (and most useful) operator is OR. Z9 Z15 Z23
Equation: OR(Z9 Z15 Z23)
If ANY one of the three operands in the equation

are in alarm, then the control module will be activated.
IF Software Zone 9 is in alarm OR L1M3

IF Software Zone 15 is in alarm OR CMX
IF Software Zone 23 is in alarm,
OR(Z9 Z15 Z23)
THEN this control module will be activated.
AND
Operator: The AND operator requires that each operand
be in alarm. L1D1 L1D2 L1D3
Equation: AND(Z9 Z15 Z23) (Z9) (Z15) (Z23)
ALL three operands in the equation MUST be

in alarm for the control module to be activated.
Z9 Z15 Z23
IF Software Zone 9 is in alarm AND
IF Software Zone 15 is in alarm AND
IF Software Zone 23 is in alarm,
THEN this control module will be activated.
L1M1
CMX
AND(Z9 Z15 Z23)
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-61

NOT
Operator: The NOT operator inverts the state of the operand L1D4
(activated to deactivated OR deactivated to activated).
(Z2)
Equation: NOT(Z2)
Z2
The control module will remain activated UNTIL
the operand comes into alarm.
L1M1
IF Software Zone 2 is in alarm, CMX
THEN this control module will be deactivated. NOT(Z2)
XZONE
Operator: For Cross Zone operation, the XZONE L1D1 L1D2 L1D3 L1D4
counting operator may be used.
(Z23) (Z23) (Z23) (Z23)
Equation: XZONE(Z23)
IF ANY combination of two or more initiating Z23

devices (L1D1, L1D2, L1D3, L1D4)
that have been programmed (Control-By-Event)
to this software zone (Z23) come into alarm,
THEN this control module will be activated. L1M3
CMX
XZONE(Z23)
3-62 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

DEL
Operator: For delayed operation, the DEL operator is used.
Equation: DEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1))
Delay Duration Internal

(optional) Equation
L1M3
Example: L1M3 activates Forward Activating Zone 223 (Z223). (Z223)

L1M2 CBE is: DEL(00.00.30 00.01.30 (Z223))
Z223
IF Z223 has been active for 30 seconds
THEN L1M2 will become active. L1M2 will stay active
for 1 minute and 30 seconds provided that Zone Z223
remains active.
L1M2
CMX
Time line
0:00 0:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30 DEL(00.00.30 00.01.30
+————+————+————+————+————+ (Z223))
Z223 L1M2 L1M2
active active inactive
NOTES
• The entire DEL equation consumes at least 11 bytes (including a 3-byte internal equation). The internal
equation can be a complex equation many bytes in size.
• If a delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the internal equation
evaluates true and will remain that way for the specified duration, unless the internal equation
becomes false.
• If no duration is specified, then the device will not be deactivated until a reset occurs or the internal
equation evaluates false.
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-63

SDEL
Operator: The SDEL operator is also used for delayed operation. This is a latched version of the DEL
operator. Once the equation evaluates True, it remains activated until a reset, even if the in-
ternal equation becomes false.
Equation: SDEL(HH.MM.SS HH.MM.SS (Z1))
Delay Duration Internal

(optional) Equation
Example: If Z223 CBE is: SDEL(00.00.30 00.01.30 (L1M1))
IF L1M1 has been active for 30 seconds
THEN Z223 will become active. Z223 will stay active for 1 minute and 30 seconds.
Time line
0:00 0:30 1:00 1:30 2:00 2:30
+————+————+————+————+————+
L1M1 Z223 Z223
active active inactive
NOTES
• The entire SDEL equation consumes at least 11 bytes (including a 3-byte Internal Equation). The
Internal Equation can be a complex equation many bytes in size.
• If a delay of zero is entered (00.00.00), the equation will evaluate true as soon as the Internal Equation
evaluates True and will remain that way for the specified duration.
• If no duration is specified, then the device will not deactivate until reset.
TIM
Operator: The TIM operator is used to specify activation on specific days of the week or year.
Equation: TIM(SU MO TU WE TR FR SA HH.MM HH.MM)

(Type 1)
Activation Day Start Time Stop Time
(optional) (optional) (optional)
Example: If Z221 CBE is: TIM(SA SU 7.30 13.59)

Zone Z221 will be active on Saturdays and Sundays from 7:30AM to 1:59PM.
Equation: TIM(MM-DD-YY HH.MM HH.MM)

(Type 2)
Activation Date Start Time Stop Time
(optional) (optional) (optional)
Examples: If Z222 CBE is: TIM(7-4-)

` Zone Z222 will be active on July 4th for every year.
If Z222 CBE is: TIM(12-25- 9.00 17.00)

` Zone Z222 will be active on December 25th for every year from 9:00AM to 5:00PM.
3-64 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

4.3 Size Limitations
Each Control-By-Event has a physical size limitation of 14 bytes in control panel memory.
For initiating devices, the Control-By-Event size can be calculated by the following formula:
Size in bytes = 2 + (Number of Zones) + (Number of Control Modules X 3)
Example: The following Control-By-Event takes up 11 bytes in memory.
(Z1 Z6 Z12 L2M4 L7M15)
Size in bytes 2+ (3) + (2 X3) = 11
For notification devices, the Control-By-Event size can be calculated by adding the components involved
using the following values:
( = 1 byte Zones = 1 byte each

) = 1 byte Initiating devices = 3 bytes each
OR( = 1 byte
AND( = 1 byte The time specifications for the
NOT( = 1 byte DEL, TIM, and SDEL operators = 6 bytes
XZONE( = 1 byte
DEL( = 1 byte
TIM( = 1 byte
SDEL( = 1 byte
Examples:
1) The following Control-By-Event takes up 13 bytes in memory:
OR( Z1 Z4 Z9 Z16 Z23 LID3 L2M7 )
Size in bytes 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 3 + 3 + 1 = 13
2) The following CBE takes up 11 bytes in memory:
DEL( 00.00.30 00.01.30 ( Z1 ) )
Size in bytes 1 + 6 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 11
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-65

Due to the 14-byte size limitation, it may be necessary to use more than one equation or list to accomplish a
desired result. Through the use of reverse activating zones, an equation which normally would contain too
many bytes can be broken up into several smaller equations.
In the example below, a control module (CMX) is to be activated by any one of 14 software zones:
Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9
Z5 Z10
Z4 Z11
Z3 Z12
Z2 Z13
L1M1
CMX
Z1 Z14
CBE Equation for L1M1:

OR( Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 )
1 + 1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 + 1+1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 16 Bytes
(too many)
By using two reverse-activating zones, the equation with 16 bytes is broken into two smaller equations and
the CBE for the control module uses the two reverse-activating zones as its operands.
Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9
Z5 Z10
CBE Equation for Z239:

Z4 Z11
OR(Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8)
= 10 Bytes
Z3 Z12
CBE Equation for Z240:

Z239 Z240
RZON RZON OR(Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14)
Z2 Z13 = 8 Bytes
Z1 Z14
CBE Equation for L1M1:
OR(Z239 Z240) = 4 Bytes
L1M1
CMX
3-66 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

4.4 Cooperative Control-By-Event
Cooperative Control-By-Event equations pertain to reverse activated software zones on the AM2020/
AFP1010 NOTI•FIRE•NET system only.
CCBE, like Control-By-Event (CBE), is used to provide a variety of responses based on various combinations
of events (initiating conditions). Where CBE programming controls the interaction between devices and
software zones within one AM2020/AFP1010, CCBE programming controls events between multiple panels
on a NOTI•FIRE•NET system. For example, an addressable initiating device in one panel turning on an
addressable output device of another panel through a reverse activated software zone. The formats and uses for
CBE and CCBE are similar in many ways with the following exceptions:
• Only reverse activating software zones can be programmed with a CCBE equation.
• CCBE equations can only be programmed for software zones from the AM2020/AFP1010 node that
the zones reside in. For instance, if a CCBE equation is to be programmed for software zone 23 of
node 10 the user must program the equation on the AM2020/AFP1010 that is declared as node 10.
• CCBE can only use the AND(, OR(, and NOT( operands.
• CCBE equations have a size limitation of 80 characters.
NOTE
Forward activating software zones can not have CCBE equations but can be used as operands in
other CCBE equations.
Each AM2020/AFP1010 has 240 software zones for both CBE and CCBE programming. Although there are
240 software zones, only zones 2-240 can have CCBE equations associated with them. Since a zone
boundary must be declared, at least one of the software zones will be a forward activating zone and can not
have a CCBE equation associated with it. If Zone 1 is used as the zone boundary, then there are only 239
zones left for CCBE programming.
It is possible for a reverse-activated software zone to have both a CBE and CCBE equation associated with it.
If this occurs, the software zone will become active if either equation becomes active. The format for a CCBE
equation is the same as a CBE equation. The operators for CCBE can only be AND(, OR(, and NOT(. The
operands for CCBE are most often a zone with the format N(XXX)Z(YYY), where XXX is the node number for
the particular panel on the network and YYY is one of the 240 software zones available to CCBE programming.
4.5 The Null Control-By-Event

The simplest type of Control-By-Event is the Null, which means empty. For initiating devices, the Null is
denoted by entering ( ) as the Control-By-Event. In response to an alarm on an addressable alarm initiating
device programmed with a Null Control-By-Event, the AM2020/AFP1010 will do the following:
• Initiate a System Alarm condition (Alarm LED flashes, piezo sounds and the Form-C alarm contacts
on the CPU will be activated).
• Activate no control modules or software zones (no notification appliances will sound and no output
relays will be activated due to the fact that there are no entries in the Control-By-Event for this initiating
device).
For Addressable Output Devices, the Null is denoted by entering OR( ) or ( ). Note: Entering ( is equivalent
to entering OR(. A control module programmed with a Null Control-By-Event will not be activated unless it is
included in the Control-By-Event of a software zone or initiating device.
Example - Resetting 4-wire Smoke Detectors

A control module is needed to reset power to 4-wire smoke detectors in an AM2020 or AFP1010 system unless
the resettable power output (TB3 terminals 1 and 2) from the MPS-24A is used. This module must not be activated
in response to an alarm condition. Rather, this module must only be activated during system reset. This can be
accomplished by assigning the module a Null Control-By-Event and the Software Type ID PWRC (the control panel
automatically resets modules with Type ID PWRC upon system reset).
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-67
4.6 Programming Examples
Options
The example below illustrates three ways to accomplish the simple programming task of programming a
Notification Appliance (control module) on SLC Loop 1 to indicate activation of an Initiating Device (smoke
detector) also on SLC Loop 1.
Solution A Solution B Solution C

Program the smoke No Control-By- Program the smoke
detector with the Event required for detector with the
Control-By-Event: the smoke detector. Control-By-Event:
(Z1) (L1M1)
Ø × Ø
Software
Zone Z1
Type: FZON
×
Program the control No Control-By-
module with the Event required for
Control-By-Event the control module.
OR(L1D1)
Program the control

module with the
Control-By-Event
OR(Z1)
3-68 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

L1D1 L1D2 L1D3 L1D4
(Z1) (Z1) (Z1) (Z2)

Example # 1: Combinational Logic
L1D1, L1D2, and L1D3 activate Z1. L1D4 activates

Z2. If Z1 activates, L1M1 will activate. If Z2 activates RZON AND(Z1 Z239)
then L1M4 will activate. The equation AND(Z1 Z239) Z1 Z2
Z240
requires both to be active for an output. Because
reverse zone 239 has a NOT operand, it is active as RZON
long as L1D4 is inactive. Z239
NOT(Z2)
L1M1 L1M2 L1M4

CMX CMX CMX
OR(Z1) OR(Z240) OR(Z2)
Example # 2: General Alarm L1D1 L1D2 L1D3 L1D4
(Z1) (Z2) (Z3) (Z3)
L1D1 activates L1M1 through Z1. L1D2 activates

L1M2 through Z2. L1D3 and L1D4 activate L1M4 Z2 Z3
through Z3. L1M3 will activate when reverse zone
240 is activated. Z240 will activate when Z1, Z2 or Z3
are activated.
Notification Appliance L1M3 serves as the General RZON

Alarm device. It will be activated whenever an alarm Z1
Z240
occurs on any addressable initiating device in the
system, due to the fact that all initiating devices OR(Z1 Z2 Z3)
activate a Software Zone, and activation of any zone
activates software zone Z240.
L1M1 L1M2 L1M3 L1M4
CMX CMX CMX CMX
OR(Z1) OR(Z2) OR(Z240) OR(Z3)
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-69

L1D1 L1D2
(Z1) ()
Example # 3: Delay and Time RZON

Z1
Z240
L1D1 activates Z1. L1M1 turns on when Z1 is DEL(00.01.00 00.05.00 (Z1))

active. L1D2 is a null equation. L1M2 activates
with L1D2 after a ten minute delay. Z239 is
active July 4th of every year. L1M3 will activate
when Z1 and Z239 are active. Z240 is active RZON
when Z1 is on after a one minute delay and will Z239
stay on for 5 minutes. L1M4 turns on when Z240 TIM(7-4-)
is active.
L1M1 L1M3
CMX CMX
OR(Z1) L1M2 AND(Z1 Z239) L1M4

CMX CMX
DEL(00.10.00 (L1D2)) OR(Z240)
Example # 4: L1D1 L1D2 L1D3

Fire Floor, Floor Above, Floor Below
(Z1 Z2) (Z1 Z2 Z3) (Z2 Z3 Z4)
L1D1 activates Z1 and Z2. L1D2 activates Z1, Z2

and Z3. L1D3 activates Z2, Z3 and Z4. L1M1 will
activate when Z1 is active. L1M2 will activate
when Z2 is active. L1M3 will activate when Z3 is
active. L1M4 will activate when Z4 is active. Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4
L1M1 L1M2 L1M3 L1M4

CMX CMX CMX CMX
OR(Z1) OR(Z2) OR(Z3) OR(Z4)
3-70 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

Example # 5: CCBE for NOTI•FIRE•NET
Node 1 will activate L1M1 if Z1 is active locally. Node 1 will activate L1M2 if Z200 is active locally or in both
Nodes 7 and 43 simultaneously. Node 43 will activate L1M2 if Z200 is not active locally and not activated in
Node 7.
L1D1 L1D2 L1D1 L1D2
(Z1) (Z200) (Z1) (Z200)
RZON RZON
Z1 Z1
Z200 Z200
() OR( ) () OR( )
AND(N7Z200 N43Z200) OR( )
L1M1 L1M2 L1M1 L1M2

CMX CMX CMX CMX
OR(Z1) OR(Z200) OR(Z1) OR(Z200)
NODE 1 NODE 7
L1D1
(Z1)
RZON
Z1
Z200
() OR( )
OR(N7Z200)
L1M1 L1M2
CMX CMX
OR(Z1) NOT(Z200)
NODE 43
Programming 15088:K 3/21/01 3-71

Section Five
Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation
Programming for Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation operation (for use in Canada only)
An XPC-8 Notification Appliance Circuit module can be configured for Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation operation.
Under this mode of operation each circuit operates in one of two stages: alert or evacuation. When configured
this way, each notification appliance circuit has two addresses associated with it. Refer to the XP Series
Transponder Manual for additional information.
The first address is the control address. Activating this point (through its Control-By-Event programming) will
turn the notification appliance circuit on. This point uses the Software Type ID CON.
The second address is the stage selection address. This point decides what state an active notification
appliance circuit will be in. Activating this point will put the notification appliance circuit into evacuation mode.
If this point is not activated the circuit will be in alert mode. This point uses the Software Type ID FORC.
NOTE
If an unacknowledged circuit is in alert mode for more than five minutes, all activated circuits on the
XPC-8 will change to the evacuation pulse rate.
3-72 Programming 15088:K 3/21/01

AM2020
AFP1010
Chapter Four
Security
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-1

4-2 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
Section One
Installing and Programming Combination
Fire/Security Fire Alarm Systems
1.1 Introduction
The AM2020/AFP1010 is suitable for use as a Grade AA, Grade A, or Grade B Central Station and Proprietary
Burglar Alarm Protected Premises and Receiving Unit when the installation and programming requirements out-
lined in this section are followed. Such an installation meets the requirements of Standards UL1076 (Proprietary
Burglar Alarm Units and Systems) and UL1610 (Central Station Burglar Alarm Units). A Fire/Security Protective
Signaling System includes one or more of the following:
• Protected Premises.
• Central Stations.
Security devices in such a system must be configured so unauthorized activity in an area within the Protected
Premises is communicated to the Central Station. This communication will be handled in one of two ways,
depending on the characteristics of the location:
• When the system consists of a single AM2020/AFP1010, the system must reside in the Central Station. Security
devices are grouped together in logical areas, and when activated, signal the operator at the Central Station.
• When the system consists of more than one AM2020/AFP1010, a Protected Premises Unit (PPU)
AM2020/AFP1010 equipped with a Network Interface Board (NIB-96) facilitates signaling over an SLC
loop to the AM2020/AFP1010 control unit at the Central Station.
NOTE The INA and NRT are not suitable for Central Station or Proprietary supervising station use.
This section outlines security requirements for installations using a single AM2020/AFP1010 and installations using
multiple AM2020/AFP1010 units, including optional features. Sample system configuration diagrams are also included.
Programming must be performed by an installer who is proficient in programming the AM2020/AFP1010. The table
below lists monitor and control module codes used in the system configuration diagrams, and lists the specific part
numbers that are defined by the codes.
Code used in
General Term Specific Part Numbers
Security Diagrams
Monitor
MM MMX-1, MMX-101, XP5-M,
Module
Control
CM CMX-1, CMX-2, XP5-C,
Module
Table 1.1-1 Monitor and Control Module Codes

Note: The installation will comply with the UL security listings when it is installed as detailed in this manual. The UL
listing does not automatically apply to any configuration of security equipment that is not detailed in this document.
1.2 General Security Requirements
The following security requirements must be met:
• The MPS-24 or MPS-24E power supply cannot be employed; an MPS-24A or MPS-24AE must be used.
• Shielded cable must be used on all input/output wiring associated with security functions.
• SLC Loop Shielding (refer to Chapter One Installation, Section 4.4, SLC Loop Shield Termination).
• Security Module I/O Circuit Shielding — terminate the shield at earth ground at the junction box
containing the module.
• When employed as a Protected Premises Unit, the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet door must be wired with an
STS-1 Tamper Switch that is monitored by the control panel.
• If the system has arming and disarming capability, a ringback signal from the Central Station to the arming
location is required for Grade AA or Grade A operation. The ringback signal informs the Protected
Premises Control Panel that the signal to arm/disarm has been received by the Central Station.
• A single SLC loop may be used for both Fire and Security Device Connections.
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-3
There are four software type IDs associated with security operation; Security Access Monitor (SACM), Security
Area Monitor (SARM), Security Equipment Monitor (SEQM), and Security System Monitor (SSYM). There is also
one software function, Security Delay (SDEL). These software elements are essential to all aspects of security
operation, including Control-By-Event (CBE) programming. Devices with the type IDs SACM and SEQM do not
automatically display at the LCD or require state change acknowledgment. State changes in devices with these
software types may be output at a printer. Refer to Chapter Three Programming for more information about the
characteristics of software type IDs.
WARNING!
XP Transponder circuits (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) are not suitable for security applications.
1.3 Security Configuration-Specific Requirement

Placement of Security Devices
Security devices are placed in two main areas: the building perimeter and the interior spaces. Take care to select
a device appropriate to the area you install it in. The device should be sensitive enough to detect an intruder but
not so sensitive that normal variations in the surrounding environment cause false alarms.
Building Perimeters
Table 1.3-1 lists some common types of security devices used on the building perimenter, and a brief description
and application notes for each type. This is meant only as a guide when selecting which types of devices you
need; follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and maintenance.
Type Description Application Notes
Magnetic A reed switch and a magnet usually used in doors and Usually installed on all perimeter doors and any moveable surface on the
Contacts windows. The switch is mounted in the frame, the perimeter of the building (i.e., windows, loading chutes, overhead doors,
magnet directly opposite in the door or window. When etc.). Often installed on some interior doors to create internal traps.
the door or window opens, the magnet is moved away Normall installed on the upper edge of a door two inches from the
from the switch, causing an alarm. Also available in a opening side. Install contacts on concealed inside surface if possible.
balanced/high security version, which has a second Consider using balanced/high security version in high-risk situations or
biasing magnet built into the switch portion to prevent when the contacts are easily accessible.
the contact from being defeated by an external magnet. Make sure that the barrier the contacts protect is in good repair and that
the contacts are installed according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Mechanical Spring-loaded contact held closed by the door or Usually installed on all perimeter doors and any moveable surface on the
Contacts window. When the door or window is opened, the perimeter of the building (i.e., windows, loading chutes, overhead doors,
contact springs open, causing an alarm. etc.). Often installed on some interior doors to create internal traps.
Make sure that the barrier the contacts protect is in good repair and that
the contacts are installed according to the manufacturer's instructions.
F oi l A thin, fragile strip of conductive metallic foil fastened Foil is easily scratched and damaged by animals and humans. If installed
with adhesive to glass, wood, or other insulating on windows, frost can cause the foil to separate from the glass and break.
material. When the material it is fastened to breaks, These breaks can be extremely difficult to locate and repair. A good foil
the foil also breaks, interrupting the current and causing installation can also be time-consuming and requires periodic
an alarm. maintenance to prevent problems.
Glass Surface mounted: A small, plastic-encased device Surface mounted detectors typically cover about 30 square feet of glass,
Breakage fastened to the glass surface, which detects high but check manufacturer's recommendations. They tend to be more
Detectors frequency sounds generated when a large piece of reliable and easier to mount than foil. Since the sound is transmitted
glass breaks. through the glass, they are not subject to false alarm by high frequencey
sounds transmitted through the air.
Accoustical: A device that mounts on wall or ceiling Acoustical detectors generally cover a larger area than surface types, but
adjacent to glass and is attuned to the frequency of check manufacturer's recommendations. Offices with partitions, dividers,
sound made by glass breaking. or sound absorbing or deadening material will decrease their
effectiveness.
Screens/ Screens and lacing wire cover openings such as Screens must usually be custom ordered. They are not aesthetically
Lacing Wire ductwork, skylights, and vents. Screens are an array of pleasing, so they are typically used in applications where appearances
wooden dowels with a small-gauge wire embedded in are not important, such as warehouses and factories.
each. If the dowels are cut or broken, the wires are Lacing wire should be run so that a person must cut the wire to gain
severed, causing an alarm. Lacing wire, a fine a cce ss.
insulated wire carrying normal alarm current, runs
across the opening in many directions. When the wire
is broken or cut, current will be interrupted, causing an
alarm.
Table 1.3-1 Building Perimeter Security Devices

4-4 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
Interior Spaces
Table 1.3-2 contains some common types of devices used in interior spaces, and a brief description and
application notes for each type. This is meant only as a guide when selecting which types of devices you need;
follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and maintenance.
Type Description Application Notes
Ultrasonic Consists of a transmitter and a receiver. Consider environmental conditions before deciding to use ultrasonic motion
Motion Transmitter produces a high frequency detectors. Air turbulence or moving objects may cause false alarms. Many
Detector sound (26,500 Hz) which is reflected off systems use signal processing to eliminate random motion by only going into
surrounding objects and walls. Receiver alarm if the source of motion continually approaches or recedes, so place the
detects these reflected sounds and detector in an area where an intruder would have to walk directly toward or away
compares them to the transmitted sounds. If from it. This increases the chance of detection.
an object or person is moving, the reflected Be sure to adjust the detector so it is pointed away from possible sources of
sound energy will have a different frequency false alarms such as other motion detectors, fans, hanging displays, loose
than the transmitted sound due to the overhead doors, or hanging plants. Be aware that the sensitivity ultrasonic of
Doppler effect. motion detection varies with temperature and humidity. Also, areas that contain
highly sound-absorbent materials will reduce the detector's effectiveness, while
areas with highly reflective surfaces will increase its effectiveness.
The energy used to detect intruders is easily contained by walls and partitions.
This allows individual areas to be protected independently.
Microw ave Operates on same principle as ultrasonic Microwave energy can penetrate glass, paneling, and other interior partitions.
Motion detectors. Uses microwave energy Make sure the beam is blocked by the floor or a brick/concrete wall with no
Detector transmitted at about 10.525 GHz modulated windows. Otherwise, the detector could report false alarms by sensing motion
at approximately 915 MHz, then projected far beyond the protected area. Metal reflects microwave energy, so metal
into the protected area. columns, walls, flat metal objects, or moving metal objects could cause
unexplainable false alarms. Never use microwave detectors in metal buildings.
Sometimes radiation from fluorescent lights can cause false alarms, so make
sure they are not in the detector's field of view. Radio transmitters and AC
transients can also cause false alarms.
Detectors covering adjacent areas should have slightly different frequencies.
This prevents them from interfering with one another and causing false alarms.
Passive Detects a change in the infrared energy Best used in small- to medium-sized areas. Should be installed so their field of
Infrared (emitted by all objects) in the surrounding view does not include heat sources such as vents, radiators, open flames, or
Motion environment using thermistors, thermopiles, direct sunlight, or moving light sources such as headlights.
Detectors or pyroelectrics.
Photoelectric Uses an LED to project an invisible Arrange beams so they form a complicated array across the protected area.
Beams modulated or pulsed light source across a When used in long hallways or large open areas, do not follow the shape of the
protected area to a receiver. If the source is area or run parallel to it; instead, skew the beams across the area. Additional
blocked, or if it is received at a different receivers or mirrors can be used to increase the number of times the beam
modulation, it causes an alarm. crosses the area, but be aware that using a mirror reduces the range to as much
as half the original distance. Also, dirt/dust on the mirror reduces reliability and
increases the number of false alarms.
Audio Active: Same principle as ultrasonic motion Active: Same characteristics and limitations as ultrasonic detectors.
Detection detectors except using audible sound.
Passive: Microphones throughout a

protected area connected to a controlling Passive: Trucks, buses, or low-flying aircraft can create false alarms. Also an
device that uses logic to detect the types of intruder may not make enough noise to set the detector off until substantial loss
noises that would be produced by an has occurred. Usually used in applications where vandalism is the main concern,
intruder. such as schools or general office areas.
Stress Operates on the principle that intruders Sensitivity varies with the weight of the intruder. Since the sensors detect only
Detectors cause small amounts of stress on a momentary changes in stress, they can be used in areas where the amount of
building's structure, especially on floor weight in an area will vary from day to day.
supports and joists. Sensors that use These systems do not work on structures with a low flexure such as concrete
crystals, which produce a small amount of floors, stairs, or beams, heavy steel beams, or stone floors.
current when deformed or stressed, are Make sure the sensors are securely fastened to the structure and that the
strapped to these supports and joists. This structure is of the proper material.
current is sent to a control unit, which
causes an alarm.
Table 1.3-2 Interior Space Security Devices
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-5

To make locating alarms easier, each monitor module should monitor devices in one specific area. If possible,
these devices should all be of similar types. This helps the operator to determine the cause of the alarm, as
well as allowing the operator to identify and repair detectors causing false alarms quickly. Interior motion
detectors should be placed on a separate supervisory circuit whenever possible, since they have a higher
failure rate than other devices. This way, even if the operator has to disconnect that circuit to repair a device,
the other security devices in the area (door contacts, photoelectric beams, etc.) would still protect the area.
Zone Numbering
To facilitate the application engineering process, this document refers to the zone number as a Z followed by
one or two lower case letters. This is done because the numerical order in which the zones are assigned is an
important design consideration. Convert the lower case letters used in this document to numbers using the
following rules:
• Use the same number for each abbreviation. For example, if you decide to program Zone Za as
Z05, make sure to use Z05 anywhere else the abbreviation Za appears in that application.
• When programming zones that have two letter abbreviations, the first letter represents the area
that zone is associated with. This first letter does not represent a number; it is just a way to
categorize which Protected Premise the zone is associated with. For example, if an application
has one area identified as Tenant A and one as Tenant B, the zone abbreviations for the first zone
in each would be Zaa and Zba, respectively. You could assign Zone Number Z05 to Zaa and Zone
Number Z06 to Zba. See Table 1.3-3.
• Assign zone numbers in ascending order following the alphabetical order of the last lower case
letter in the abbreviation, with a being the lowest number. Zones with different first letters (for
example, Zac and Zbc) do not have to be in any particular order as long as they are in order within
their first-letter groups. For example, Zad would not have to have a higher number than Zbc, but
Zad would have to have a higher number than Zac.
Table 1.3-3 and 1.3-4 provide examples of how zone numbers can be assigned in place of the zone letters
used in this document.
Letter Zaa Zab Zac Zad Zae Zaf Zag Zah Zai Zaj
Number Z05 Z12 Z22 Z180 Z188 Z190 Z198 Z200 Z208 Z210
Zone boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z180
Table 1.3-3 Zone Numbers - One Set of Zones
Letter Zaa Zab Zac Zad Zae Zaf Zag Zah Zai Zaj
Letter Zba Zbb Zbc Zbd Zbe Zbf Zbg Zbh Zbi Zbj
Zone boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z100
Table 1.3-4 Zone Numbers - Two Sets of Zones

The reason this document uses letters instead of numbers is to give you some flexibility in assigning zone
numbers to your security applications. However, the rules above must be adhered to when assigning numbers
to the letter abbreviations. Otherwise,your security system may not work as it is intended due to the system
scanning order and other Control-By-Event-interlock statement programming considerations.
4-6 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
Security System Diagrams and Programming Keys
The following figures illustrate the minimum system requirements for various configurations of the AM2020/
AFP1010 and associated peripherals.
Refer to Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this chapter for monitor and control module information. Refer to the
XP5 Series Transponder Manual listed in the Related Documentation Chart of this manual for connection
information for the XP5 modules. Refer as well to the Product Installation Documents 15984 (RKS-S Remote
Keyswitch) and 15456 (STS-1 Security Tamper Switch) for connection information on these devices.
Refer to the Glossary section of this manual for descriptions of the terms used in this section.
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-1. See Table 1.1-1 the introduction to this section
for other monitor module options.
• One AM2020/AFP1010 Control Panel
• One Security Supervisory Protected Area
• One Protected Premises
• One MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Module, Security Devices (minimum security equipment).
TENANT A 47K End-of-Line Resistor (A-2143-00)
Normally open security

switch (listed)
Normally closed security

switch (listed)
AREA 1
(Perimeter) 1
MMX-1 or MMX-101
Security Area Monitor
Key (See Fig 1.3-7 for MMX-101 wiring
Motion Detector polarity)
Contact Switch
SLC to LIB at
MM Security Area Monitor Central Station
Pull Station Signaling Line Circuit

AM2020/AFP1010
Area1.cdr
(SLC)
Smoke Detector
Central Station
Figure 1.3-1 Simplest Security System

Programming Key for Figure 1.3-1
MM Security Area Monitor:
Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
Type ID: SARM
Control-By-Event: ( )
Custom Label: Installer Specified (describe location of module).
Tracking: Yes - Results in required acknowledgment at Central Station for every unsecured state.
Restoral is automatic.
No - Results in required acknowledgment at Central Station for first unsecured state only (until
reset at Central Station - short condition only).
Annunciator: No (not required).
Yes (if annunciator mapping desired)
Annunciator Point
Mapping (Optional): AxxPyy
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-7
The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-2. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for
monitor module options.
• Multiple Security Supervisory Protected Areas
• One Monitor Module per protected area, Security Devices
(minimum security equipment).
TENANT A
Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
AREA 2 AREA 3
MM Security Area Monitor
2 3 Pull Station
AREA 1 1 Smoke Detector

(Perimeter)
Signaling Line Circuit AM2020/AFP1010
Area2.cdr
Central Station
Figure 1.3-2 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System

Type ID: SARM
Annunciator Point
4-8 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

The following system requirements are illustrated in Figure 1.3-3. See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this
section for monitor module options.
• Multiple Security Supervisory Protected Areas
• Multiple Protected Premises
• One Monitor Module per protected area, Security Devices (minimum security equipment).
TENANT A
Key
Motion Detector
AREA 2 AREA 3
Contact Switch
2 3 MM Security Area Monitor
AREA 1 1 Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant

(Perimeter)
Pull Station
Smoke Detector
Signaling Line Circuit
2 3
Area3.cdr
AM2020/AFP1010
AREA 1 1 Central Station
(Perimeter)
TENANT B
Figure 1.3-3 Multiple Tenant Simple Security System

Type ID: SARM
Annunciator Point
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-9

section for other monitor and control module options.
• Multiple Security Supervisory Circuits Reporting to Central Station as a Single Area
• Single Protected Premises
• The minimum security equipment required is as follows:
— Multiple MMX-1 or MMX-101 Monitor Modules per protected area
— one group interface consisting of a CMX and an MMX-1 or MMX-101 module.
— security devices
TENANT A Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
AREA 1
(Perimeter MM Security Area Monitor
and MM CM Group Interface *
Interior) * Group Interface must be physically
Pull Station located in either the protected
premises or the Central Station
Smoke Detector
Area4.cdr
Group Interface * AM2020/AFP1010
MM CM Central Station

from Central Station
MMX-1/CMX Wiring
CMX-1
or Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken
CMX-2 when used as a Form-C relay
com
MMX-1 no

to other devices
MMX-101/CMX Wiring (Alternate to MMX-1/CMX)
red (+) Signaling Line Circuit

black (-)
purple CMX-1 Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken

or when used as a Form-C relay
CMX-2
yellow com
no
R-47K End-of-Line
Resistor (not supplied)
Figure 1.3-4 Single Tenant Consolidated Security System

4-10 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
MM Security Access Monitor: MM = CM Group Interface:
Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). A: CM programming:

Type ID: SACM Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
Control-By-Event: (Za*) Type ID: CMXC
Custom Label: Installer Option (describe specific Control-By-Event: (Za*)
location of module). Custom Label: Security Group Output
Tracking: Yes - Each unsecured state and Signal Silence: No
restoral will be printed when the Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified).
print option is enabled. Annunciator: No (Not required).
No - the first unsecured state will
be printed when the print option is
enabled (restorals will not print un- B: MM programming:
til reset at Central Station - short Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
condition only). Type ID: SARM
Annunciator: No (Not required). Control-By-Event: ( )
Yes (if annunciator mapping de- Custom Label: Installer Option (describe location
sired) of module).
Annunciator Point Tracking: Yes - Results in required acknowl-
Mapping (Optional): AxxPyy edgment at Central Station for ev-
ery unsecured state. Restoral is
*'a' is an installer specified num- automatic.
ber. In this example, all modules No - Results in required acknowl-
must be assigned the same zone edgment at Central Station for first
number. unsecured state only (until reset at
Central Station - short condition
only).
Annunciator: No (Not required).
Yes (if annunciator mapping de-
sired)
Annunciator Point
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-11

section for monitor and control module options.
• Multiple Protected Premises
— Multiple Monitor Modules per protected area
— one group interface per grouped area
— security devices
TENANT A Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
AREA 1 MM Security Area Monitor

(Perimeter
and MM CM Group Interface *
Interior)
Shaded Area Indicates
MM CM Second Tenant
Pull Station
Smoke Detector
Signaling
AREA 1 Line
Circuit AM2020/AFP1010
Area5.cdr
(Perimeter
and Central Station
Interior)
* * Group Interface must be physically
MM CM
located in either the protected
TENANT B
Figure 1.3-5 Multiple Tenant Consolidation Security System

Programming relating to Figure 1.3-5 is essentially the same as Figure 1.3-4. The only difference in program-
ming is that (Za) Control By Event value for Tenant A and (Zb) Control By Event value for Tenant B must be used,
where Za is a zone number and Zb is a different zone number.
• System Arm/Disarm Capability with Central Station Ringback Signal
— Monitor Module for Protected Area
— Contact Switch for Entry/Exit Door
— RKS-S Remote Keyswitch
— Monitor Modules
— One Group Interface
— ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Entry/Exit Door
— Security Devices
4-12 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
TENANT A Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
AREA 1 Contact Switch with MM Module
(Perimeter
RKS-S Remote Keyswitch with MM Module
and
Interior) MM Security Area Monitor
ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator

MM CM Group Interface * * Group Interface must be physically
MM CM * located in either the protected
Pull Station
Smoke Detector
To Signaling
Line Circuit AM2020/AFP1010
Central Station
To Central Station Sample Annunciator Display (ACM-16AT)
(via EIA-485 circuit)
Entry/Exit Door
Area6.cdr
Figure 1.3-6 Single Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay
Contact Switch w/MM Module: RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM Module:

Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified).
Type ID: SACM Type ID: NOA
Control-By-Event: (Zac*) Control-By-Event: (Zab*)
Custom Label: Entry/Exit Door Custom Label: Arming Switch
Tracking: Yes Tracking: Yes
Annunciator: Yes Annunciator: Yes
Annunciator Point: AXXP3 Annunciator Point: AXXP1
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-13

Programming Key for Figure 1.3-6 (Cont)
ACM-16AT/-32A Annunciator:
Annun. Pt. Type ID
MM = CM Group Interface:
AXXP1 AMON
AXXP2 AZON A: CM programming:
AXXP3 AMON Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
AXXP4 AMON Type ID: CMXC
Control-By-Event: (Zaj*)
MM Security Access Monitor: Custom Label: Security Group Output
Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Signal Silence: No
Type ID: SACM Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified).
Control-By-Event: (Zaa*) Annunciator: No (Not required).
Custom Label: Installer Option (describe specific B: MM programming:
location of module). Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
Tracking: Yes—Each unsecured state will Type ID: SARM
be printed when the print option is Control-By-Event: ( )
enabled. Custom Label: Installer Specified.
No—The first unsecured state will Tracking: Yes—Results in required a c -
be printed when the print option is knowledgment at Central Station
enabled (restorals will not print un- for every unsecured state. Resto-
til reset at Central Station - short ral is automatic.
condition only). No—Results in required acknowl-
Annunciator: Yes edgment at Central Station for first
Annunciator Point: AXXP4 unsecured state only (until reset at
Central Station - short condition
only).
Zone Programming
1. Zone Boundary: Must be less than Zad* and greater than or equal to Zac*.
2. Zone to Which All Instant Security Modules 5. Zone Activated When Any Instant Module Is Vi-
Are Mapped olated and the System Is Armed
Zone: Zaa* Zone: Zad*
Type ID: FZON Type ID: RZON
Control-By-Event: ( ) Control-By-Event: AND(Zaa* Zab*)
Custom Label: Instant Group Custom Label: Installer Specified.
Annunciator: No Annunciator: No (Not required).
3. Zone Activated Upon Arming System 6. Zone Active for 30 Sec., 30 Sec. After Opening
Zone: Zab* Entry/Exit Door (Not Dependent on Door Clo-
Type ID: FZON sure)
Control-By-Event: ( ) Zone: Zae*
Custom Label: Arming Zone Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: Yes Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.30 00.00.30 (Zac*))
Annunciator Point: AXXP2 Custom Label: Installer Specified.
4. Zone Activated When Entry/Exit Door Is Open
Zone: Zac* 7. Zone Active 1 Min. After Entry/Exit Door Is
Type ID: FZON Opened and Left Open
Control-By-Event: ( ) Zone: Zaf*
Custom Label: Tenant A Entry/Exit Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: No (Not required). Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.00 (Zac*))
Custom Label: Installer Specified.
4-14 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

Programming Key for Figure 1.3-6 (Cont)
Zone Programming (continued)
8. Zone Active 1.5 Min. After Arming System 10. Zone Active a Minimum of 30 Sec. if Entry/Exit
Zone: Zag* Delay Is Violated (Entry/Exit Door Only) When
Type ID: RZON System Is Armed
Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.30 (Zab*)) Zone: Zai*
Custom Label: Installer Specified. Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: No (Not required). Control-By-Event:
AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.00.30 (Zah*)))
9. Zone Providing 30 Sec. Entry/Exit Delay (En- Custom Label: Installer Specified.
try/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Annunciator: No (Not required).
Zone: Zah*
Type ID: RZON 11. Zone Active at Least 30 Sec. for Any Security
Control-By-Event: Breach While System Is Armed
OR(AND(Zab* Zag* Zae*) AND(Zab* Zaf*)) Zone: Zaj*
®® Type ID: RZON
causes Zone Zah* to causes Zone Control-By-Event: OR(Zad* Zah* Zai*)
activate if entry/exit Zah* to activate Custom Label: Installer Specified.
time is exceeded. if entry/exit door Annunciator: No (Not required).
is left open.
Notification Appliance with a Control Module
When using an optional control module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, this
control module may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation:
AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*)))
resulting in 15 minutes of Notification Appliance activation after a security violation.
*Zaa through Zaj are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the lowest specified zone number (high-
est priority) and Zaj is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority).
Example:
Zaa Zab Zac Zad Zae Zaf Zag Zah Zai Zaj
Z5 Z12 Z22 Z180 Z188 Z199 Z200 Z210 Z211 Z212
ÕÖ
For-
ward Õ Reverse
Zones Ö
Zones
Zone Boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z180.
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-15

1.3.1 CONNECTING AN RKS-S REMOTE KEYSWITCH
The RKS-S Remote Keyswitch arms and disarms the system. It can be mounted in a UL listed single-gang electrical
box. Both the MMX-1/MMX-101 (as shown below) or other monitor module (see Table 1.1-1 for module options) and
RKS-S must be mounted within the protected area. Figures 1.3-7 and 1.3-8, respectively, depict the connection of an
MMX-101 or an MMX-1 module to the RKS-S.
WARNING!
XP Transponder circuits (XPP-1, XPM-8, XPC-8, XPR-8, XPM-8L) are not suitable for security applications.
RKS-8
front
Yellow (-)
MMX-101
RKS-8
rear Purple (+)
Signaling (+) Red

Line (-)
Circuit Black
Wire an R-47K End-of-Line

Resistor into the circuit
Figure 1.3-7 Connecting an MMX-101 Module to the RKS-S
Signaling Line
Circuit Out
RKS-8
rear
Signaling
Line Circuit In
MMX-1
Wire an R-47K
End-of-Line
Resistor into
the circuit
Figure 1.3-8 Connecting an MMX-1 Module to the RKS-S
4-16 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

• Multiple Protected Premises, each with System Arm/Disarm Capability and Central Station Ringback Signal
— Multiple MM Monitor Modules per Protected Area
— One Group Interface per Grouped Area
— Contact Switch for Each Entry/Exit Door
— RKS-S Keyswitch
— MM Monitor Modules
— ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Each Entry/Exit Door
— Security Devices Key
Motion Detector
TENANT A
Contact Switch
Contact Switch w/MM
AREA 1 RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM
(Perimeter
and
Interior) ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator
* MM CM Group Interface * * Group Interface
MM CM
Shaded Area Indicates must be physically
Second Tenant located in either the
Pull Station protected premises or
Signaling the Central Station
AREA 1 Smoke Detector
Line
(Perimeter Circuit
and
Area7.cdr
Interior) AM2020/AFP1010
* Central Station
MM CM
TENANT B
Figure 1.3-9 Multiple Tenant Security System with Entry/Exit Delay
Zone Programming Notes for Figure 1.3-9
MM Security Access Monitor
Provide a unique annunciator point for each Security Access Monitor installed.
Notification Appliance w/CM Module
When using an optional control module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, the
control module intended for Tenant A may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation:
AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*)))
and Tenant B may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation:
AND(Zbb* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zbj*)))
Program Tenant A using zone numbers Zaa through Zaj as in Figure 1-6. Program Tenant B as in Figure 1-6, but substitute
Zba through Zbj for Zaa through Zaj respectively. *Zaa through Zaj are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the
lowest specified zone number (highest priority) and Zaj is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority).
Example: Zone Boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z100.
Zaa Zab Zac Zad Zae Zaf Zag Zah Zai Zaj
Z5 Z12 Z22 Z180 Z188 Z199 Z200 Z210 Z211 Z212
Zba Zbb Zbc Zbd Zbe Zbf Zbg Zbh Zbi Zbj
Z6 Z7 Z21 Z100 Z102 Z108 Z187 Z191 Z193 Z215
ÕÖ
Forward Zones
Õ Reverse Zones
Ö
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-17
• One AM2020/AFP1010 Protected Premises Unit (PPU)
• One AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station Unit
• System Arm/Disarm Capability with Central Station Ringback Signal
— SIB-2048A or SIB-NET Interface
— NIB-96 Network Interface
— STS-1 Security Tamper Switch
— Monitor Modules
— ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Entry or Exit Door
— Control Module
— RA400Z Remote Annunciator
4-18 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
TENANT A Contact Switch w/MM
RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/MM
AREA 1
(Perimeter
and
Interior)
MM CM Group Interface *
* Group Interface must be physically located in
either the protected premises or the Central Station
NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board
* CM Control Module for Ringback (See Figure 1.3-11)**
MM CM
RA400Z Remote Annunciator (see Figure 1.3-11)**
** CM ** STS-1 Tamper Switch with Monitor Module (See Fig 1.3-13)
Signaling Line Circuit Pull Station **Must be physically located in the protected
premises and the RA400Z must be visible from
Smoke Detector
AM2020/AFP1010 AM2020/AFP1010 outside the protected area to provide visible
Area9.cdr
Central Station PPU indication that the central station has received
NIB-96 the arming signal from the PPU.
See Central Station/PPU Wiring Diagram below
Central Station/Protected Premises Unit Wiring
LIB-200, LIB-200A,
or LIB-400
in Central Station
SIB-2048A or SIB-NET
Installed in an
AM2020/AFP1010
Protected Premises Unit LIB-200, LIB-200A,
or LIB-400
NIB-96 Installed in an
Installed in an ICA-4 or ICA-4L in an AM2020/AFP1010 AM2020/AFP1010
Protected Premises Unit. For further information refer Protected Premises
to Chapter Two, Programming of this manual and the Unit
Network Interface Board (NIB-96) manual.
Figure 1.3-10 Single Tenant Security System with Ringback
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-19

The following programming key relates to Figure 1.3-10:
Contact Switch w/Monitor Module: Security Access Monitor Module:

Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
Type ID: SACM Type ID: SACM
Control-By-Event: (Zac*) Control-By-Event: (Zaa*)
Custom Label: Entry/Exit Door Custom Label: Installer Option (describe specific
Tracking: Yes location of module).
Annunciator: Yes Tracking: Yes - Each unsecured state and
Annunciator Point: ArrP3 restoral will be printed on the PPU
printer when the print option is en-
RKS-S Remote Keyswitch w/Monitor Module: abled.
Address: LXXMYY (Installer Specified). No - The first unsecured state will be
Type ID: NOA printed on the PPU printer when the
Control-By-Event: (Zab*) print option is enabled (restorals will
Custom Label: Arming Switch not print on the PPU printer until the
Tracking: Yes PPU is reset locally or at the Central
Annunciator: Yes Station - short condition only).
Annunciator Point: AssPl** Annunciator: Yes
Annunciator Point: ArrP4
4-20 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

Figure 1.3-10 Programming Key (continued):
ACM-16AT/-32A Annunciator:
Annun. Pt. Type ID
ArrP1 AZON
ArrP2 AZON
ArrP3 AMON
ArrP4 AMON
ArrP5 AZON
MM = CM Group Interface:
A: CM programming
Type ID: CMXC
Control-By-Event: (Zaj*)
Custom Label: Security Group Output
Signal Silence: No
Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified).
B: MM programming:
Type ID: SARM
Tracking: Yes - Results in required
acknowledgment at the Protected
Premises Unit for every unsecured
state when the system is armed as
long as the event is present.
Restoral at the Protected Pre-
mises Unit is automatic.
No - Results in required acknowl-
edgment at the Protected Premises
Unit for first unsecured state only
(system armed). The system must
be manually reset at the Protected
Premises Unit or at the Central Sta-
tion - short condition only.
Annunciator: Yes
Annunciator Point: AssPp**
STS-1 Tamper Switch w/MM Module: = CM CM Control Module for Ringback:

Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified). Address: LXXMYY (Installer specified).
Type ID: SEQM - Results in no indication Type ID: CMXC
at Protected Premises Unit dis- Control-By-Event: ( )
play. Indication at Central Station Custom Label: Installer Specified.
only. Signal Silence: Yes
SSYM - When activated, results Walk Test: Yes/No (Installer Specified).
in indication at PPU display and at Annunciator: Yes
Central Station. Annunciator Point: AssPm**
Control-By-Event: (Zaa* Zal*)
Tracking: Yes
Annunciator: Yes
Annunciator Point: AssPn**
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-21

NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board
Protected Premises Unit (Slave) Point Central Station (Master)
Annunciator Point: AssP1 1 Monitor Module Point

Type ID: AAST Address: LXXMYY
Type ID: MON
The first point of the NIB-96 interface reports Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified)
any trouble condition in the Protected Premises Custom Label: Installer Specified.
to the Central Station. If the installer fails to pro- Tracking: Yes - Default fire alarm
gram the Protected Premises Unit properly, conditions will restore auto-
leaving fire alarm initiation devices without a cor- matically at the Central Sta-
responding NIB point, an alarm from such an ini- tion after reset at the Pro-
tiating device will cause the first NIB point to in- tected Premises.
dicate a default fire alarm condition at the Cen- No - Default fire alarm condi-
tral Station. tions will latch in the Central
Station until reset at the
Central Station and at the
Protected Premises if the
NIB has been configured to
prevent reset from the Cen-
tral Station - short condition
only.
Annunciator: Optional.
Annunciator Point: AssP2 2 Assign no device to this corresponding point.
Type ID: AMON
Annunciator Point: AssP3 3 Control Module Point

Type ID: Address: LXXMYY
ARES - Select the ARES Type ID if reset of the Type ID: CON
Protected Premises Unit is to be Control-By-Event: ( )
permitted at the Central Station. Custom Label: Installer Specified.
AMON - Select the AMON Type ID if reset of Signal Silence: Yes
the Protected Premises Unit is not to Walk Test: No
be permitted at the Central Station. Annunciator: No
Annunciator Point: AssP4 4 Assign no device to this corresponding point.

Type ID: AMON
4-22 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board (continued)
Arming Switch l** Monitor Module Point (PPU Arming Switch)

Annunciator Point: AssPl** Address: LXXMYY
Type ID: AMON Type ID: SACM
Control-By-Event: (Zc) Unique Zone Number
Tracking: Yes
Walk Test: No
Annunciator: Yes - Provides visual
indication of Protected Pre-
mises Arm/Disarm status at
the Central Station.
No - does not provide visual
indication of Protected Pre-
mises Arm/Disarm status.
Annunciator Point: AXXPYY (if used).
Central Station RIngback m** Control Module Point (Ringback)

Annunciator Point: AssPm** Address: LXXMYY
Type ID: ACON Type ID: CMXS
Control-By-Event: (Zc) (Same as Point I)
Signal Silence: No
Walk Test: No
Tamper Switch n** Monitor Module Point (PPU Tamper Switch)

Annunciator Point: AssPn** Address: LXXMYY
Type ID: AMON Type ID: SSYM
Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified)
Tracking: Yes - Security tamper
conditions will restore auto-
matically at the Central Sta-
tion after restoral at the Pro-
tected Premises.
No - Security tamper condi-
tions will latch in the Central
Station until reset at the Cen-
tral Station - short condition
only.
**Indicates installer-specified NIB point.
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-23

NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board (continued)

Group Interface MM
Monitor Module Point (PPU Security Alarm
Annunciator Point: AssPp** p**
Input)
Type ID: AMON
Address: LXXMYY
Type ID: SARM
Control-By-Event: (Installer Specified)
Tracking: Yes - Security alarm
conditions will restore automat-
ically at the Central Station af-
ter restoral at the Protected
Premises.
No - Security alarm conditions
will latch in the Central Station
until reset at the Central Station
and the Protected Premises
Unit if the NIB-96 has been
configured to prevent reset
from the Central Station - short
condition only.
**Indicates installer-specified NIB point.
PPU Zone Programming
1. Zone Boundary: Must be less than Zad* and greater than or equal to Zac*.
2. Zone to Which All Instant Security Modules 5. Zone Activated When Any Instant Module Is Vi-
Are Mapped olated and the System Is Armed
Zone: Zaa* Zone: Zad*
Type ID: FZON Type ID: RZON
Control-By-Event: ( ) Control-By-Event: AND(Zaa* Zab*)
Custom Label: Instant Group Custom Label: Installer Specified.
Annunciator: No (Not Required). Annunciator: No (Not required).
3. Zone Activated Upon Arming System 6. Zone Active for 30 Sec., 30 Sec. After Opening
Zone: Zab* Entry/Exit Door (Not Dependent on Door Clo-
Type ID: FZON sure)
Control-By-Event: ( ) Zone: Zae*
Custom Label: Arming Zone Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: Yes Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.30 00.00.30 (Zac*))
Annunciator Point: ArrP1 Custom Label: Installer Specified.
4. Zone Activated When Entry/Exit Door Is
Open 7. Zone Active 1 Min. After Entry/Exit Door Is
Zone: Zac* Opened and Left Open
Type ID: FZON Zone: Zaf*
Control-By-Event: ( ) Type ID: RZON
Custom Label: Tenant A Entry/Exit Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.00 (Zac*))
Annunciator: No (Not required). Custom Label: Installer Specified.
4-24 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
8. Zone Active 1.5 Min. After Arming System 10. Zone Active for a Minimum of 30 Sec. if Entry/
Zone: Zag* Exit Delay Is Violated (Entry/Exit Door Only)
Type ID: RZON When System Is Armed
Control-By-Event: DEL(00.01.30 (Zab*)) Zone: Zai*
Custom Label: Installer Specified. Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: No (Not required). Control-By-Event:
AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.00.30 (Zah*)))
9. Zone Providing 30 Sec. Entry/Exit Delay (En- Custom Label: Installer Specified.
try/Exit Door Only) When System Is Armed Annunciator: No (Not Required).
Zone: Zah*
Type ID: RZON 11. Zone Active at Least 30 Sec. for Any Security
Control-By-Event: Breach While System Is Armed
OR(AND(Zab* Zag* Zae*) AND(Zab* Zaf*)) Zone: Zaj*
®® Type ID: RZON
Control-By-Event: OR(Zad* Zah* Zai*)
causes Zone Zah* to causes Zone
activate if entry/exit Zah* to activate Custom Label: Installer Specified.
time is exceeded. if entry/exit door Annunciator: No (Not required).
is left open.
Custom Label: Installer Specified. 12. Zone which remains Active until Reset when
Annunciator: No (Not required). security violation occurs and the System is
Armed.
Zone: Zak*
Type ID: RZON
Control-By-Event: SDEL(00.00.00 (Zaj*))
Annunciator: Yes
13. Zone Active when Tamper Switch Is Active

Zone: Zal*
Type ID: RZON
Annunciator: Yes
Notification Appliance w/CM Control Module
When using an optional Control Module for Notification Appliances intended to indicate a security violation, this
CM may be programmed with the following Control-By-Event equation:
AND(Zab* SDEL(00.00.00 00.15.00 (Zaj*)))
*Zaa through Zal are each unique installer-specified zone numbers. Zaa is the lowest specified zone number (high-
est priority) and Zal is the highest specified zone number (lowest priority).
Example:
Zaa Zab Zac Zad Zae Zaf Zag Zah Zai Zaj Zak Zal
Z5 Z12 Z22 Z180 Z188 Z199 Z200 Z210 Z211 Z212 Z216 Z218
ÕÖ
For-
ward Õ Reverse
Zones Ö
Zones
Zone Boundary greater than or equal to Z22 and less than Z180.
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-25

= CM
The CMX control module for ringback is illustrated in Figure 1.3-11.
PPU Signaling Line Circuit Out
CMX-1
or
CMX-2
PPU Signaling Line Circuit In
Note: Tabs on CMX must be broken

when used as a Form-C relay.
Warning: Observe proper polarity

or device will be damaged.
+ -
Listed 24 VDC RA400Z
Power Supply
Figure 1.3-11 CMX Control Module for Ringback
An STS-1 Security Tamper Switch installation is illustrated in Figure 1.3-12 through 1.3-14.
Figure 1.3-12 Installing an STS-1 Security Tamper Switch

4-26 Security 15088:K 03/21/01
Figure 1.3-13 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-101 Monitor Module
Figure 1.3-14 Connecting an STS-1 Switch to an MMX-1 Monitor Module
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-27

• Multiple AM2020/AFP1010 PPUs
• One AM2020/AFP1010 Central Station Unit
• Multiple Supervisory Security Circuits Reporting to Central Station as Single Area
• Multiple Protected Premises with System Arm/Disarm Capability and Central Station Ringback Signal
— Each AM2020/AFP1010 PPU must be equipped with a SIB-2048A or SIB-NET Interface
— NIB-96 Network Interface
— STS-1 Security Tamper Switch
— MM Monitor Modules for Protected Area
— ACM-16AT or ACM-32A Remote Annunciator for Each Entry and Exit Door
— One Group Interface Key
Motion Detector
Contact Switch
Contact Switch w/MM

1
TENANT A MM Security Area Monitor
MM CM Group Interface *
AREA 1
(Perimeter NIB-96 NIB-96 Network Interface Board
and **
CM Control Module for Ringback (See Fig. 1.3-11)
CM
Interior) **
RA400Z Remote Annunciator (See Fig. 1.3-12)
MM CM
*
STS-1 Tamper Switch w/MM Module
Shaded Area Indicates Second Tenant
PPUSLC Pull Station

AREA 1 ** **
(Perimeter CM Smoke Detector
and AM2020/AFP1010
Interior) PPUSLC PPU NIB-96 Area10.cdr
AM2020/AFP1010
Central Station
* AM2020/AFP1010
MM CM PPU NIB-96
2
TENANT B
CM**
1 Program Tenant A using zone numbers Signaling LIne Circuit from Central Station
**
Zaa through Zal.
* Group Interface must be physically located in
2 Program Tenant B as shown, but either the protected premises or the Central Station
substitute Zba through Zbl for Zaa ** Must be physically located in the Protected
through Zal, respectively. Premises and the RA400Z must be visible indication
that the central station has received the Arming
Signal from the PPU
Figure 1.3-15 Multiple Tenant Security System with Ringback
4-28 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

Refer to Figure 1.3-16 for the wiring of security notification appliances (supplementary use only in UL listed
systems). See Table 1.1-1 in the introduction to this section for monitor and control module options.
Key
TENANT A Motion Detector
Contact Switch
Contact Switch w/MM
Notification Appliance w/CM

MM CM Group Interface* * Group Interface must be
Pull Station physically located in either the
protected premises or the
* Central Station
MM CM Smoke Detector
SLC
Area8.cdr
AM2020/AFP1010
Central Station
SLC Loop
CMX-1
or 47K
CMX-2 End-of-Line Resistor
(A2143-00)
+24 VDC listed

Security Notification Appliance
CMX-1 or CMX-2
(activated polarity shown)
Configured as a Notification Appliance
Circuit (do not break tabs) and pro-
- + grammed in the Protected Premises Unit.
Listed 24 VDC NOTE
Power Supply. The CMX may also control audio
speakers in an audio application. In
such an installation, fire alarm
conditions must have priority over
security conditions in the AMG-1 (refer
to the Voice Alarm Multiplex Manual).
Figure 1.3-16 System Requirements
Security 15088:K 03/21/01 4-29

NOTES...
4-30 Security 15088:K 03/21/01

AM2020
AFP1010
APPENDICES
Appendices 15088:K 3/21/01 A-1

A-2 Appendices 15088:K 3/21/01
APPENDIX A
CIRCUIT/DEVICE RATINGS
GENERAL
Appendix A outlines the various circuits and devices that can be employed with the AM2020/AFP1010.
SECTION A.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Each of the various types of circuits within an AM2020/AFP1010 Fire Alarm Control System has a specific
type of wire that must be used in order to ensure proper operation. In addition, the wire gauge of a particular
circuit is contingent on the length of that circuit. To determine the specific wiring requirements for each circuit,
refer to Table A-1.
NOTES
• If the SLC Loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, the risk of encountering problems can be
greatly reduced by using the LIB-200A or LIB-400 or exclusively employing electronic sounders instead of more elec-
tronically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns.
• In order to comply with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations on electrical energy
radiation when using the LIB-200, any wire entering or exiting the AM2020/AFP1010 cabinet that is not in
conduit must be of the twisted-shielded type. For termination of the LIB-200 SLC Loop shield, refer to the
Installation section of the manual originally supplied with the LIB-200.
Circuit Distance
Circuit Functions Wire Requirements Typical Wire Type
Type (feet/meters)
Twisted-shielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG 10,000/3048 Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL
Connects to Intelligent
(3.25 to 0.75 mm†). 40 ohms max (12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
LIB-200 Detectors and
per length of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 8,000/2438 Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
SLC loop Addressable Modules,
ohms per branch max for Style 4 4,875/1485.9 Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2)
and to XP Transponders
loops. 3,225/982.98 Belden 9574, West Penn 975 (18 AWG/0.75 mm2)
Connects to Intelligent Twisted unshielded pair, 12 to 18
12,500/3810 Belden 9582, West Penn 998 (12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
LIB-200A or Detectors and AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm†). 50 ohms
9,500/2895.6 Belden 9580, West Penn 994 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
LIB-400 Addressable Modules, max per length of Style 6 and 7
SLC loop to XP Transponders, loops. 50 ohms per branch max for
and XP5 Transponders Style 4 loops
6,000/1828.8 Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL
Connects to LCD-80, Twisted-shielded pair with a
(12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
AMG-1 and to characteristic impedance of
EIA-485 6,000/1828.8 Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
Annunciator Control approximately 120 ohms.
System Modules 18 AWG (0.75 mm†) minimum.
Belden 9583, West Penn 999 Belden B5020FL
(12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
Connects to CRTs and Twisted-shielded pair. See EIA-232D
EIA-232 Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
remote printers 18 AWG (0.75 mm†) minimum. Standard
Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2)
5,000/1524 Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL
12 to 18 AWG(3.25 to 0.75 mm†).
(12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
MMX Maximum loop wire resistance is 20
Initiating Device Circuit 4,000/1219.2 Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
XPM-8 ohms (MMX-1, MMX-101) or 100
ohms (XPM-8).
Belden 9583, West Penn 999, Belden B5020FL
12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm†).
Installer (12 AWG/3.25 mm2)
CMX Notification Appliance MPS-24A: At alarm current level, no
Calculations Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
XPC-8 Circuit more than a 1.2 volt drop at the end
Required Belden 9575, West Penn 991 (16 AWG/1.30 mm2)
of the circuit.
12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm†).
To CMXs, XPC-8s, and Size wire so that no more than 1.2
Power Runs Calculations Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
XP5-Cs volt drop across wire run from supply
source to end of any branch.
12 to 18 AWG (3.25 to 0.75 mm†).
Size wire so that no more than 2.4
Power Runs To annunciators Calculations Belden 9581, West Penn 995 (14 AWG/2.00 mm2)
volts drop across wire run from
supply source to end of any branch.
Table A-1 Wiring Selection Chart

Type of Circuit Devices/Ratings Circuit Ratings Connections
TB1: Term. 2 + 3 (Ground)
MPS-24A Main Power Supply 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.8 amps Term 4 + 5 (Neutral)
Term 6 + 7 (Hot)
Main Supply Circuit
TB1: Term. 2 (Ground)
MPS-24B Main Power Supply 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.8 amps Term 3 (Neutral)
A dedicated branch of the AC Term 4 (Hot)
service that supplies primary AC TB1: Term.1 (Hot)
power to the Fire Alarm Control APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 amps Term. 2 (Neutral)
Panel. Term. 3 (Ground)
Plug P2: Term. 1 + 8 (Ground)
AA-30 Audio Amplifier 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.0 amps Term 3 + 4 (Neutral)
Term 5 + 6 (Hot)
AA-100/AA-120 Audio Amplifier 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.85 amps Term 5 + 6 (Neutral)
Term3 +4 (Hot)
TB1: Term. 2 + 3 (Ground)

MPS-24AE Main Power Supply 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps Term 4 + 5 (Neutral)
Term 6 + 7 (Hot)
TB1: Term. 2 (Ground)

Main Supply Circuit MPS-24BE Main Power Supply 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps Term 3 (Neutral)
Term 4 (Hot)
A dedicated branch of the AC TB1: Term.1 (Hot)
service that supplies primary AC APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.2 amps Term. 2 (Neutral)
power to the Fire Alarm Control Term. 3 (Ground)
Panel
AA-30E Audio Amplifier 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 amps Term 3 + 4 (Neutral)
Term 5 + 6 (Hot)
AA-100E/AA-120E Audio Amplifier 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.9 amps Term 5 + 6 (Neutral)
Term3 +4 (Hot)
Battery Charger Circuit
MPS-24A and MPS-24E Main Power 27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger 2.0A Max. Supervised
TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
Supplies and power-limited.
Charges and maintains the
secondary supply during non-fire MPS-24B and MPS-24BE 27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger (750 mA max).
alarm conditions. TB2: Term. 5 (+), Term 6 (-)
Main Power Supplies Supervised and power-limited.
27.6 VDC. Float type battery charger (4.5 amps max).

CHG-120 Battery Charger TB2: Term. 5 (-), Term. 6 (+)
3.0 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal
AA-30 or AA-30E Audio Amplifier contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not power- Plug P1: Term. 1 (+), Term 4 (-)
limited.
Battery Discharge Circuit
or 7.3 amps max. draw in alarm. 25.0 amp max. screw terminal
Secondary Power Input AA-100/AA-120 or AA-100E/AA-120E Plug P1: Term. 3 + 4 (+),
contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not power-
Audio Amplifier Term 1 + 2 (-)
limited.
Supplies power to the Fire Alarm
6.0 amp max. draw in alarm. Battery leads are not power- TB3-1 (+)
Control Panel during loss of APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply
limited. TB3-2 (-)
primary AC power.
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE
contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not power- TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
Main Power Supply
limited.
MPS-24B or MPS-24BE
contact rating. Supervised. Battery leads are not power- TB2: Term. 5 (+), Term 6 (-)
Main Power Supply
limited.
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE Main Power
Notification Appliance Power Supply: use with any UL listed 24 VDC 24 VDC (3.0 amps max.) Power-limited and supervised. TB3: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
fire alarm Notification Appliance.
Provides power for Notification
Appliance Circuits and remote MPS-24B or MPS-24BE Main Power 24 VDC (2.0 amps max. of regulated current available in
signaling devices. Supply: use with any UL listed 24 VDC alarm only) Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed TB2: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
Refer to the Device Compatibility fire alarm Notification Appliances. relay.
Document.
24 VDC 3.0 amps max. per circuit (6.0 amps total) in alarm TB2:
APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply only. Output Circuit 1, 1+, 2-
Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed relay. Output Circuit 2, 3+,4-
24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 1.0 amps max. (draws from the total
of 3.0 amps of MPS-24A regulated current available in
TB3: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
standby or 6.0 amps available in alarm). Power-limited and
MPS-24A or MPS-24AE supervised with an A77-716 relay.
Main Power Supply
24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 2.0 amps max. (draws from the total
External Resettable Power
of 3.0 amps of MPS-24A regulated current available in
standby or 6.0 amps available in alarm). Power-limited and TB3: Term. 3 (+), Term 4 (-)
supervised with an A77-716 relay. Note: Optional jumper
selectable.
24 VDC (200 mV ripple). 200 mA max. (draws from the total
MPS-24B or MPS-24BE
of 750 mA of regulated current available in standby and TB2: Term. 1 (+), Term 2 (-)
Main Power Supply
alarm. Power-limited and supervised with a UL listed relay.
Table A-2 Circuit Ratings/Connections

Table A-2 (Continued)
CMX Control Module or XP5-C

Transponder Module with an MBT- Local Energy Municipal Box connection. Supervised and power- Refer to Supervising an Uninterruptable
1 Municipal Box Trip device and limited. (3.65 VDC nominal). (10 ohms max. loop resistance. Trip Power Supply in the AM2020/AFP1010
Municipal Box an A77-716 power supervision current = 250 mA. Manual.
Circuit relay.
XP Transponder XPC-8 module Local Energy Municipal Box connection. Supervised and power-
Refer to Appendix A of the XP Series
with an MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip limited. (3.65 VDC nominal). 10 ohms max. loop resistance. Trip
Transponder Manual.
device. current = 250 mA.
Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source

employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA
CMX Control Module fed from an
Style Y or Style Z field wiring. Max Load is 2 amps Resistive @ 24 NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity CMX
MPS-24A/MPS-24AE, MPS-
VDC. Most Notification Appliances are resistive. Certain Terminal 6 (+), 7 (-).
24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R or other
electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. NFPA Style Z Activated Polarity CMX
24 VDC power supplies listed for
For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 amp @ 30 VDC Terminals 6, 9 (+); 7,8 (-).
Fire Protective Signaling.
(0.6pf). Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt drop at last device on
circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the power source.
24 VDC Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source

Notification employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA
Appliance Circuit Style Y field wiring. Total current to all notification applicances cannot
XP5-C Transponder Circuit fed
exceed 3A(non-coded DC), 2A (DC). Most Notification Appliances
from an MPS-24A/MPS-24AE, NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity (5 circuits
A circuit or path are resistive. Certain electromechanical devices exhibit inductive
MPS-24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R, or on XP5-C)
directly loading characteristics. For these types of devices, derate the outputs
other 24 VDC listed power supply. TB1-TB5: B-, B+
connected to a to 1 A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=2 ms) coded. 0.5A, 30 VDC,
24 VDC inductive (L/R=5 ms) coded. Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt
notification drop at last device on circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function
appliance. of the signaling power source.
Operating voltage supplied dependent on the signal power source NFPA Style Y Activated Polarity (8 zones
employed. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part #47K (N-ELR) in Canada. NFPA on XPC-8 P2): Term.1 (+),2(-); 3(+), 4(-);
XP Transponder XPC-8 module
Style Y and Style Z field wiring. Max Load is 2 amps Resistive @ 24 5(+), 6(-); 7(+), 8(-); 9(+),10(-); 11(+),12(-);
fed from an MPS-24A/MPS-24AE,
VDC. Most Notification Appliances are resistive. Certain 13(+), 14 (-); 15(+), 16(-).
MPS-24B/MPS-24BE, APS-6R or
electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. NFPA Style Z Activated Polarity (4 zones
other 24VDC listed power supply.
For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 amp @ 30 VDC on XPC-8 P2): Term. 1,3(+), 2,4 (-); 5,7 (+),
(0.6pf). Size wiring for no more than 1.2 volt drop at last device on 6,8 (-), 9,11 (+), 10,12 (-); 13,15 (+), 14,16
circuit. Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the power source. (-).
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. Max of 40 mA

total speaker leakage current due to coupling capacitors. 48 watts
CMX-1 Control Module fed from
max @ 25 VRMS max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR NFPA Style Y supervised polarity CMX
an AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-
in Canada). Max. line resistance dependent upon wattage required at Terminals 7(+), 6(-).
100E or AA-120/AA-120E.
each speaker. NFPA Style Y field wiring. Supervised. Power limiting
is a function of the signaling power source.
CMX-2 Control Module fed from Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 43.75 watts
an audio amplifier. Model A2143- max., up to 70.7 VRMS. Max of 40 uA total speaker leakage current NFPA Style Y supervised polarity: CMX
20 coupling capacitor (10uA due to coupling capacitors. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # A2143-00 (N- Terminals 7 (+), 6(-).
leakage max.) is required for ELR in Canada). Max. line resistance dependent upon wattage
NFPA Style Z connection. Refer to required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y and Z field wiring. NFPA Style Z supervised polarity: CMX
Speaker the CMX-2 installation instructions Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the signaling power Terminals 7,8 (+); 6,9 (-).
Notification for more details. source.
Appliance NFPA Style Y supervised polarity (8 zones
Circuits on XPC-8 P2):Term.1(-), 2(+); 3(-), 4(+);5(-
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 50 watts max @
),6(+); 7(-), 8(+); 9(-), 10(+); 11(-), 12(+);
25 Vrms, 70 watts@ 70.7 Vrms max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # R-
XP Transponder XPC-8 module 13(-), 14(+); 15 (-), 16(+).
47K (N-ELR in Canada). Max line resistance dependent upon
fed from an audio amplifier. NFPA Style Z supervised polarity (4 zones
wattage required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y or Style Z field
on XPC-8 P2): Term. 1,3 (-),2,4,(+); 5,7 (-
wiring. Supervised. Power-limiting is a function of the signal source.
),6,8(+); 9,11 (-), 10,12 (+);13,15 (-), 14,16
(+).
Operating voltage dependent on amplifier employed. 75 watts max @

25 Volts, 64 watts max @ 70.7 Vrms max. ELR=47K, 1/2 watt, Part # NFPA Style Y supervised polarity (5
XP5-C Transponder circuit fed
R-47K (N-ELR in Canada). Max line resistance dependent upon circuits on XP5-C)
from an audio amplifier.
wattage required at each speaker. NFPA Style Y field wiring. TB1 - TB5; B-, B+
Supervised. Power-limiting is a function of the signal source.
AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA-

AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E 120/AA-120E Connector P6 to XP5-C
or AA-120/AA-120E Audio (TB1-TB5), XPC-8 Connector P3: AA-
Amplifier feeding signal to a CMX 25 Vrms audio amplifier output (70.7 Vrms for AA-100/AA-100E). 30/AA-30E Connector P6 (or P8.5 (-) and
Control Module, an XP AA-30/AA-30E: 30 watts max. AA-120/AA-120E: 120 watts max. P8.6(+)) to CMX Term 3(-) and 4(+). Wire
Transponder XPC-8 Module, or an AA-100/AA-100E 100 watts max. optional supervisory return loop from CMX
Speaker Power
XP5-C transponder circuit. Use Frequency response: 800 Hz to 2800 Hz. Two wire high level audio Term 3(-) and 4(-) to AA-30/AA-30E
(High-level
only UL listed speakers rated for a circuit is not supervised. Four-wire high level audio circuit is Connector P7 or P8.2(-), P8.3(+) or AA-
Audio)
minimum 25 VRMS (30 watts max supervised. AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA-120/AA-120E 120/AA-120E P8.2(-),P8.3(+). AA-
with AA-30/AA-30E, 120 watts are power-limited. Maximum wiring distance limited by wattage 100/AA-100E: connnect 25 VRMS output
max with AA-120/AA120E) or 70.7 required at each speaker. P7.3 and P7.4 to a transformer input P7.1
VRMS min. when using the AA- and P7.2 to obtain 70.7 VRMS output at
100/AA-100E. (100 watts max.). P8.7 and P8.8. Connection not
supervised.

FFT-7/FFT-7S Connector P3 Term. 3(+) and 2 (-):

24 VDC (nominal), 1-Vrms max. 800 Hz to 2800 Hz. Seven (7) to XPC-8 Connector P3.2 (+), P3.1(-), and/or P4.2
telephone handsets active at one time max including Master (+) P4.1 (-), P5.2 (+) P5.1(-), P6.2 (+) P6.1(-),
Common FFT-7/FFT-7S Fire Fighter’s Telephone. Supervised/power-limited. Two-wire circuit P7.2(+) P7.1(-), P8.2 (+) P8.1(-), P9.2(+) P9.1(-),
Telephone Riser Telephone to an XP Transponder XPC- supervised via 27K ELR, Part # R-27K (N-ELR for Canada). P10.2(+) P10.1(-);
(FFT to XPC or 8 module or an XP5-C Transponder Optional return loop for 4-wire circuit. Max wiring resistance to XP5-C,TB1-TB5, EXT-, EXT+ or J1A-J5A.
XP5-C) circuit. (including individual telephone zone to last handset) permitted is Optional four-wire redundant return to FFT-7/FFT-7S
40 ohms. 10,000 ft. (3048 m) max wiring distance at 12 AWG Connector P3 Term. 6(+) and 5(-)
(3.25 mm2) to last handset. to XPC-8 Connector P10;
to XP5-C,TB1-TB5, EXT-, EXT+ or J1A-J5A.
Two-wire circuits (8 telephone circuits on XPC-8

No telephone jack maximum per circuit. Two-wire circuit
Individual P2): Term 1 (-), 2 (+); 3(-), 4 (+); 5 (-), 6 (+), 7 (-), 8
XP Transponder XPC-8 module fed supervised via a 47K ELR, Part # R-47K (N-ELR in Canada).
Telephone (+); 9(-), 10 (+); 11 (-), 12 (+); 13 (-), 14 (+); 15 (-),
from an FFT-7/FFT-7S: employs phone No outboard ELR for four-wire supervised circuit. Max
Notification 16 (+).
jacks APJ-1 and FPJ; Fireman’s resistance due to wiring is 40 ohms from FFT-7 to termination of
Appliance Circuits Four-wire circuits (4 telephone circuits on XPC-8
Handset FHS-1; Fireman’s Handset the telephone circuit. Power limitation is a function of the signal
(XPC to Telephone P2): Term. 1,3
Enclosures FHE-F and FHE-S. source employed. Telephone handset ring signal is provided
Jacks) (-), 2,4 (+); 5,7 (-), 6,8 (+); 9,11
with this module.
(-), 10,12 (+); 13,15 (-), 14,16 (+).
Individual No telephone jack maximum per circuit. Two-wire circuit

XP5-C Transponder circuit fed from an
Telephone supervised via a 47K ELR, Part# R-47K (N-ELR in Canada).
FFT-7/FFT-7S: employs phone jacks
Notification Max resistance due to wiring is 40 ohms from FFT-7 to Two-wire circuits (5 telephone circuits) on :
APJ-1 and FPJ; Fireman’s Handset
Appliance Circuits termination of the telephone circuit. Power limitation is a function TB1-TB5, B-, B+
FHS-1; Fireman’s Handset Enclosures
(XP5-C to of the signal source employed. Telephone handset ring signal is
FHE-F and FHE-S.
Telephone Jacks) not provided with this module.
ACT-2 pins 3,2, and 1 plug directly into P3.3, P3.2,

NFPA Class B circuit, power-limited 3.5 VRMS max., 50 mA
and P3.1 respectively of an AA-30/AA-30E, or AA-
ACT-2 output to AA-30/AA-30E, AA- max.. Monitored for integrity at destination (listed amplifier).
120/AA-120E. Additional AA series amplifiers feed
100/AA-100E, or AA-120/AA-120E Maximum wiring distance 200 ft (61 m) at 18 to 12 AWG (0.75
from the first amplifier P3.6 (shield), P3.5, and P3.4
input. to 3.25 mm2) gauge wire. Twisted and shielded wiring
to additional amplifier P3.3, P3.2, and P3.1
recommended when connecting to more than one amplifier.
respectively.
NFPA Class B circuit, power-limited 3.5 VRMS max., 50 mA

max.. Monitored for integrity at destination (listed amplifier).
RM-1/RM-1SA TB5 shield out, TB5 - out, and TB5 +
RM-1/RM-1SA output to AA-30/AA- Maximum wiring resistance from AMG or ACT-2 low-level source
out to AA series amplifier P3.3, P3.2, and P3.1
30E, AA-100/AA-100E, or AA-120/AA- connected at input of RM-1/RM-1SA to farthest AA series
respectively or another RM-1/RM-1SA on TB4 shield
120E input. amplifier at output of RM-1/RM1-SA is 40 ohms. Twisted and
in, - in, and + in respectively.
Low level Audio shielded wiring recommended when connecting output to more
Riser than one amplifier.
Internal two-wire: AMG-1 P5 to AA Series Amplifier

P2. External two-wire: AMG-1 P4, Terminals 4 (-)
and 5 (+) to AA Series Amplifier P3, Terminals 4 (-)
and 5 (+). External four-wire connection: include
Power-limited/supervised, 40 ohm maximum resistance. 10,000
AMG-1/E output to AA-30/AA-30E, return from AA-30 P8, Terminals 5 (-) and 6 (+) to
feet (3048 m) maximum distance at 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) gauge
AA-100/AA-100E, AA-120/AA-120E, AMG-1 P4, Terminals 1 (-) and 2 (+).
wire. Twisted and shielded wiring recommended. Connect
ACT-1 or RM-1/RM-1SA input Connect AMG-1 P4 terminals 4 (-) and 5(+) to ACT-
shield to REF A audio source.
2 AUDIO IN terminals (not polarity sensitive).
Connect AMG-1 P4 Terminals 4(-) and 5(+) to RM-
1/RM-1SA TB4 "IN" terminals (not polarity sensitive)
Use of twisted shielded cable is recommended.
Two-wire: AA-30/AA-30E P8, Terminals 6 and 5 to

Power-limited, 25VRMS, 30 W max., frequency response 800 Hz
ACT-2 "Audio In" terminals (not polarity sensitive).
to 2800 Hz, two-wire circuit must be monitored for integrity at
High level Audio AA-30/AA-30E Terminal 4 (shield) to ACT-2 "S".
AA-30/AA-30E output to ACT-2 input destination equipment (listed amplifiers), four-wire circuit is
Riser Optional 4-wire return: ACT-2 "Thru" terminals to
monitored for integrity at AA-30/AA-30E, 40 ohm maximum wire
AA-30/AA-30E P8, Terminals 3 and 2 (not polarity
resistance.
sensitive).
2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 24

XP Transponder XPP-1; Dual Form-C Refer to the XPP-1 in the XP Series Transponder
VDC. Not supervised. Power limitation is a function of the
Alarm and Trouble Relays System Manual.
signal source applied.

XP Transponder XPR-8: Eight Form-C Refer to the XPR-8 in the XP Series Transponder
VDC. Not supervised. Power limitation is a function of the
relays or four Dual Form-C relays. System Manual.
signal source applied.
Power: Term 2 (+), Term 1 (-) Normally Open

2 amps resistive @ 30 VDC. One amp inductive (0.6 pf) @ 30 contacts use Term 4; normally closed contact use
CMX-1: One Form-C relay
VDC. Term 5: common use Term 6. Break tabs for Form-C
Form-C Dry
relay.
Contacts
Power: Term 2 (+), Term 1 (-) Normally Open
contacts use Term 4; normally closed contact use
CMX-2: One Form-C relay VDC. Pilot duty: 0.6 amps @ 30 VDC (0.35pf); 0.3 amps @
Term 5: common use Term 6. Break tabs for Form-C
110 VDC (0.35 pf);0.3 amps @ 120 VAC (0.365 pf).
relay.
3 A @ 30 VDC, resistive, non-coded. 2 A @ 30 VDC, resistive,

coded. 0.9 A, 110 VDC, resistive, non-coded. 0.9 A, 125 VAC,
XP5-C Transponder: 5 Form-C relays resistive, non-coded. 0.5 A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=5ms), TB1-TB5, com, N/O, N/C.
coded. 1.0 A, 30 VDC, inductive (L/R=2ms), coded. 0.5A, 125
VAC, inductive (PF=.35), non-coded.

LIB-200 Board: Employs intelligent 24 Volts DC nominal, 27.6 volts DC maximum. NFPA Style 4: LIB-200
detectors and addressable modules - Maximum length is 10,000 ft. (3048 m) per Channel A - Term. 1 (+), 3 (-);
SDX-551,SDX-551TH,SDX-751, FDX- channel (NFPA Style 4) or 10,000 ft. (3048 m) Channel B - Term. 5 (+), 7 (-).
LIB-200 SLC Loop 551,CPX-551,CPX-751,IPX-751,MMX-- total twisted-shielded pair length (NFPA Style 6 NFPA Style 6, 7: LIB-200
1, MMX-2, MMX-101,XP5-M, XP5-C, and 7). Maximum loop current is 200mA (short Term. 1, 5 (+); 3,7 (-).
CMX-1, CMX-2, NBG-12LX, BGX-10L, circuit) or 100 mA (normal). Maximum loop
A circuit or path directly XPP-1, ISO-X.Ten SLC Loops max per resistance is 40 ohms. Supervised and power-
over which multiple AM2020 system,4 per AFP1010. limited.
signals are transmitted When more than 100 Isolator
and received. Modules/Isolator Bases are connected
to an SLC Loop, decrease the 198
address capacity by two addresses for
LIB-200A/LIB-400 Board: Employs 99 24 Volts DC nominal, 27.6 volts DC maximum. NFPA Style 4: LIB-200A/LIB-
intelligent detectors and 99 Maximum length is 12,500 ft. (3810 m) per 400
addressable modules - SDX-551, SDX- channel (NFPA Style 4) or 12,500 ft. (3810 m) Channel A - Term. 1 (+), 3 (-);
551TH, SDX-751, FDX-551, CPX-551, total twisted pair length (NFPA Style 6 and 7). Channel B - Term. 5 (+), 7 (-).
LIB-200A or LIB-400
CPX-751, IPX-751, MMX-1, MMX-2, Maximum loop current is 200mA (short circuit) or NFPA Style 6, 7: LIB-200A/LIB-
SLC Loop
MMX-101, XP5-M, XP5-C, CMX-1, 100 mA (normal). Maximum loop resistance is 400
CMX-2, NBG-12LX, BGX-10L, XPP-1, 50 ohms. Supervised and power-limited. Term. 1, 5 (+); 3,7 (-).
A circuit or path directly
ISO-X. Ten SLC Loops max per
over which multiple
AM2020 system, four per AFP1010.
signals are transmitted
When more than 100 Isolator
and received.
Modules/Isolator Bases are connected
to an SLC Loop, decrease the 198
address capacity by two addresses for
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud Port A - TB1 - 1 and 2

MIB-W: Media Interface Board used to
transmission rate. Refer to the NOTI FIRE NET Port B - TB1 - 3 and 4
connect nodes with twisted-pair wire
Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 Port A - U1 (Tx), U5 (Rx)
MIB-F: Media Interface Board used to micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. Port B - U2 (Tx), U3 (Rx)
connect nodes with fiber-optic cable Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud
transmission rate
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud Port A (wire) - TB1 - 1 and 2
MIB-WF: Media Interface Board used transmission rate. Port A - refer to the Port B (fiber) - U2 (Tx), U3 (Rx)
NOTI FIRE NET to connect from twisted-pair wire to fiber NOTI FIRE NET manual, Document 50257 for
SLC
or fiber to twisted-pair wire at any distance limits. Port B - Fiber Type: 62.5/125
network node. micrometers, Wavelength: 820 nanometers,
Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud Port A: TB1- 1 and 2

RPT-W: Repeater used to boost the transmission rate. Refer to the NOTI FIRE NET Port B: TB1- 3 and 4
data signal between network nodes Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits.
supporting twisted-pair wire only.
A series of modules and
products which allow a
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 Port A: U14 (Tx), U11 (RX)
group of Fire Alarm RPT-F: Repeater used to boost the
micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. Port B: U15 (Tx), U12 (RX)
Control Panels (FACPs) data signal between network nodes
Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud
and other control supportingh fiber-optic cable
transmission rate
equipment to connect,
forming a true peer-to- NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud Port A (wire) TB1- 1 and 2
peer network RPT-WF: Repeater used to boost the transmission rate. Port A - refer to the Port B (fiber) U15 (Tx), U12
data signal between network nodes NOTI FIRE NET manual, Document 50257 for (RX)
supporting both twisted-pair wire and distance limits. Port B - Fiber Type: 62.5/125
fiber-optic cable micrometers, Wavelength: 820 nanometers,
Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). 312.5 Kbaud PortA: TB2 - 1 and 2

NAM-232W: Network Adapter Module transmission rate. Refer to the NOTI FIRE NET Port B: TB2 - 3 and 4
functioning as an interface between the Manual, Document 50257 for distance limits.
AFP200 FACP and the NOTI FIRE NET
with twisted-pair wire
NFPA Style 4 (Class B). Fiber Type: 62.5/125 Port A: J2 (Tx), J1 (RX)
NAM232F: Network Adapter Module micrometers. Wavelength: 820 nanometers. Port B: J4 (Tx), J3 (RX)
functioning as an interface between the Maximum Attenuation: 10 dB. 312.5 Kbaud
AFP200 FACP and the NOTI FIRE NET transmission rate
with fiber-optic cable

Polarity Reversal CMX Control Module (two required) Supervised/power-limited. Maximum distance See Chapter One of the
with an RPT-680 Reverse Polarity Trip and line impedance limited by Receiving Unit AM2020/AFP1010 Manual,
device: Ratings. Supervising an Uninterruptable Power
For connection to a polarity Supply.
reversal circuit of a remote
station receiving unit
XP Transponder XPP-1 module with Supervised/power-limited. Maximum distance See the XP Transponder Manual.
two RPT-680 Reverse Polarity Trip and line impedance limited by Receiving Unit
devices Ratings.
SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial +/- 5 volts peak-to-peak. Supervised and See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2 and
Interface Board: Employs AMG-1 power-limited. 6000 ft. (1828.8 m) max 5.4-1 of the AM2020/AFP1010 Manual
Audio Message Generator and distance. Terminating resistor = 120 ohms, 1/4-
annunciator modules - ACM-16AT watt (Part # 71244). Characteristic impedance
(AEM-16AT), ACM-32A (AEM-32A). of the wiring is 120 ohms.Transmission rate =
20.833 Kbps
SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Supervised and See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2 and
EIA-485 Interface Interface Boards: Employs CRT-2 power-limited. Max distance limited by 5.2-1 of the AM2020/AFP1010
and EIA-232 Interface capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E Manual.
Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps.
SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Power-limited but See Chapter One, Figures 5.1-2, 5.3-
Interface Boards: Employs PRN-4, not supervised. Max distance limited by 1, and 5.3-2 of the AM2020/AFP1010
PRN-5, and Keltron 40-column capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E Manual.
printers. Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps.
SIB-2048A and SIB-NET Serial +/- 12 volts peak-to-peak. Power-limited but See Chapter One, Figure 5.1-2 of the
Interface Boards: Employs UL EDP not supervised. Max distance limited by AM2020/AFP1010 Manual.
listed equipment (display monitors and capacitance of wire (refer to EIA-232E
printers). Standard). Transmission rate of 2400 bps
MMX-1 Monitor Module: Employs ELR = 47K, 1/2, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR in NFPA Style B: MMX-1 Terminals 7 (+),
contact-type devices only - manual pull Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field 6 (-) NFPA Style D: MMX-1 Terminals
stations, heat detectors, supervisory or wiring. 20 ohms max loop resistance. 7,8 (+), 6,9 (-)
waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke Supervised and power-limited (210 uA).
detectors.
MMX-101 Monitor Module: Employs ELR = 47K, 1/2, Part # A2143-20 (N-ELR in NFPA Style B: MMX-101 Red Wire
contact-type devices only - manual pull Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field (+), White Wire (-)
stations, heat detectors, supervisory or wiring. 20 ohms max loop resistance.
waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke Supervised and power-limited (210 uA).
detectors.
XP Transponder XPM-8 module: 24 VDC (nominal), 200mV ripple. ELR = NFPA Style B (8 zones on XPM-8 P2):
Employs 2-wire smoke detectors and 2.2K, 1/2 watt, Part #R-2.2K (N-ELR in NFPA Style D (4 zones on XPM-8
contact-type devices - manual pull Canada). NFPA Style B or Style D field wiring. P2):.
stations, heat detectors, supervisory or 100 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised
waterflow switches, and 4-wire smoke and power-limited (50 uA). See Notifier
Initiating Device Circuit detectors. Device Compatibility Document, 15378, for a
list of compatible 2-wire detectors.
A circuit to which automatic or
XP Transponder XPM-8L module: 24 VDC. ELR=10K, 1/2 watt, Part # R-10K (N- NFPA Style B (8 zones on XPM-8L
manual signal-initiating
Employs dry-contact type devices only ELR in Canada). NFPA Style B field wiring. P2)
devices are connected where
- manual pull stations, heat detectors, 1000 ohms max loop resistance. Supervised
the signal received does not
supervisory or waterflow switches, and and power-limited.
identify the individual device
4-wire smoke detectors.
being operated.
24VDC Input 12-18 AWG (3.25-0.75 mm†). MMX-2 Terminal 3(-) and 4(+)
See Document M500-03-00 for limits.
Supervised. Power limiting is a function of the
24 VDC source.
MMX-2 Monitor Module: Maximum of NFPA Style B or D Initiating Device Circuit 12- NFPA Style B MMX-2 Terminal 6(-)
40 MMX-2 modules per LIB. Employs 18 AWG (3.25-0.75 mm†) 25 ohms max and 7(+)
2-wire smoke detectors. (including 24VDC input wiring above). NFPA Style D MMX-2 Terminals 6,9(-)
Supervised and power limited (90mA). 3.9K, and 7, 8(+)
1/2 W end-of-line resistor required at terminals
8 and 9 for NFPA Style D operation. See
Document M500-03-00 for additional limits.
See Notifier Device Compatibility Document
for a list of compatible 2-wire detectors.
XP5-M Transponder monitors 5 dry- ELR Model R-47K, 1/2 watt (N-ELR in NFPA Style B, TB1-TB5: B-, B+
contact type Class B initiating device Canada) NFPA Style B field wiring. 1200
circuits, (manual pull stations, heat ohms max loop resistance. Supervised and
detectors, four-wire smoke detectors, power-limited. Normal 1.7 mA, activated 3.0
etc.) mA.

APPENDIX B LISTED EQUIPMENT
SECTION B.1 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES
Equipment listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
Notifier A2143-00 47K ELR, 1/2 watt resistor ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module
AA-30/AA-30E 30-Watt Audio Amplifier L20-300-BX Enclosure; recessed mount
AA-100/AA-100E 100-Watt Audio Amplifier L20-310-BX Enclosure; surface mount
AA-120/AA-120E 120-Watt Audio Amplifier LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module
ABF-1 Annunciator Flush Box LCD-80TM Liquid Crystal Display
ABF-1D Annunciator Flush Box LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module
ABF-2 Annunciator Flush Box LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module
ABF-2D Annunciator Flush Box LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module
ABF-4 Annunciator Flush Box LIB-200 Loop Interface Board
ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module LIB-200A Loop Interface Board
ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank LIB-400 Loop Interface Board
ABS-1T Annunciator Surface Box MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device
ABS-2 Annunciator Surface Box MIB-F Media Interface Board for Noti•Fire•Net™
ABS-8R Surface Box for ACM-8R or UDACT MIB-W Media Interface Board for Noti•Fire•Net™
ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module MIB-WF Media Interface Board for Noti•Fire•Net™
ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module
ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module MMX-2 Addressable Monitor Module
ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module
ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer MON-17 17-inch Monitor
ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel MON-19 19-inch Monitor
AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module MON-21 21-inch Monitor
AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2
AKS-1 Annunciator Key Switch MPS-24A/MPS-24AE Main Power Supply
AMG-1 Audio Message Generator MPS-TR Trouble Relay
AMG-E Audio Message Generator N-ELR Assortment Pack with Mounting Plate
APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station
ATG-2 Audio Tone Generator NIB-96 Network Interface Board
AVPS-24 Audio Visual Power Supply NR45-24/NR45-24E Remote Battery Charger
B224RB Intelligent Relay Base NRT-586T Network Reporting Terminal
B224BI Intelligent Isolator Base PageNet-1 Ancillary Paging Device
B501 Flangeless Detector Base PRN-4 80-Column Printer
B501BH Sounder Base PRN-5 Printer
B524BI Isolator Base PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour
B524RB Relay Base R-10K 10K End-of-Line Resistor, 1/2 watt
B710 LP Standard Low ProfileDetector Base R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor
BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor
BP-3 Battery Dress Panel R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor
BX-501 Base for all Intelligent Detectors/Sensors R-470K 470K End-of-Line Resistor
CCM-1 Communication Converter Module R-47K 47K End-of-Line Resistor
CHG-120 Battery Charger RM-1 Remote Microphone
CHS-4 Chassis RM-1SA Remote Microphone
CHS-4L Chassis RPJ-1 Fireman's Phone Jack
CMX-1 Addressable Control Module RPT-485F EIA-485 Repeater - Fiber
CMX-2 Addressable Control Module RPT-485W EIA-485 Repeater - Wire
CPU-2 Central Processing Unit RPT-485WF EIA-485 Repeater - Wire/Fiber
CPU-2020 Central Processing Unit RPT-W Repeater for Noti•Fire•Net™
CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector RPT-WF Repeater for Noti•Fire•Net™
CPX-751 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector SBB-A3 A-size Backbox
CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard SBB-B3 B-size Backbox
DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly SBB-C3 C-size Backbox
DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly SBB-D3 D-size Backbox
DP-1 Dress Panel SCS Series Smoke Contol Station
DPDW-1 Double Well Dress Panel SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
DPSW-1 Single Well Dress Panel SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
DR-A3 A-size Door SDX-751 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
DR-B3 B-size Door SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board
DR-C3 C-size Door SIB-2048A Serial Interface Board
DR-D3 D-size Door SIB-232 Serial Interface Board
ELR-10K Resistor SIB-NET Serial Interface Board for Noti•Fire•Net™
FAPT-751Acclimate™ Multi-sensor Photo-thermal STS-1 Security Tamper Switch
FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor TPI-232 Modem
FDX-551R Intelligent Thermal Sensor XP5-C Transponder Output Module
FFT-7 Fire Fighters Telephone XP5-M Transponder Input Module
FFT-7S Fire Fighters Telephone XPC-8 Transponder Control Module
FHS Fireman's Handset XPDP Transponder Dress Panel
FPJ Fireman's Phone Jack XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module
ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module
INA Intelligent Network Annunciator XPP-1 Transponder Processor
IPX-751 Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/ XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module
Thermal Detector Refer to the Device Compatibility Document 15378 for additional
compatible equipment.
Appendices 15088:K 3/21/01 B-1
SECTION B.2 FACTORY MUTUAL
Equipment suitable for use in Factory Mutual (FM) Systems as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
ABF-1 Annunciator Flush Box SIB-232 Serial Interface Board

ABF-2 Annunciator Flush Box System Sensor
ABF-4 Annunciator Flush Box A77-716B EOL Power Supervision Relay
ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module MA-24 Electronic Sounder, 24 VDC
ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank MA/SS-24I Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC
ABS-1T Annunciator Surface Box SS-24 Strobe, 24 VDC
ABS-2 Annunciator Surface Box Wheelock
ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module 7002T-24 Horn with strobe, 24 VDC
ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module
ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module
ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel
AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module
AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module
AKS-1 Annunciator Key Switch
AVPS-24 Audio/Visual Power Supply
BGX-101L Addressable Manual Pull Station
CHS-4 Chassis
CHS-4L Chassis
CMX-1 Addressable Control Module
CPU-2 Central Processing Unit
CPX-551 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector
CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard
DIA-1010 Display Interface Assembly
DP-1 Dress Panel
DR-A3 A-size Door
DR-B3 B-size Door
DR-C3 C-size Door
DR-D3 D-size Door
FDX-551 Intelligent Thermal Sensor
ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies
ISO-X Loop Fault Isolator Module
LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display Module
LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module
LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module
LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module
LIB-200 Loop Interface Board
MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device
MMX-1 Addressable Monitor Module
MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module
MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2
MPS-24A Main Power Supply
MPS-TR Trouble Relay
NIB-96 Network Interface Board
PRN-4 Printer
PS-12250 Battery 12-volt, 25 amp-hour
R-120 120 Ohm End-of-Line Resistor
R-2.2K 2.2K End-of-Line Resistor
R-27K 27K End-of-Line Resistor
REL-47K EOL for Releasing Service
SBB-A3 A-size Backbox
SBB-B3 B-size Backbox
SBB-C3 C-size Backbox
SBB-D3 D-size Backbox
SDX-551 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
SDX-551TH Intelligent Photoelectric Detector
SIB-2048 Serial Interface Board
B-2 Appendices 15088:K 3/21/01

SECTION B.3 LLOYD'S REGISTER
Equipment listed by Lloyd's Register as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
AA-30 Audio Amplifier

AA-120 Audio Amplifier
ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module
ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank
ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module
ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module
ADP-4 Annunciator Dress Panel
AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module
AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module
AMG-1 Audio Message Generator
B501 Flangeless Base
CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications
CAB-BM Cabinet for Marine Applications
CHS-4L Chassis
ET-1010-R Speaker
ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies
LIB Loop Interface Board
SB-10 Surface Backbox
SMB-500 Surface Mount Box
XPC-8 Transponder Control Module
XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module
XPP-1 Transponder Processor
System Sensor
MA/SS-24D Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC

SECTION B.4 UNITED STATES COAST GUARD
Equipment suitable for use in marine and shipyard applications as compatible with the AM2020/AFP1010:
AA-120 120-Watt Audio Amplifier XPC-8 Transponder Control Module

AA-30 30-Watt Audio Amplifier XPDP Transponder Dress Panel
ABM-16AT Annunciator Blank Module XPM-8 Transponder Monitor Module
ABM-32A Annunciator Module Blank XPM-8L Transponder Monitor Module
ACM-16AT Annunciator Control Module XPP-1 Transponder Processor
ACM-32A Annunciator Control Module XPR-8 Transponder Relay Module
ACM-8R Annunciator Control Module System Sensor
ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer A2143-00 End-of-Line Resistor Assembly
AEM-16AT Annunciator Expander Module A77-716B EOL Power Supervision Relay
AEM-32A Annunciator Expander Module MA-24 Electronic Sounder, 24 VDC
AMG-1 Audio Message Generator
MA/SS-24I Electronic Sounder/Strobe, 24 VDC
AMG-E Audio Message Generator
RA400Z Remote LED Assembly
ATG-2 Audio Tone Generator
SS-24 Strobe, 24 VDC
BX-501 Base for all Intelligent Detectors/Sensors
CAB-AM Cabinet for Marine Applications
CAB-BM Cabinet for Marine Applications
CHS-4 Chassis
CRT-2 Video Display Monitor with Keyboard
DP-1 Dress Panel
ICA-4 and ICA-4L Interconnect Assemblies
L20-300-BX Enclosure; recessed mount
L20-310-BX Enclosure; surface mount
LDM-32 Lamp Driver Module
LDM-E32 Lamp Driver Module
LDM-R32 Lamp Driver Module
LIB-200 Loop Interface Board
MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip device
MMX-101 Addressable Mini Monitor Module
MPM-2 Main Power Meter-2
N-ELR Assortment Pack with Mounting Plate
PRN-4 Printer
SBB-A3 A-size Backbox
SBB-C3 C-size Backbox
SBB-D3 D-size Backbox

SECTION B.5 OPTIONAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Following is a list of optional equipment which may be used with the Notifier AM2020/AFP1010:
Annunciators B601BH Sounder for Flangeless Base

ACM-16AT, AEM-16AT, ABM-16AT
B710LP Low Profile Flanged Base
ACM-32A, AEM-32A, ABM-32A
LDM-32, LDM-E32, LDM-R32 BX-501 Standard Base for Intelligent Detectors
LCD-80 Liquid Crystal Display DHX-501 Addressable Duct Housing with Relay
ACM-8R, UDACT¹ DHX-502 Addressable Duct Housing
APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply F110 Retrofit replacement flange for B501B
CPU to APS-6R Cable (71033/75098) SMB-600 Surface Mount box for Detectors and Sounder Bases
Cabinets CAB-A3, B3, C3, D3 (backbox and door) B224BI Isolator Base
B224RB Relay Base
CCM-1 Communication Converter Module1
B524BI Isolator Base
CHG-120 Remote Battery Charger
B524RB Relay Base
CHS-4 Chassis
UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder (refer to the UZC-256 Manual)
CHS-6 Chassis
Voice Alarm Multiplex Equipment (Refer to the VAM-2020
CRT Terminal
Manual)
DP-1 Dress Panel
Audio Message Generators (AMG-1 or AMG-E)
ICA-4/ICA-4L Interconnect Chassis Assemblies
Audio Tone Generator (ATG-2)
LIB-200 Loop Interface Board *
Fire Fighter's Telephones (FFT-7 or FFT-7S)
LIB-200A Loop Interface Board*
Telephone Control Center (TCC-1)
LIB-400 Loop Interface Board*
Audio Amplifiers (AA-30/AA-30E, AA-100/AA-100E and AA-
MPM-2 Voltmeter and Ammeter
120/AA-120E)
MPS-24A/MPS-24AE Main Power Supply *
Low-Profile Chassis (CHS-4L)
Battery Connector Cables: Pos. (71071), Neg. (71072),
ACT-1 Audio Coupling Transformer
Interconnect (71070).
ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer
MPS-TR Power Supply Remote Trouble Relay
RM-1 Remote Microphone
RM-1SA Remote Microphone
PRN-4 Printer
VP-2 Dress Panel for upper 2" of Cab-3 series cabinets
PRN-5 Printer
XP Transponder Series (Refer to the XP Transponder
RKS-S Security Switch
Installation Manual)
SCS-8/SCE-8, SCS-8L/SCE-8L Smoke Control System
XPP-1 Processor Module
SIB-NET or SIB-2048A Serial Interface Board*
XPM-8 Initiating Circuit Module
DIB to SIB Cable (71046)
XPM-8L Initiating Circuit Module
SLC Loop Addressable Modules:
XPC-8 Notification Appliance Circuit Module
Addressable MMX-1, MMX-2, MMX-101 Monitor Modules
XPR-8 Relay Module
Addressable CMX-2 Control Module
XRAM-1 Non-Volatile Memory
ISO-X Loop Isolator Module
XPDP Transponder Dress Plate
NBG-12LX Addressable Pull Station
Miscellaneous:
BGX-101L Addressable Pull Station
A77-716B Power Supervision Relay
SMB-500 Surface Mount box for Control and Monitor
RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator
Modules
A2143-20 End-Of-Line Resistor Assembly
XP5-C Control/Relay Transponder
MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip Device
XP5-M Monitor Transponder
N-ELR Mounting Plate
NOTI•FIRE•NET™1
NCM-1 Noise Control Module
SIB-NET Serial Interface Board CAP-1 0.1uF 500V Capacitor
MIB-W Media Interface Board WC-2 Wire Channel
MIB-WF Media Interface Board CAB-AM/BM: Cabinets for Marine Applications
MIB-F Media Interface Board PL-AM/BM: Mounting Plates for Marine Cabinets
RPT-W Repeater MA/SS Series Strobe
RPT-WF Repeater Spectralert Series Horns, Strobes, Horn/Strobes
NRT-586 Network Reporting Terminal ET-1010-R Speaker
INA Intelligent Network Annunciator TPI-232 Modem
MON-20 20-Inch Monitor
MON-17 17-Inch Monitor * Assembly includes Grounding Cable (71073)
SLC Loop Intelligent Detectors: 1 Software must be compatible. Contact the Factory.
SDX-551, SDX-551B Photoelectric Detector
SDX-751 Low Profile Photoelectric Detector
SDX-551TH Photoelectric Detector with Fixed Thermal Element
CPX-551 Ionization Detector
CPX-751 Low Profile Ionization Detector
FDX-551 Thermal (heat) Detector
FDX-551R Thermal (heat) with Rate-of-Rise
IPX-751 Combination Ionization/Photoelectric/Thermal
Detector
SMK400 Surface Mount Kit for Flangeless Base
B501 Flangeless Base for Intelligent Detectors
B501BH Flangeless Intelligent Detector Base w/ Sounder

SECTION B-6 CITY OF NEW YORK
The equipment or material acceptable for use in accordance with the Report of Materials and Equipment Accep-
tance (MEA) Division be accepted under the following conditions:
a. When used with central office communicator or transmitter, the installation and operation of the equipment
and devices listed herein shall comply with Fire Department rule #3-RCNY 17-01, NFPA 72, and shall have
the capability of transmitting separate and distinct signals to indicate manual pull station alarm, sprinkler
waterflow alarm, supervisory signal indications and trouble indications.
b. LCD-80TM which can be remotely located up to 3000 feet from the control panel has a remote acknowl-
edge, silence, and reset features which can affect the control panel from remote locations. These features
are not to be employed in any installation in New York City.
c. Smoke Control station and expander (SCS-8 and SCE-8) are to be used in conjunction only with Notifier models
AM2020/AFP1010 fire alarm control panels when configured for smoke control. The SCS-8 must be mounted in
a separately listed model CAB-3 or ABS-4D enclosure which provides mounting for the SCS-8 and limited
access to the manual override switches. These smoke controls shall be arranged such that controls may only be
operated by use of or given access to by means of a fire department ‘1620’ key.
d. AM2020/AFP1010 control panels shall provide either redundant processors or Class A redundant SLC
loops as needed to positively assure the fail safe control of door locks, ventilation fans, elevator recall and
evacuation signalling which will not be rendered inoperable in the event of a fire alarm condition when
installed in any building which is required by code to have a Fire Command Station.
f. HVAC systems shall not be arranged to automatically restart upon the reset of a smoke detector or
control board.
g. The AM2020/AFP1010 is intended to be used as a Central Station Protected Premise Unit, it is to be

connected to a listed Ademco Model 678UL-F which in turn is connected to a Listed Ademco Model 685
receiver.
h. To provide service as a central station protected premises unit utilizing digital alarm communication tech-
niques, the AM2020/AFP1010/ control unit is intended to be interconnected to a Listed FireLite Model Notifier
911C/911AC digital alarm communicator transmitter or employ the listed FireLite Model Notifier 911/911A
subassembly.
i. The control units (AM2020/AFP1010/) may also be connected to the separately listed model UDACT to
provide remote station or central station service.
j. When the AM2020 control panel is intended for use as a proprietary receiving unit, the system must utilize
the CRT-1 terminal keyboard and Models P-80, PRN-2, PRN-3, or PRN-4 printers as the operators terminal
station. Both the CRT-1 and Model P-80, PRN-2, PRN-3, or PRN-4 must be located next to the AM2020
control unit.
k. The LCD-80TM remote annunciator shall only be used with the AM2020, AFP1010, and AFP-200 control
units.
All shipments and deliveries of such equipment shall be provided with a metal tag suitably placed, certifying
that the equipment shipped or delivered is equivalent to that tested and accepted for use, as provided for in
Section 27-131 of the Building Code.

AM2020
AFP1010
PROGRAMMING
SHEETS &
GLOSSARY
System Inputs
Address
Alarm Det. Day/Night Annunciator
(LxxDyy) Alphanumeric Label Tracking
Model Type I.D. Control-by-Event List Verify Sens. Det.Sens. Mapping
or (20 Characters Max) (Yes/No)
(Yes/No) (L/M/H) (Yes/No) (AxxPyy)
(LxxMyy)
Job Name: __________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Job Takeoff Form:

Completed by: _______________________________ Date: _________
Engineer: _______________________________________
G-2 Programming Sheets & Glossary 15088:K 3/21/01

System Outputs
Signal Walk Annunciator
Address Alphanumeric Label
Model Type I.D. Control-by-Event Equation Silence Test Mapping
(LxxMyy) (20 Characters Max)
(Yes/No) (Yes/No) (AxxPyy)

Completed by: _______________________________ Date: _________
Engineer: _______________________________________
Programming Sheets & Glossary 15088: K 3/21/01 G-3

System Softw are Zones
Annunciator
Address Type Cooperative Alphanumeric Label
Control-by-Event Mapping Notes
(Zxxx) I.D. Control-by-Event (20 Characters Max)
(AxxPyy)
Job Name: ______________________________________ Sheet ___ of ___ Job Takeoff Form:

Completed by: ____________________________________ Date: _________
Engineer: _______________________________________

System Annunciator Points
Address Alphanumeric Label
Model Type I.D . N otes
(AxxPyy) (20 C haracters Max)

C ompleted by: _______________________________ D ate: _________
Engi neer: _______________________________________

Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
Alarm Verification - A method of reducing false alarms incorporating time delays up to 50 seconds in length.
APS-6R - Auxiliary Power Supply. Used to supply filtered, non-resettable power to compatible devices.
Central Station - Main AM2020/AFP1010 panel and any associated annunciators and printers.
Control-by-Event (CBE) Programming - A method of providing a variety of output responses based on various
initiating conditions (events).
Cooperative Control-by-Event (CCBE) Programming - A method of providing a variety of output responses on

the NOTI•FIRE•NET™ network based on various initiating conditions.
Day/Night Sensitivity - A way to force intelligent detectors into high or low sensitivity using the High and/or Low
Sensitivity Zones.
Detector Sensitivity - The responsiveness of a detector to stimuli associated with fire (i.e. smoke, heat).
DIA - Display Interface Assembly (keypad, system status LEDs and the 80-character LCD).
Display Abbreviations:
ACK AL Acknowledged Alarm LMD Local Mode Intelligent Detector Address

ACK TB Acknowledged Trouble LMM Local Mode Monitor Module Address
ACL AL Acknowledged Clear Alarm LOZNDET Low Zone Day/Night Sensitivity
ACL TB Acknowledged Clear Trouble MDM TPI-232
ADDR ISIB NOTI•FIRE•NET Address MIBA MIB-W/WF Threshold Channel A
APM Auxiliary Printer Monitoring MIBB MIB-W Threshold Channel B
BC Bidirectional Copy NAM NAM-232
BCAP Battery Capacity NAR Non-Alarm Monitor Module Reporting
BLN Device Blink PAL Pre-Alarm
BSBY Battery Standby Time PEC Printer Error Continue (transmit)
BTYP Battery Type PGR PAGE-1
CLR AL Clear Alarm PORTS MIB Data Port Usage
CLR TB Clear Trouble PTI Primary Printer Trouble Inhibit
CMR Control Module Reporting RP Rapid Polling
CUT Signal Cutout RPT Reports Redirected to CRT
DBID Database Identification SER Security Monitor Module Reporting
DFT Drift Compensation SIL Signal Silence Inhibit
DPZ Disabled Piezo SL Status Line (CRT Terminal)
DVTCNTR Detector Verification Trouble Counter SUP Supervisory ACS Reporting
Limit TS Terminal Supervision
ERM Event Reminder UDACT Universal Digital Alarm
HIZNDET High Zone Day/Night Sensitivity Communicator Transmitter
ISIB Intelligent Serial Interface Board UPDN Upload/Download
LEDL LEDs latched on activated devices VER Alarm Verification
LMC Local Mode Control Module Address XINT External Interface
Download - To retrieve the system configuration program data from a file on an IBM PC (personal computer) and
store it permanently in the AM2020/AFP1010 system.
Drift Compensation - An algorithm which permits the maintenance of a constant smoke detector sensitivity by
accounting for environmental contaminants and other factors.

Entry/Exit Time - A short delay in alarm reporting from the entry/exit door that allows authorized personnel to
enter the building through the entry/exit door and disarm the system or exit the building after arming the system
without setting off the alarm. (Arm/disarm applications only).
External Interface - EIA-485 bidirectional serial port used for Upload/Download.
Forward Zone - A software zone which once activated by an input device or other forward zone may in turn
activate other zones and/or output devices directly. Zones and output devices activated by a forward zone are
contained in the forward zone control-by-event list.
Group Interface - Monitor module with Type ID SARM wired to a control module with TYPE ID CMXC that reports
alarms from a protected premise.
ISIB - Intelligent Serial Interface Board. Used for communication with ACS Annunciators (SIB-2048A, SIB-NET).
LIB-200, LIB-200A, and LIB-400 - Loop Interface Board. The electronics powering and communicating with each
SLC Loop.
Local Mode - The independent operation of a LIB board when CPU to LIB communications fail. Three cutoff
addresses are programmed by the user into system memory for local mode operation (one address for intelligent
detectors, one for monitor modules, and one for control modules). If communications between a LIB and the CPU
board break down, local mode will perform the following function: If an alarm occurs on a detector or a monitor
module at or below their respective cutoff addresses for that type of device, the LIB will automatically activate all
control modules at and below the control module cutoff address. Refer to Extended Local Mode Operation in
Chapter Three of this manual.
Local Mode General Alarm Bus - The LIB-200A and the LIB-400 incorporate local mode operation. In addition,
when installed in an ICA-4L chassis, an alarm detected on any LIB-200A or LIB-400 will cause the other LIB-200A
and LIB-400 boards to automatically activate all control modules at and below the control module cutoff address.
Refer to Extended Local Mode Operation in Chapter Three of this manual.
Point - The occupation of a system memory address by an addressable SLC Loop device, software zone or
annunciator point.
Protected Premises Unit - A remote AM2020/AFP1010 panel located inside the protected premises and report-
ing back to the central station via a NIB-96.
Protected Premise - An area in a building monitored by either a security area monitor or a group interface and
reporting to the central station or PPU as a Security Alarm trouble report.
Reverse Zone - A software zone which if not activated directly by an input device or forward zone may be
activated through an associated control-by-event equation. A reverse zone may be referenced in other control-by-
event equations. Reverse zones on a NOTI•FIRE•NET system may also contain cooperative control-by-event
equations.
Ringback - An indication from the central station to the protected premises indicating whether the system is
armed. Can be at an annunciator or a PPU (if used). (Arm/disarm applications only.)
Security Access Monitor - Monitor module on the SLC programmed with software Type ID SACM and monitoring
various security devices in a security supervisory protected area. When activated, it generates a Security Alert.
Security Area Monitor - Monitor module on the SLC programmed with software Type ID SARM and monitoring
various security devices in a security supervisory protected area or protected premise. When activated, it
generates a Security Alarm.
Signal Cutout- -A feature of the system which causes the signal silence function to activate automatically after
a programmed time period following a fire alarm. This option has a resolution of eight seconds.
Security Supervisory Circuits - Circuit connecting various security devices to the security area monitor or
security access monitor.
Security Supervisory Protected Area - An area in a building monitored by security access monitor and report-
ing to the central station or PPU as a Security Alert trouble report.
Signal Silence - A function which causes participating fire alarm activated notification appliances or other
outputs to deactivate without otherwise affecting the state of the system.
Signal Silence Inhibit - A feature of the system which blocks the signal silence function for a programmed time
period immediately after a fire alarm.
SLC Loop - Signaling Line Circuit. The physical connection along which addressable devices and equipment may
communicate.
Software Zone - A label internal to the system which may be assigned to addressable devices to form a group.
Tracking - Attribute of an input device which prevents the latching of active (i.e. alarm, supervisory) states.
Upload - To make a copy of the AM2020/AFP1010 system configuration program data and store it in a file on an
IBM compatible PC (personal computer).
Zone Boundary - The highest forward activated software zone in the system. This represents the division
between forward and reverse activated zones/devices.

Limited Warranty
NOTIFIER® warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture, under normal use and service.
Products are date stamped at time of manufacture. The sole and exclusive obligation
of NOTIFIER® is to repair or replace, at its option, free of charge for parts and labor,
any part which is defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service.
For products not under NOTIFIER® manufacturing date-stamp control, the warranty
is eighteen (18) months from date of original purchase by NOTIFIER®'s distributor
unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which
case the shorter period shall apply. This warranty is void if the product is altered,
repaired or serviced by anyone other than NOTIFIER® or its authorized distributors or
if there is a failure to maintain the products and systems in which they operate in a
proper and workable manner. In case of defect, secure a Return Material Authorization
form from our customer service department. Return product, transportation prepaid,
to NOTIFIER®, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472-1653.
This writing constitutes the only warranty made by NOTIFIER® with respect to its
products. NOTIFIER® does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by
fire or otherwise, or that its products will in all cases provide the protection for which
they are installed or intended. Buyer acknowledges that NOTIFIER® is not an insurer
and assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience,
transportation, damage, misuse, abuse, accident or similar incident.
NOTIFIER ® GIVES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE
HEREOF. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOTIFIER® BE LIABLE FOR ANY
LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE
NOTIFIER® PRODUCTS. FURTHERMORE, NOTIFIER® SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE
OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USE OF
ITS PRODUCTS.
This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by
NOTIFIER®. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty
is authorized.
"NOTIFIER" is a registered trademark.
Technical Publishing Document WarNBg-F.P65 01/18/2000

World Headquarters
One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA
G-10 203-484-7161 • Fax 203-484-7118 Programming Sheets & Glossary 15088:K 3/21/01
www.notifier.com

AM2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AM2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AM2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PN 15088:K ECN 01-149

Fire Alarm Control Panel

Section One Installation Overview ............................................................................ 1-5

Section Two Cabinets ................................................................................................ 1-7

Section Three Power Supplies ................................................................................... 1-33

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

Section Four Signaling ............................................................................................. 1-51

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01 v

Section 4.7 The Control Module .................................................................................................... 1-70

Section 4.8 The Addressable Manual Pull Station ....................................................................... 1-76

Section Five Serial Communications ...................................................................... 1-83

Section Six Standard-Specific Requirements ...................................................... 1-92

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

Section Two Prior/Next/Auto Step .......................................................................... 2-17

Section Three Special Function ................................................................................. 2-18

Section Four Fire Alarms ......................................................................................... 2-22

Section Five Troubles .............................................................................................. 2-24

Section Six Remote Peripherals ............................................................................ 2-29

Section Seven Trouble Messages .............................................................................. 2-30

Section Eight Drift Compensation ............................................................................ 2-32

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01 vii

Section One Main Programming ............................................................................... 3-7

Section Two The Alter Status Menu ........................................................................... 3-43

Section Five Dual Stage Alert/Evacuation .............................................................. 3-72

CHAPTER FOUR SECURITY

Appendix B Listed Equipment ................................................................................ B-1

PROGRAMMING SHEETS & GLOSSARY

AM2020/AFP1010 15088:K 3/21/01

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

Intelligent Analog Addressable Fire Detectors

Intelligent Addressable Fire and Security Initiating Devices

Intelligent Addressable Notification Devices and Addressable Control Relays

Notification Appliance Power

Voice Evacuation Functions

Audio Amplifier Power

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

1-4 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Section 1.1 Basic Equipment

BP-3 Battery Dress Panel

CPU-2020 (BE-2020N) or CPU-2 (BE-1010N) Central Processor Unit

DIA-1010 or DIA-2020 Display Interface Assembly

ICA-4L Interconnect Chassis Assemblies

Section 1.2 Related Documentation

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

Table 1.2-1 Related Documentation

1-6 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Product Line Information

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

Figure 2.1-1 Cabinet Backbox Mount

1-8 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

1) Insert door hinges (A) into the top and bottom

2) Thread stud (B) into the BOTTOM hinge first.

3) Align the door on the backbox, so that the door

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01

CAUTION: The lock must be installed in locked position

Left hinged door

The lock mechanism as viewed The lock mechanism as viewed

1-10 Installation 15088:K 3/21/01

Installation 15088: K 3/21/01